



I 





COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 


/ 




















































THE MILLENNIUM 

AND 

MEDICAL SCIENCE 


By 

DAVID NICHOLAS SCHAFFER, M.D. 

t\ 

Member of 

"The American Medical Association,” "The American Public Health 
Association,” "The American Association for the Advancement of 
Science,” "The British Association for the Advancement of 
Science,” "The Association for the Study of the Internal 
Secretions,” "The Friends of Medical Progress,” 

"The Chicago Medical Society,” etc. 


Published 1924 





Copyright, 1924 

BY 

DAVID NICHOLAS SCHAFFER, M. D. 
All Rights Reserved 


Printed in the United States of America 






4>*U ' 



TO 

THE MEMORY 
of the 

Timely Friendship and Constant Association 
of the late 

MAXIMILIAN JOSEPH HERZOG, M.D., LL.D. 
to his 

Knowledge and Research Work 
on the subjects of 

Embryology, Bacteriology and Pathology, 
his late studies of 
Hormones or Enzymes or Ferments 
This Volume is Respectfully 
DEDICATED 









PREFACE 

I T is not the intention of the author that this 
work be considered as a text book or a treatise 
on the subject of medicine or methods of treat¬ 
ment in disease, but as three individual essays 
combined, making a concrete story of life; empha¬ 
sizing life in particular, from a view-point of 
sociology. The work in its entirety may also be 
considered as an essay concerning human under¬ 
standing or liberal education. 

In the general outline of this work the writer 
has kept constantly in mind the necessity of pre¬ 
senting it in terms understandable to the laity, and 
has adhered to this idea as far as possible. How¬ 
ever, in some parts the subjects are entirely new 
to the eyes and ears of the laity and it is essential 
that the special nomenclature pertaining to these 
subjects be used, if we would not lose the impor¬ 
tance of its argument and thereby sacrifice its full 
significance. 

The reader will notice that each of the three 
parts may be considered as a book in itself with 
more or less connection or bearing on the other 
two and that the three parts, embodied as a whole, 
make the concrete impression intentionally im¬ 
plied by the writer. Mention of the chief distinc¬ 
tive features of these three parts will give the 
reader an idea of what has been contemplated. 

First: The entire work is in complete har¬ 
mony with all contemporaneous writings by the 
different authors on the many subjects involved 
and their relative angles. 

5 


6 


The Millennium and Medical Science 


Second: As near as possible concise state¬ 
ments are made, of knowledge and authorita¬ 
tive opinion on facts, acquired in recent years 
and at the time of writing, regarding the 
maintainance of health, and cause and effect of 
disease, pertaining to the individual and to 
society. 

Third: Stress is laid upon the necessity of 
teaching youth, at the age of puberty, the truth 
regarding right living, the true cause and effect 
of disease and the essential need of knowledge 
relative to a recognized method of treatment of 
the different diseases of man. 

Fourth: All parts contain, to a marked de¬ 
gree, a volume of truth as we understand truth 
in its naked form, or a volley of facts which 
have been encountered and proven true facts, 
and which we have accepted as facts. 

Fifth: While reading this volume the reader 
may, at times, seem inclined to interpret some 
parts of the work as an apparently cold and 
cynical rebuke to the actions of society, or a 
crude criticism of our present day customs and 
traditions. This is not the case or intention; on 
the contrary, this work should be accepted in 
the broad sense of a sincere endeavor to add, if 
possible, to the good and welfare of humanity. 

The writer has been brief in some instances and 
on some subjects, merely stating the proven facts 
which have taken years of time and labor to de¬ 
fine and determine, and would require in them¬ 
selves many volumes, if detailed explanation were 
attempted in each instance. 

While it has been truly said that definitions are 
tiresome and make monotonous reading, there are 
instances where they are the only recourse we 
have, when defining a thing of any consequence 
or distinguishing one thing from all others or when 


Preface 


7 


clearly outlining what the content of a conception 
is; therefore, at times, we must necessarily resort 
to the use of the definition in a work of this type 
and caliber, that being the only elucidative and 
comprehensive method of explanation when at¬ 
tempting to define any subject, especially in any 
work of an instructive or scientific nature. In 
these instances all definitions have been given in a 
concise manner, and in words which tend to make 
them as plain as possible. 

The subject, “Endocrinology” or the study of 
the “Internal Secretions,” its importance and sig¬ 
nificance, has been advocated by several far-seeing 
men, in years long past, but only in recent years 
has it gained much ground. The recognition of the 
few facts now in our possession is acknowledged 
only by those who have given the subject some 
little time and study. This is obvious because of 
its primary and intimate complex obscurity of the 
present time, and the possibilities of the vast fields 
of far-reaching entanglements which may be in¬ 
volved, in the study and practice of medicine and 
surgery, in the near or far future. 

One object in mind while writing this volume 
is to advocate a theory, which may in time become 
a proven fact, and, therefore, a valuable asset to 
the practicing physician in the ultimate determina¬ 
tion of the true cause of disease, and a guide in the 
diagnosis and treatment of a given case. This 
would especially apply to those ailments due to 
the disturbance of the glands in the human 
economy which produce the internal secretions, 
wherein are contained the so-called hormones. 
However, the advocation of this theory is in no 


8 The Millennium and Medical Science 

way restricted to the sense, study and practice of 
the physician, but should be of vital interest,—only 
of course, in a general way,—to the average indi¬ 
vidual, because it entails important facts and some 
valuable information, as well as theory, of much 
consequence concerning ourselves, and which 
every one ought to know. 

The “Addendum” should not be considered as 
an integral part of this book, in the strict sense of 
being “all bona-fide facts” but to the contrary; a 
supplement and theory of the writer, based not 
only upon the many facts involved in this book 
proper, but also upon many other up-to-date and 
co-related subjects containing recognized facts, 
from a material, as well as a scientific view. 

The author wishes to express his gratitude to 
those authors whose books he has read with a 
bearing on and relative to the subject of “Internal 
Secretions,” also, the publishers who have made 
this work possible. 

D. N. S. 

104 So. Michigan Ave. 

Chicago, Illinois. 

June 1, 1923. 


FOREWORD 


Whosoever shall find and condescend to 
read—in this little book—these kindly 
intended meaty words. 

Will find, without a doubt, some things 
worth knowing, written here, within and 
between, its few pages, 

Perhaps, some valuable information of well- 
meaning import, concerning himself and 
herself, also their children; 

Which should surely create much whole¬ 
some food for timely and daily thought, 
in each and every mind, 

Relative to the future institution of 
things, for the good and welfare of 
everyone, and present constitutions. 


Our “being” was—conception—our only 
“beginning,” the result of an accidental 
incident, of a momentary pleasure. 

That secret inclination or compulsory 
force of animation demands we obey 
the commands of nature’s laws; 

Love and affinity; with cheek to cheek, 
heart to heart, desire for desire, the 
ecstasies of love’s climax come; 

After many of love’s pleasures, there 
follow the many pains, when a cherub 
of loving, troublesome comfort appears. 


9 


10 The Millennium and Medical Science 


The waste of a little blood at the end 
of each Moon,—in the human—tells the 
ebb and flow of life’s tide; 

When a microscopic animalcule, alive with 
motion, finds its way to impregnation 
of the ovum, or nature’s egg, 

Then the change in the monthly cycle and 
the retention of this vital fluid tissue 
mark the “conception” of a bride; 

Locked in darkness, so intimate, so close, 
and yet so far from all human eyes, 
nature’s all “wonderous process” moves; 

For forty successive lunar phases, here 
develops in “marvelous form,” without 
worldly aid, one more “being” to be born. 


To each and every infant, its Father 
and Mother owe good blood; that it may 
have an equal chance in life. 

We may be rich in cash or gold, in lands 
or fields and many other things of 
worldly loss or gain, 

But, to be rich in health; that which 
none can buy or sell, is the greatest 
richness of them all, 

In any stage of life, or in any clime, 
regardless of the daily wage, common 
earthly worth or temporal power gained. 


Foreword 


11 


Of every race and nationality, at any 
age, and all humanity, this should 
pertain, in part or as whole; 

The daily social intercourse and the 
physical merits, side of life, as well 
as the moral point of view, 

Provided, the reader has ordinary 
intelligence, is of sound mind, and 
sober sense, with truly sane capability, 

Should one be called to task, to render 
unto himself or herself, an honest 
opinion and a fair decision, 

In the giving or the passing of a 
just judgment, upon each and all, not 
as we would desire, but as we deserve. 


For by our actions or deeds, of good 
and bad, of yesterday, today and to¬ 
morrow, we shall all be judged. 

When the hour comes death will claim 
its own and we must needs pay the toll, 
with life and personality; 

There is no prolonging, no barter or 
trade and none to ask, none who know, 
who can say, or bid us stay; 

The air so vast and free we cannot 
breathe, our functions fail our vital 
needs, we have no choice but must go. 


12 The Millennium and Medical Science 


“Our character” needs be brave of heart, 
should we attempt success, as we mingle 
with the mighty throng; 

Yesterday we may have been big and 
strong, today we are weak, things are 
wrong, tomorrow, we are gone. 

So do we depart; into the “Boat of 
Charon” or across the “River Jordan,” 
we are hied into the unknown, 

From whose bourne, no man born of 
woman has ever returned and in the 
ultimate book, our finis is writ. 

But, when into our eternal graves we 
go, the secular misdeeds and virtues of 
a material doing will refuse to follow. 


It is the temporal way of things, our 
seemingly small indiscretions now be¬ 
come mountains of bites and stings. 

Strange to say, these acts shall live; 
the misdeeds as gruesome specters of 
shame and humiliation. 

Our noble virtues to be remembered and 
hailed as monumental memories of 
lasting honor and exaltation; 

Into the future lives of those loved 
ones left behind,—these acts will live— 
who will sing and play or pay, and pay. 


CONTENTS PAGE 

Preface . 5 

Foreword.9 

Introduction.17 

PART ONE 

Object Lessons in Health and Disease .... 23 

Chapter I 

Biological Physiology.27 

Chapter II 

Bacteriology.37 

Chapter III 

Pathology.52 

Chapter IV 

Immunity and Susceptibility.67 

Chapter V 

Metabolism.78 

PART TWO 

Nature’s Work and Organ Transplantation . . 87 

Chapter VI 

The Gland Operation.91 

Chapter VII 

Organ Transplantation.101 

Chapter VIII 

Our Vital Glands.123 

Chapter IX 

Inferential Judgment.141 

Chapter X 

Personality.152 

13 















14 


Contents 


PART THREE pAGE 

Science Triumphant and Its True Practice . . 161 

Chapter XI 

Endocrinology.166 

Chapter XII 

Hormones.180 

Chapter XIII 

Versed Opinions.190 

CONCLUSIONS 
Chapter XIV 

Conclusions to Part One.213 

Chapter XV 

Conclusions to Part Two.235 

Chapter XVI 

Conclusions to Part Three.254 

ADDENDUM 
Chapter XVII 

Prelude to Theory.286 

Chapter XVIII 

Basis for Theory.297 

Chapter XIX 

The Theory.331 

Chapter XX 

Conclusions to Theory.347 











LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 


Maximilian Joseph Herzog, M.D., LL.D. Frontispiece 
PART ONE 

FIGURE FACING PAGE 

1. Microorganisms Which Produce Disease . 50 

2. Red and White Blood Cells (of the human) 76 

PART TWO 

3. Vital Glands in the Female (of the human) 122 

4. Vital Glands in the Male (of the human) . 122 


5. Vital Glands in the Male and Female (of 

the human).140 

6. Vital Glands Connected by Blood Stream (of 

the human).140 


ADDENDUM 


7. Where Life Begins in the Human (front 

view).330 

8. The Beginning of Life in the Human (front 

view).330 

9. Where Life Begins in the Human (side 

view).346 

10. The Beginning of Life in the Human (side 

view).346 










INTRODUCTION 

Ad vivum 

(to the life; to the living) 

E say, “Sociology” is the science which treats 



▼ V of the origin and history of human society 
and its social phenomena, the progress of civili¬ 
zation, and the many laws controlling humanity, 
in its numerous phases of every-day life, as found 
the world over, as viewed from the many aspects 
of human intercourse in its relation to domestic 
and political economy. 

We of today, also all the different peoples of 
the world—the so-called civilized and uncivilized, 
Christian and heathen, regardless of their respec¬ 
tive station in life, highly cultivated or grossly 
ignorant—in one form or another, have our own 
methods and means of conforming to the laws, 
written or unwritten, which dominate our so-called 
“Social System” in accordance with its govern¬ 
ment (be that system of government good or bad), 
and the condition under which we live, in the dif¬ 
ferent parts of the world. All study their present 
and future life (more or less) from several angles, 
regardless of color or creed. 

As the world progresses and the coming genera¬ 
tions make their appearance, it is quite evident 
that there will be more and more knowledge—in 
every branch of learning—piled up for those to 
absorb, who are yet to come. In the past century 
the social, economic and industrial systems and 
constitutions have changed materially by leaps 
and bounds of advancement, and the signs of the 


2—July—24 


17 


18 The Millennium and Medical Science 

times (now more than ever) point the way to a 
future which will be a continual change of pro¬ 
gressiveness. As a consequence we find in our 
literature of today such terms as, ultramicro- 
scopic, metabolism, susceptibility, prophylactic, 
idiosyncrasy and many others, all of which are 
also used quite commonly in the vocabulary of 
the public in general. 

When we view our educational life, generally, 
it is truly surprising to learn how little some people 
know about themselves, relative to their physical 
make-up. By this we mean the physiology of the 
human system, its normal functions in health, and 
the cause of perverted function or abnormal con¬ 
ditions produced in any disease process. It is 
quite evident—from the history of the few former 
generations—that society in general has paid 
entirely too much attention to the general appear¬ 
ance of our outer-selves; methods of business, 
style of dress, politics, club-life, automobiles and 
worldly pleasures in general, but little or no atten¬ 
tion to our inner-selves. It is the things about our 
inner-selves which we should learn and come to 
know as being worth while, for these, as well as a 
knowledge of our outer-selves, are important, and 
essentially concern us, our families and our future 
generations. 

Biblical legends are of value and may be used 
as moral lessons. Those historical traditions of 
interest and worth should be considered, but in a 
class by themselves. And especially so when the 
material influences and achievements of the 
ancient world can be used as axioms and postu¬ 
lates of importance in readjusting and instituting 


Introduction 


19 


a regime pertaining to our present day life of 
reality and progress. 

It is only of late years that the essential need 
of such subjects as “Bacteriology” and “Pathol¬ 
ogy” have been duly recognized by the educational 
authorities. These studies and their allied sub¬ 
jects are now being taught—more or less—in all 
the high schools, therefore the coming generations 
will be more fortunate than our Fathers and Moth¬ 
ers of yesterday. For this reason the average 
grown-up of today—who knows, comparatively 
speaking, very little of these matters—will un¬ 
doubtedly find, briefly outlined in this work, some 
interesting facts concerning the methods of all 
infections and all processes leading to or produc¬ 
ing abnormal conditions as found in any localized 
or systematic disease, with an explanation of their 
important bearing on the general health. 

It will be seen and recognized by the average 
individual, after reading this book, that it is im¬ 
possible to draw a hard and fast line between 
those subjects which are contained in the first 
part of this work, namely, Biology, Physiology, 
Bacteriology, Pathology, Metabolism, Immunity 
and Susceptibility. Each of these plays its own 
integral part in nature’s process under the normal 
and abnormal conditions. It will also be seen that 
a knowledge of the subjects in the first, second and 
third parts of this book is necessary, if we wish 
to comprehend and appreciate the full significance 
of the “Addendum.” 

The only intelligent view of our cell life (in 
the human) must necessarily come in the form of 
“cell life under the microscope” if we would know 


20 The Millennium and Medical Science 

and understand it. Any individual is dumb to the 
extreme who does not know—after attaining the 
age of twenty-five, if not before—that, every 
human has a liver and the function of the liver is 
to produce bile; that every human has (or should 
have) two kidneys and their function is to produce 
urine; that every female has two ovaries (or should 
have) and their function is to produce the ovum 
or egg; that every male has two testes (or should 
have) and their function is to produce the sperma¬ 
tozoon or spermatozoa; it is the generative ele¬ 
ment of the male (the spermatozoa) which serves 
to impregnate or fertilize the generative element 
of the female (the ovum) and thereby produces 
life; all the above mentioned organs and functions 
are considered common place knowledge of to¬ 
day. The human body is truly composed of many 
structures or organs and these are surely made up 
of specific cells, each cell performing its own func¬ 
tion. 

When we speak of the cell life and its compo¬ 
sition—in the make-up of the human body and the 
part it plays in “health and disease” in the life 
of every individual—using such terms as nucleus 
and nucleins, protoplasm and proteins, it must be 
understood that it is a difficult matter to draw 
a strict or definite line, separating those intimate 
constituents which make up the individual cell or 
the unit or component parts of the organs of the 
human. 

We may say, however,—it being important of 
observation as we proceed—that the “nucleus” in 
a general way is considered as the “germinal cen¬ 
ter” or the germ of all cell life, it being—as a 


Introduction 


21 


rule—a spheroid body within the cell forming the 
essential and vital part, and is distinguished from 
the rest of the cell by its denser structure. It is 
made up of a network of threads (chromatin) 
contained in a clear liquid (achromatin) and by 
containing the “nuclein,” which forms the essen¬ 
tial chemic constituents, of the nuclei of cells, it 
being a colorless amorphous compound (of no 
definite shape) consisting of nucleic acids and 
bases which vary with the different varieties of 
nuclein, filling the spaces between the network of 
threads. 

The “protoplasm”—as a rule—surrounds the 
“nucleus” or nuclear body; protects and supports 
the life of the “nucleus,” being a viscid, granular 
material which forms the essential constituents of 
the living cell. It is composed mainly of “pro¬ 
teins,” and under the microscope is seen to consist 
of a network (spongioplasm) containing a fluid 
matter (hyalplasm) in the meshes; the whole— 
“nucleus” and “protoplasm”—being closed within 
a delicate film-like structure, the cell membrane. 
In every instance of all life, these cells are held in 
place or together by a network or framework 
known as the “stroma,” which make up the organ. 

It is quite possible that for many thousand years 
before man came, there existed upon our earth 
only a crude form of cell life. Therefore, it would 
not be fair to our early or late ancestors (have it 
as you please), whomso-ever or whatso-ever they 
may have been, not to mention at this point some¬ 
thing about those progenitors, as we know them, 
namely, cell life. We, no doubt, are the result of 
an early “cell life” which has priority of right, 


22 The Millennium and Medical Science 

by virtue of first arrival, therefore previous dis¬ 
covery and possession;—long before the domina¬ 
tion by man arrived, long before man inaugurated 
education;—long before the science of sociology 
had its original conception, by the education of 
man. We now know,—should we take the time 
and trouble to learn—that from the very begin¬ 
ning of all life and at the present day, everything 
that has life is made up of cell-life and all cell life, 
great or small, independent or organized, lives its 
life and dies; even as you and I. 


PART ONE 


OBJECT LESSONS 

IN 


HEALTH AND DISEASE 


H EREIN will be discussed several subjects of 
interest, laying particular stress upon their 
relations to the human body with its various and 
intricate compositions of live mechanisms, which 
provide the controlling forces for the disposition 
of all liquid and solid foods, its conduction into 
mental and physical energy and its elimination 
of all waste products; the combinations of defen¬ 
sive forces and detoxicating functions with its 
never ending opposition and battle against food 
toxins, chemical toxins, bacterial toxins, irritations 
and injuries of a minor or major character. 

These individual affinities, idiosyncrasies, im¬ 
munities and susceptibilities and its hidden process 
of body mineralization, assimilation and growth, 
as viewed from the physiological, biochemical, 
physiochemical, bacteriological, pathological and 
its constructive and destructive metabolism, stand¬ 
points. 

The significance of all forms of bacteria and 
the part played by them in all infections—in any 
localized or general condition—in the human body, 
and the possibilities of these microorganisms 

23 



24 The Millennium and Medical Science 


bringing about a pathological condition, resulting 
in a temporary or permanent disease. Considera¬ 
tion of mode and methods of transmission of the 
so-called social diseases now prevalent, to a great 
extent, in society. 

It is necessary that we recognize first of all the 
great importance of the individual cells,—each 
with its own particular construction, adapted to 
its individual function—which make up the differ¬ 
ent organs in the human. We cannot afford to 
pass the question of cell life, without some men¬ 
tion and comment relative to the important cells 
which are found in the blood stream. To disre¬ 
gard the cell life of the blood stream and its gen¬ 
eral properties would be an error. The study of 
the blood is known as hematology, and a little 
knowledge of this study is very essential to all sub¬ 
jects in this work. The blood stream as a whole 
consists of liquids and solids and is sometimes 
termed the “vital fluid tissue.” 

The blood stream is to the human body what 
water is to vegetation; the blood stream supplies 
the necessary nutrient properties, to all other cell 
life (contained in all the organs of the human, so 
they can perform their several functions); it car¬ 
ries the energy-yielding and body-building food 
from the digestive organs to all other regions for 
immediate use, or for storage (as fat or starch 
molecules) against the time of want, during men¬ 
tal and physical exertion, and all the work we do 
is an expression of the energy derived from these 
stored up molecules, previously contained in the 
food we eat; all being brought about by way of the 
blood stream; it carries from the lungs to the 


Object Lessons in Health and Disease 25 

needy structures, far from the source of supply, 
the oxygen required for internal combustion; it 
distributes heat in the body from warm to cold 
areas; it conveys waste materials (carbon dioxide, 
water and salts) from where they are produced 
by the wear and tear of bodily activity, to and 
from the lungs, kidneys and the intestinal tract, as 
well as other organs, in its process of elimination; 
it is the means of influencing (through the internal 
secretions) all manner of structures and functions 
in the human body. 

We will discuss for the moment, only the two 
cells of the blood which are apparently most im¬ 
portant; first, the red blood cell known as the 
erythrocyte, is a biconcaved disc in shape, com¬ 
posed of a soft elastic substance. In thin layers 
these cells are green, and in thick layers red in 
color; they are composed of a stroma, or kind of 
framework, largely of lipoid material, in the 
meshes of which is deposited the substance known 
as hemoglobin. In this way the red-blood cell per¬ 
forms its most important function necessary to life, 
the oxygen-carrying power of the blood. There 
are about five million of these red-blood cells to 
every cubic millimeter of normal blood in man. 
The red-blood cell in its normal structure and 
under normal conditions has no nucleus. 

The white-blood cell known as the leukocyte is 
also a native of the blood-stream but differs greatly 
from its brother, the red-blood cell, in size, con¬ 
sistency and function; there are several kinds of 
these white-blood cells in normal blood under nor¬ 
mal conditions. These white-blood cells are mostly 
important from a function standpoint, it being 


26 The Millennium and Medical Science 

their duty to assemble in vast numbers at the spot 
or site of any injury, infection, or process of in¬ 
flammation, to combat any disorder of an abnormal 
tendency by attacking any foreign body, organism 
or necrotic (dead or decaying) tissue, by an un¬ 
known process of ingesting and digesting them; 
these white-blood cells are sometimes termed the 
protective cells, or the policemen of the human 
system. This cell differs from the red-blood cell, 
having in its normal construction and under nor¬ 
mal conditions, a nucleus, of various shapes and 
sizes. The origin of the cells of the blood is said 
to be the red marrow of the bone and the lymph 
glands but there is some contention as to the spe¬ 
cific origin of specific cells found in the blood, so 
that the question remains (more or less) an open 
one, with much to be learned. It is said that dur¬ 
ing all periods of life there must be a more or less 
continual formation of all cells of the blood with 
an ever constant deterioration or wasting of these 
cells, the process of production and destruction 
being greatly accelerated by different stimulations 
and under different conditions, with nutrition and 
abnormal conditions playing their parts. It has 
been said: “We are at the present time in the 
beginning of the experimental phase of hema¬ 
tology,” or the study of the blood. 


CHAPTER I 


BIOLOGICAL PHYSIOLOGY 

“Life is not for learning, 
nor is life for working, 
but learning and working 
are for life. ,, 

—Herbert Spencer. 

I N the early stage of man’s development, long 
before the so-called “stone age period” it is 
possible that this animal-man devoted the greater 
part of his life to self-protection; waging a con¬ 
tinuous battle with the elements, as well as fighting 
not only the other wild animals of different species 
but also the antagonistic nomadic tribesmen; hunt¬ 
ing and fishing for food and seeking shelter for 
himself, his mate and offspring. Through the ages 
this trait in man has been paramount to all other 
considerations, thereby creating the hereditary 
tendency which has rightfully inspired or 
prompted the expression, “Self preservation is the 
first law of nature.” 

During the many periods or ages of transfor¬ 
mation,—from subservience of his early environ¬ 
ment, to the master-mind of our present day life, 
long after the indefinite stages of early metamor¬ 
phosis of the really lower animal had passed,— 
the daily routine of the animal-man compelled 
him to be out in the open air the greater part of 
his time, therefore he was strong and healthy in 
body, ambitious in the way of reproduction of his 
27 


28 The Millennium and Medical Science 


kind, and brave in spirit as well as moral courage, 
but his mental capacity was undeveloped, his only 
school being his powers of observation. 

This animal-man now changes to the man-ani¬ 
mal. It is true that he had changed in the contour 
of his body many years ago, but the animal traits 
and instincts remained. Every day he arose with 
the sun, for the sun was his only clock and he went 
forth to secure, as best he could, enough food and 
drink to sustain the life of himself and his family 
but for that day only. After darkness had come 
and gone and the sun again shone, he would go 
forth again to find things to eat and drink, just 
like other animals. To this animal-man there was 
no tomorrow and no thought of the morrow. 

Then came the instigation of valuation and 
there soon followed the greed for gold. The men¬ 
tality was beginning to assert itself, the wild 
animal nature was losing its prominence. No 
longer did this semi-civilized man sleep in the 
underbrush or in caves, nor eat his meat raw. 
Man had learned to kindle fire at his will and 
therewith boil water, live in a house and clothe 
his body; finally he developed an inclination to 
acquire knowledge. Is it any wonder that the 
small boy of today does not want to attend school 
or learn anything, not to mention the many 
grown-ups who have a marked aversion to learn¬ 
ing. Gould there be any doubt as to this heredi¬ 
tary trait, “being in the blood”? 

The alchemist of the “Middle Ages” who sought 
to produce gold from a chemical compound was 
indeed a typical example of how the animal-man 
had passed into the man-animal, then advanced 


Biological Physiology 29 

from the brutish nature and untutored mind to 
the literate and industrious. However, it also 
demonstrated other lessons learned by man; the 
development of the avaricious nature, to have, to 
hold and to hoard. No longer was this man- 
animal, like his ancestors, the lower-animal spe¬ 
cies, there being much evidence of change, even 
to his close relations, the plantigrade carnivorous 
mammals, who still remained in the wild animal 
kingdom; roaming on the mountain-side among 
the elders in search of food, crawling into a cave, 
a hole in the ground or into a hollow log, when 
night came, to rest and sleep, and for protection 
from the elements. 

So we find the man of ancient history, with 
the strong, healthy body, containing an almost 
fearless animal courage and the hereditary spirit 
of adventure, incensed by ambitions of discovery, 
conquest and future power, devising and contriv¬ 
ing the ways and means to visit the distant and 
strange lands and seas. In systematic methods 
he begins to delve into the secrets and laws of 
nature’s processes relative to “his own existence” 
and those of his environment, “Mother Earth.” 

When we keep in mind the fact that, “we do 
not live to eat, but we eat to live,” this should 
bring home to us also the fact that, every indi¬ 
vidual is composed of the earth’s products; in 
other words, we are to a marked degree, the result 
or sum and substance of the fruits and salts of 
the earth, with its many chemical properties and 
environment, namely, gases, liquids and solids, 
principally composed of the many primary ele¬ 
ments such as, oxygen, hydrogen, sodium, calcium, 


30 The Millennium and Medical Science 

and many other minerals, singly or in combina¬ 
tion, all being more or less of a chemical and in¬ 
organic nature. 

We will not consider, for the moment, those 
compounds and better known products of nature’s 
work, such as carbohydrates, proteins and fats. 
The carbohydrates are known as the different 
forms of sugars and starches; the proteins in the 
form of albumins, glutens and legumins; the fats 
are butter, lard, tallow and fatty oils. These are 
found in many combinations, constituting man’s 
food in its various forms, being produced by the 
several “ways and means” of nature’s process, and 
are known to be composed of the many primary 
elements. Perhaps we should entitle this chapter 
“Bionomy,” or “Physiochemic Biology,” since we 
are dealing, more or less for the moment, with the 
science which treats of the study of the laws of 
living functions. 

Under the term “Biochemistry” we study and 
learn to know those things relative to life which 
are of a chemical composition, being composed, as 
they are, of inorganic matter; these primary ele¬ 
ments being contained in combinations of air, 
liquids and solids are received into the human 
body in the form of foods, but not until these foods 
have been prepared for the human by first having 
passed (in most instances) through a secondary 
stage of a constructive and destructive nature and 
a tertiary stage or process of a reconstructive and 
redemptive character, all of which is known as 
“metabolism,” in the laws of nature. These sev¬ 
eral foods of nature’s making are necessary mate¬ 
rial, in proper amounts and kinds, to sustain life, 


Biological Physiology 


31 


from several vital viewpoints. First, in every in¬ 
dividual who would enjoy “good health.” Second, 
in every “prospective” father and mother. Third, 
in the “formation” and “construction” of another 
“being” in the giving of a new life; in every ex¬ 
pectant mother from the moment of conception up 
to the hour when the child is born into the outer 
world. Fourth, in the nursing mother. 

Having arranged these several vital viewpoints 
into four stages, it may be seen that these stages 
really comprise the life cycle of man, in this par¬ 
ticular phase of cause and effect of human exist¬ 
ence, as follows: beginning with the new-born, we 
have the first stage in the nursing mother who 
will by eating the proper foods, in amounts and 
kinds, give to her infant the proper food in 
amounts and kind, by way of mother’s milk;— 
when the child is old enough, it should be fed the 
proper foods in amounts and kind, later being 
taught in its youth the necessity of continuing to 
obey this unwritten law throughout the natural 
life—taking for granted that the first stage has 
been duly complied with, the second stage con¬ 
sists in the continuation of eating the proper foods 
in middle life, so that the male element of the 
prospective father and the female element of the 
prospective mother will contain, at the moment of 
conception, the proper constituents to produce a 
normal and healthy child; in the third stage we 
have the expectant mother who should eat the 
proper foods in amounts and kind, so that her 
offspring may benefit thereby in its early develop¬ 
ment and thereafter until it is born; having ar¬ 
rived at the fourth stage we have completed the 


32 The Millennium and Medical Science 

cycle and are back to the nursing mother, suckling 
her new-born, the infant being considered as the 
fourth stage; in other words we may say, the 
pregnant mother is stage one, the nursing mother 
is stage two, the child after the suckling age is 
stage three, and adult life after the age of puberty 
is stage four. All of the above has to do with the 
chemism, or the chemical affinity, in Nature’s 
processes, of her various methods of composite 
compounding or her ultimate amalgamation of 
these substances (the foods) into different com¬ 
positions, containing certain combinations of life’s 
properties, which evidently are the all-essential 
requirements for our existence. 

Biology may be defined as the science of life 
or living organisms, and Physiology is defined as, 
the branch of biology that treats of the vital phe¬ 
nomena as manifested by animals or plants. This 
manifestation may be summed up in one word, 
“function,” there being incorporated within this 
term, “function,” the unknown processes of 
growth, movement, mentality and reproduction, 
constituting in this instance, animal physiology. 
As a result of these general activities or this 
“function” in general—not only the functioning 
alone of the human being as a whole, but the 
functioning of the many individual structures of 
which the animal body is composed, as well as 
their combined functions—the animal at some 
definite period in life reproduces itself, in con¬ 
sequence of which the species to which it belongs 
is perpetuated. 

Life in every instance, when viewed in terms 
of stern reality, is only an indefinite period or 


Biological Physiology 


33 


extension of animated existence and always of a 
relatively known temporary character. Man in his 
finite capacity is of minute existence, and, gen¬ 
erally speaking, of little significance in his pass¬ 
ing; even today he is at all times at the mercy 
of the elements and in his environment entirely 
dependent upon nature’s laws, and truthfully 
admits he has no knowledge, voice or choice in 
his forthcoming, the wherefore nor where-from, 
as well as the wherefore nor where-to, in his going. 

The life of the average man of today is said 
to be about sixty-five years, then we say “he dies.” 
When death occurs it is recognized by the evidence 
of the several specific characteristics dependent 
upon the different changes produced in the many 
species which at one time constituted life, organic 
or inorganic, embracing all mineral, vegetable and 
animal life, as known to man upon earth. All 
things that live and die, is that manifestation of 
the absolute certainty based upon an uncondi¬ 
tional termination, long before the conception has 
taken place which gives the origin to that life 
and which is to be taken away by death. When 
we say mineral life or inorganic life, it is intended 
that this be construed as those inanimate proper¬ 
ties produced by nature’s processes; these being 
the primary essential contribution, and no doubt 
the fundamental principle to all secondary life or 
organic life in the various animated forms. 

ft has been recognized by many authorities and 
advocated by others that nothing can exist com¬ 
prehensible to the senses except there be a posi¬ 
tive and negative phase—leading up to or with a 
purpose of ultimate construction—to make a con- 


3 


34 The Millennium and Medical Science 

crete whole, especially as to actual existence and 
performance of function, regardless of size or 
combination of structure. Therefore, if we accept 
for granted that “life” is “positive”; it is then 
obvious that its opposite, “death,” must be the 
“negative.” These two important facts—the posi¬ 
tive and negative phases of all life—no doubt play 
their part in life, primarily as individual factors, 
each contributing to the whole, and secondarily, 
performing their function after becoming united; 
this apparent continued action and reaction make 
up to a great extent our creation of what is known 
to man as human existence on “Mother Earth.” 
In other words and from a broad sense of view, 
whenever and wherever we learn of any one thing, 
there will always be found upon investigation, its 
direct opposite which must necessarily be either 
of the antagonistic or repelling nature in some 
instances, or must contain the powers of volitional 
accord and harmony in other instances, but in 
either case, depending upon those unknown forces 
of individual characteristics and unknown laws of 
specific “attraction” (affinity) and of an alluring 
nature in some instances, or the attributes causing 
“repulsion” (inimical) and of perverse tendencies 
in other instances, when it so happens that these 
primary factors are brought into contact with each 
other; this is known as the “positive” or “nega¬ 
tive” chemotaxis. For example we may mention 
great and small, hard and soft, elastic and brittle, 
black and white; in another class we find wet.and 
dry, hot and cold, rich and poor, male and female; 
these things and many more produce a neutral 
state or a secondary thing or substance when the 


Biological Physiology 35 

extremes or primary elements are brought to¬ 
gether. 

In the study of the life of the human, it has 
long been recognized that “harmonious co-opera¬ 
tion” of all “organs and functions” are essential 
to the “life and well being” of the individual; 
though widely separated from each other and per¬ 
forming totally distinct functions, several organs 
are at all times closely allied to each other, and 
co-operating for the purpose of some secondary 
function in which their individual functions are 
not only blended but necessary to the life and 
further function of the animal body as a whole. 
Therefore, we may define “Biological Physiology” 
as the science which treats of the study of the 
relative life properties, principles and constituents 
which aid, or cause to function, those organs con¬ 
tained within the human body, thereby maintain¬ 
ing and reproducing life. 

After due consideration and deliberation of 
the above, it is not at all strange that the average 
child of today objects strenuously when compelled 
to attend school and master our methods of learn¬ 
ing. In the child is found the hereditary traits 
of our early ancestors who were carefree and ran 
about like the lower animals, in ignorance and 
nudity, and the small boy of today would easily 
follow in the footsteps of his savage progenitors 
if so permitted. The proximity of this relationship 
can be readily seen when we quote Doctor John¬ 
son, who said, 

“Pity is not natural to man. 

Children are always cruel. 

Savages are always cruel.” 


36 The Millennium and Medical Science 

The full significance of these words, which we 
must acknowledge as truth and therefore fact, 
may be represented in the following terms: the 
blood of man is to be regarded as “alive” in a 
strict sense, having powers of sustenation, defense 
and reproduction of life, subsisting mainly in the 
fact that “new organisms” (the human and his 
many parts) arise from portions of living matter, 
separated from the parents, because these “new 
organs” consist of portions of the parental proto¬ 
plasm; they having their origin, arising and being 
formed from pieces of this same protoplasm, grow¬ 
ing under similar conditions. In the simplest 
cases there seems to be no question as to the 
“laws” and “forces” of heredity; man’s blood being 
the dominating factor in his heirdom. It may be 
stated further with all sincerity that many indi¬ 
viduals of today, of all ages, never learn to 
divorce these hereditary traits of indiscretion and 
aversion to learning, therefore they are passed on 
to their children, not alone from the heredity 
standpoint but also inculcated, unknowingly per¬ 
haps, morally. As a consequence, these and many 
more of our hereditary tendencies never die. 


CHAPTER II 


BACTERIOLOGY 

T HERE are indeed many important factors re¬ 
sponsible for the discovery of the numerous 
groups of microorganisms or bacteria, and their 
different types, forms and actions. Nothing, of 
course, but a mere hypothesis (relative to their 
actual existence) could be formed until these 
animalculae were seen by man. It is said a father 
and son by the name of Janssen, who lived in 
Holland in the year 1590, constructed the first 
combination of lenses in the form of a microscope, 
thereby adding to the fundamentals of this dis¬ 
covery. In later years there was perfected a fairly 
good instrument, and with its aid could be seen 
these animalcule bodies moving about in the dif¬ 
ferent fluids and organic substances. It has been 
found in early writings—some say in the century 
before Christ—that there may exist in our world, 
animals of so minute a nature, that they can not 
be seen by the naked eye, and when they entered 
the human body in the form of air or water and 
with our food, they produced disease therein. 

In the years that followed many men were 
termed “seers,” “wizards” or “sorcerers” because 
they dared to have such ideas as the existence of 
bacteria and endeavored to prove their theory. 
They were mocked and scoffed at, treated with 
scorn, some thrown into jails for life and some 
put to death. Eventually, recognition of the theory 
37 


38 The Millennium and Medical Science 


came and then with the demonstration by the aid 
of the microscope, bacterial life became a material 
fact and the first step was taken towards the dis¬ 
covery of the cause and effect of much disease 
in the human body. 

So it may be seen that this conception that 
diseases in the human and the lower animals are 
due to bacteria, originating in the body or enter¬ 
ing the body from the outside world, and multi¬ 
plying therein is by no means a modern idea, but 
has been advocated for centuries. The question 
was debated and almost forgotten until it was dis¬ 
covered that certain fermentative processes were 
brought about by these microorganisms and their 
action. Then followed a long and continuous con¬ 
troversy—strong and bitter argument from all 
sides, involving theory, experience and experi¬ 
ments—as to whether or not these microorgan¬ 
isms were a demonstration of the “spontaneous 
generation of life,” occurring in the different 
organic material, thereby producing a fermenting 
or putrefying process. 

In the final demonstration of proven facts, that 
all “bacterial life” were not of a spontaneous 
nature, but are actually material things which are 
transferred or transmitted from place to place or 
from one thing to another or from one individual 
to another, there was also born the conception of 
antiseptic precautions and aseptic conditions. It 
was quite natural that man when once convinced 
of the presence of the microorganisms and their 
detrimental characteristics, should use all possible 
ways and means to combat this formidable foe 
of all mankind. These animalculae in their mis- 


Bacteriology 


39 


chief-making processes have in the past, given and 
are at the present day, giving to man—in all his 
glory of achievement—the battle of his life. It is 
not a fight for a day, a week, a month or a year, 
but one continued conflict, which has caused un¬ 
told deaths of mankind, from time unknown, and 
which will continue, no doubt, for ages to come. 

The fact that there really is much philosophy 
in everyday life cannot reasonably be denied, but 
we of the majority, the so-called common people, 
are so busy in the continual daily grind of secur¬ 
ing the necessary commodities of life, and by more 
or less compulsion attending our daily tasks, in 
many instances thereby eking out a bare existence, 
have but little time left for the purpose of analyz¬ 
ing life. The strain of the wear and tear on the 
mental capacity and physical structure of adult 
life is to be considered as foremost in importance. 
In this respect man’s struggle for existence and 
his many endeavors to maintain a healthy mind 
and body, when at all times he is more or less 
subjected to the various attacks or invasions of 
the numerous forms of deleterious microorgan¬ 
isms, is without question his greatest problem in 
every-day life. The large percentage of indivi¬ 
duals who are today suffering from infections, 
such as syphilis, gonorrhea, tuberculosis and the 
many other infectious diseases, attest this claim. 

The many trials and tribulations of human 
life, surrounding man at every turn, doubtless play 
their part in effect, and as a consequence there 
must needs be a reaction. There are but few of 
us who have a mind broad enough in its allow¬ 
ance of mitigation and moderation in its general 


40 The Millennium and Medical Science 

deduction of mankind; few who possess a so-called 
soul, kindly in its generosity of submission when 
dealing with those unfortunate individuals (in our 
every-day life) who are poor in cash or estate, or 
sadly deficient in their mental or physical capa¬ 
bilities; rarely do we find the man who (engrossed 
with the problems of every-day life) will stop to 
consider the ultimate truth in the termination of 
man’s life, to-wit: that the wealth, power and 
physical strength of man is, as a whole, a finite 
existence, and any worldly comparisons of these 
earthly acquisitions by man among his fellow men, 
are not only true exhibitions of the base passions 
but an actual demonstration of the egotism and 
forgetfulness that possession and duration of 
power, wealth and ostentation are indeed transi¬ 
tory. As a major class we clamor and strive for 
gold and power which, when attained, are gen¬ 
erally used to subdue our brother in the effort to 
gain more power or hoard more gold. One great 
writer said, “Man’s inhumanity to man makes 
countless numbers mourn.” And again, in the 
Greek literature we find written: 

There was a war begun to punish an 

iniquity. Year after year it drags on;— 

Till a murmur is begun, and there steals 
an angry pain 

Against kings too forward in the strife. 

For of God not unmarked in the shedder 
of much blood, 

And who conquers beyond right. 

Man by suffering shall learn, 

So the heart of him, again 
Aching with remembered pain, 


Bacteriology 


41 


Bleeds and sleepeth not, until 
Wisdom comes against his will. 

But, O, the way is long, and the weary 
world, like the old man of the Argive state, 
hears a rain that falleth bloodily, and it 
gropes and murmurs: 

I am lost; my mind dull-eyed 
Knoweth not nor feels 
Whither to fly nor hide 
While the House reels. 

The noise of rain that falls 
On the roof affrighteth me, 

Washing away the walls; 

Rain that falls bloodily. 

Doth ever the sound abate? 

Lo, the next Hour of Fate 
Whetting her vengeance due 
On new whetstones, for new 
Workings of Hate. 

When punishment, through ignorance 
or hate, becomes the be-all and the end- 
all of all existence, then the day comes when 
the punisher is punished. So it was, always, 
and ever will be, everywhere.” 


Into this apparently malevolent, milling and surg¬ 
ing maelstrom of humanity, with their pulling and 
pushing as they tug and maul each other, every 
now and then there is thrown a man, whose views 
of life are quite different from those individuals 
who are all about him. In his own way this dif¬ 
ferent man is beseeching his brother, “not to look 
upon much wine, when it is red, but a little is 
good for your stomach’s sake,” and quietly re¬ 
minds him that, “all is not gold that glitters,” and 
that “the days of man’s life upon earth are num- 


42 The Millennium and Medical Science 

bered.” Some listen and profit thereby; others 
scoff and laugh, and turn their backs upon him, 
and continue to struggle in life’s rut and the chan¬ 
nels of excitement, with its brawls and wrangles 
of uproar, eventually becoming an invalid or a 
cripple from disease, or are drowned by death, 
in the tumult of humanity. 

“He who the sword of heaven will bear, 
Should be as holy as severe; 

Pattern in himself, to know, 

Grace to stand, and virtue go; 

More or less to others praying, 

Than by self-offences weighing, 

Shame to him, whose cruel striking, 

Kills for faults of his own liking.” 

— Shakespeare. 

Of all the great benefactors of the human race, 
the Frenchman, Louis Pasteur, stands with a few 
others in the front rank. It is just about fifty years 
ago today, that the truth about microorganisms 
and insects, as the cause and the carriers of 
disease began to dawn upon the world. About 
that time, Pasteur said, “Oh, why am I not rich,— 
a millionaire? I would say to you: Come! We 
shall transform the world by our discoveries.” 
Today we find the words of his wish have come 
true. Practically speaking, the world has been 
transformed in the past fifty years, by the great 
discoveries, and by the study of bacteriology. 

There is much shedding of life’s blood and 
there are many demonstrations of death, other 
than the actual carnage among men with sword, 
bayonet and gun, in open conflict upon the battle¬ 
field. The microorganisms of disease kill thou- 


Bacteriology 


43 


sands of people every year, in every land. There 
is stalking about, with a great bludgeon, in the 
midst of all the peoples of the world, a great giant, 
“Argus like,” with many eyes of pernicious intent, 
ever watchful for victims, maligning the health of 
human beings by the thousands. This vile mon¬ 
ster, “Cerberus like” has many heads, three ugly 
heads in particular, each with its yawning maw 
which is never satisfied; these are syphilis, gonor¬ 
rhea and tuberculosis. This hideous and distorted 
thing is known as “disease.” With its many crav¬ 
ings of heinous appetite, it lives defiantly among 
society, sucking the blood and sapping the vitality 
of every individual with whom it comes in contact 
and who is unfortunate enough to fall a victim 
to its snares. 

The question has often been asked: Why is 
this polycrano-monster of disease among us and 
where did it come from? The question may be 
answered from this point of view: Bacteria or 
microorganisms, being of a material nature, like 
human beings, evidently originated with the origin 
of man. It is, however, quite possible, that some 
forms arrived upon our earth many thousands of 
years before the advent of mankind or his an¬ 
cestors. Those microorganisms which cause 
syphilis, gonorrhea and tuberculosis, are of social 
inheritance, an heirloom handed down to us by 
our ancestors, not intentionally, but because our 
forefathers were ignorant of the subject of bac¬ 
teriology, for many hundred years. Today, we are 
just beginning to realize its real significance, and 
that these three diseases, so much in evidence, 
are only the result of a pestilence which has for 


44 The Millennium and Medical Science 

ages traveled on and on, with practically no ob¬ 
stacle, in the form of treatment, to check its 
progress; therefore, its dimension of contagion 
grew larger and larger, generation after genera¬ 
tion, thereby reaching its present day magnitude, 
in its destruction of health of the human family. 

Human beings are naturally material things 
and have a material existence; without air to 
breathe, water to drink, and food to eat, the indi¬ 
vidual will pass beyond the great divide which 
separates the earth we know, from all things else 
we know not of, the wherefore, when or what. 
This much we do know: wherever human beings 
are, there is always some form of bacteria, and 
when there is discovered a so-called new land or 
a new people, there is always found some new 
form of bacteria. Therefore, it is said that, bac¬ 
teria are ubiquitous or omnipresent, meaning, that 
these minute animalculse are found everywhere 
on the face of the earth and in indefinite numbers, 
all over the world; or they have the power of 
existing always and everywhere, apparently, 
without beginning or end. The primary origin of 
the different forms of bacteria at present is con¬ 
fined in obscurity. This question may be com¬ 
pared with another question which is often asked. 
For instance, if the first egg came from a chicken, 
where did the first chicken come from? And if 
the first chicken came from an egg, where did 
the first egg come from? We will not attempt to 
answer any of these questions here. No one will 
deny that the chickens are material things and 
the chickens’ eggs are material things and both 
are here, seemingly, for the material human beings 


Bacteriology 


45 


to eat of both, when they wish. We are convinced 
that bacteria do exist. We find them in the air, 
in the water, in the soil, on the surface of the 
bodies of animals and plant life, inside of live 
animals and in all decaying substances, especially 
of an organic nature. Bacteria are material, just 
as material as human beings, the difference being 
that bacteria are only seen individually, when put 
under the lenses of the microscope, but these 
microorganisms are plainly visible “en masse” to 
the naked eye in any infected suppurative wound, 
meaning, a wound which is producing and dis¬ 
charging pus, and in this pus are found many 
millions of bacteria. 

A long period of time and vast amount of work 
are required to prove and perfect, even to a com¬ 
paratively practical degree, any study of conse¬ 
quence, from the birth of the theory as a thought, 
until this theory is advanced, step by step, to a 
stage where it becomes beneficial as a practice 
and attains recognition of merit as such. As an 
illustration we will trace in a concise outline, the 
subject known in the study of medicine, as bac¬ 
teriology. From what has been written above, 
together with what is to follow, it may be gathered 
as a fact, that this subject has held the attention 
of man, since the beginning of the Christian era; 
after all this time and study, we cannot say, even 
today, that we are thoroughly acquainted with its 
numerous details. 

Bacteriology is the science which treats of the 
study of “Bacteria” or “Microorganisms” which 
are unicellular and asexual in nature, (being com¬ 
posed of a single cell and without sex character- 


46 The Millennium and Medical Science 

istics). They live without the aid of chlorophyll, 
multiply with exceeding rapidity and reproduce 
themselves by transverse division or sporulation. 
— (Chlorophyll is defined as that green substance 
taken up by plant life or the green coloring matter 
produced in plants, by the aid of Sunlight.)—It is 
the quick reproduction or the fast multiplication 
of these microorganisms, (one of their chief 
characteristics) which causes much trouble. In 
their method of propagation they sub-divide or 
split into two parts, each part becoming a new 
microorganism every few hours, and wherever 
there was one microorganism a few hours before, 
there are two now. This happens where there are 
hundreds of millions of these microorganisms and 
occurs in all instances, except where a particular 
type of microorganism has the special faculty of 
producing a spore. In this instance of spore-pro¬ 
ducing microorganisms when anything attempts 
to destroy it, this microorganism has this unknown 
power of producing this spore or in other words, 
a part of the microorganism has the faculty of 
developing into or reverting to the form of its 
ancestors, a spore; this spore life is, generally 
speaking, on the order of an egg, round or oval 
in shape, enclosed in a gelatinous capsule, with an 
outside wall of a waxy consistency, the whole being 
composed of properties which have remarkable 
resisting qualifications and wonderful preservative 
ability. This procedure of spore-formation is only 
resorted to in the bacterial life, when the life or 
existence of the microorganism is in danger of 
annihilation,—it, like human beings, follows the 
code, “self-preservation is the first law of nature,” 


Bacteriology 


47 


and will endeavor against strong odds to repro¬ 
duce its kind—this is, therefore, a method of pro¬ 
tection of its kind, against any and all things or 
agents, which may be detrimental to its present 
life or future existence. Only when extreme 
measures, such as, actual burning and pure acids 
are used, in an attempt of an extermination 
process, can this spore be destroyed. Should the 
destroying agent be not strong enough, then the 
spore lies dormant and unharmed for a time, until 
all danger is over and from this spore will spring 
a new and live microorganism and it will imme¬ 
diately begin to reproduce by splitting and mak¬ 
ing two and they in turn split again, making four, 
and so on, just as other microorganisms proceed 
in their regular method of reproduction, but if 
anything interferes with its continuation of repro¬ 
duction, the spore-formation preservation power is 
immediately called into action. 

An explanation of this somewhat confusing and 
technical dissertation is now in order and will 
therefore be taken up seriatim; the term microor¬ 
ganism is taken from the Greek, mikron or micron, 
meaning small, which is one-millionth part of a 
meter; an organism is any individual animal or 
plant, or any part of the human body, with a 
special function; unicellular means, made up of a 
single cell;—it must be remembered here that, 
as a rule, in biology or the study of life, all organs 
or organisms individually or collectively are made 
up of many hundreds of thousands of cells;—the 
term, asexual, is understood to mean, having no 
sex or without sexual characteristics of male and 
female reproductive elements. Chlorophyll is the 


48 The Millennium and Medical Science 

green coloring matter taken up by plant life, but 
only in the presence and with the aid of sunlight. 
So, when we say, “bacteria live without the aid of 
chlorophyll” we mean, bacterial life is contrary to 
plant life. Sunlight is necessary to plant life but 
detrimental to the life and growth of bacteria. 
Plant life in almost every instance has sex charac¬ 
teristics, bacteria has none. Oxygen is necessary 
to animal life and after being taken into the lungs 
is again given off in the form of carbon dioxide 
during the action of respiration; this carbon 
dioxide is necessary to all plant life but not neces¬ 
sary to bacterial life. It would be well to mention 
here that some microorganisms are known as 
aerobic bacteria, meaning they need air or its prin¬ 
cipal ingredient, oxygen for existence, and other 
types of microorganisms are known as anaerobic 
bacteria, meaning they will only live, grow and 
multiply under conditions where all air is excluded 
or without the presence of oxygen. These are 
some of the many points of significance which 
are contrary to the contention of some authorities 
who maintain that bacteria should be classed with 
the vegetable kingdom. This is all the more com¬ 
prehensible when we are reminded of a few things 
such as, potatoes, beets, turnips, celery and corn, 
all of which are green, except that part of the 
plant which is shielded and therefore protected, 
in one form or another, from the action of the 
sun and not exposed to the sunlight. 

When speaking of these animalculae (whether 
it be an individual type or some special form or 
all forms and types combined as a class or as a 
whole, it matters not), of the many synonymous 


Bacteriology 


49 


terms used or different names by which they are 
known, the term “microorganisms” has always ap¬ 
pealed to the author as being the most logical and 
proper one to use, because none of these animal- 
culae are macroscopic (they cannot be seen with 
the naked eye) but are in every instance micro¬ 
scopic and can only be seen and studied with the 
aid of the microscope. 

These animalculae of microscopic size in the 
bacterial kingdom are known by synonymous 
terms as follows: 

Schizomycetes, . . . used mostly in scientific 
work. 

Microorganisms, . . used in the study of 


medicine. 

Bacteria,.used for comparing spe¬ 

cific forms. 

Microbes, .used generally by the 

laity. 

Germs,.also used generally by 

the laity. 


There are five different and distinct shapes or 
forms of these animalcule as follows: 


Bacilli, .the straight oblong, like 

a twig. 

Cocci, .the round or spheroidal, 

like a ball. 

Vibrio,.the crooked oblong, with 

one turn. 

Spirillum,.with two or more turns 

or crooks. 

Spirochaeta,.with many crooks and 

turns. 


4 










50 The Millennium and Medical Science 


The names of several of the many microor¬ 
ganisms and the disease produced by them now 
follow: 

Microorganisms Disease Produced 

Bacillus Tuberculosis... Tuberculosis (all 

forms) 

Spirochseta Treponema. .Syphilis (its many 

phases) 

Locomotor Ataxia 

Paresis 

Insanity 

Gonococcus. Gonorrhea (in 

adults) 

Gonorrhea ophthal¬ 
mia (in adults 
and in the new¬ 
born) 

Streptococcus .Septicemia (blood 

poison) 

Staphylococcus.Many pus condi¬ 

tions 

Bacillus Typhosis.Typhoid Fever 

Pneumococcus .Pneumonia 

Bacillus Diphtheria .... Diphtheria 

Bacillus Tetani.Tetanus (lock-jaw) 

Much of the minor details, relative to this sub¬ 
ject, has been necessarily omitted. Let it suffice 
to say, that many questions considered as per¬ 
plexing problems by our forefathers, relative to 
the nature of all disease, have only of late years 
been answered, but only in a comparatively con¬ 
crete form, involving untold energy, long effort 
and much sacrifice of scientific research work, ex¬ 
tending over a period of about two thousand years. 
This may be better understood when we consult 









Fig. 1. Microorganisms Which Produck Disease. 
As viewed under the microscope, and being 1 
subject to a staining process. 


A. Spirochaeta treponema 

(pallidum). 

The causation of syphilis. 

B. Bacillus Tuberculosis (in 

red). 

The causation of tuber¬ 
culosis. 

C. Staphylococcus (in blueT 
The causation of pus con¬ 
ditions. 


D. Gonococcus (a diplococcus). 
The causation of gonorrhea. 

E. Pneumococcus (encapsuled). 
The causation of pneumonia. 

F. Streptococcus septicus (in 

chains). 

The causation of blood 
poison. 





















































Bacteriology 


51 


our chronology and learn that the beginning of 
physical science in its earliest stages of develop¬ 
ment began to exert itself in the land of Asia 
whence the Greeks took their earliest ideas of 
science in the year 580 B. C. To these Ionian 
philosophers we must turn, for the first knowledge 
of an advance on the mythological view of nature, 
and the departure from the mystical symbolism 
which then held sway. 

The significance of the part played by all 
branches of science, in our present subject, may 
be readily seen in the evidence evolved by the 
study and ingenuity of man, in the following state¬ 
ments: 

The perfection of methods to manufacture 
the different metals. 

The processes developed to produce glass 
and lens grinding. 

From both of the above essentials come the 
perfection of the microscope. 

Then came the more intimate study of all 
plant and animal life. 

About this time close investigation of all 
inorganic matter began. 

Comparison of functions in vegetation, 
lower animals, and man, also similarity of 
structures was now begun and studied. 

Soon followed the discovery of microor¬ 
ganisms, and their possible relation to plant 
and animal life was investigated, especially 
their action, beneficial or detrimental to man. 

The scrutinizing of all bacterial and 
chemical phenomenal action is still in the 
present epoch of history making. 


CHAPTER III 

PATHOLOGY 

IN defining this subject, pathology, one author 

says: “In the cell, the organ, or the individual, 
any deviation from the normal is a pathological 
condition.” The bone of contention here is: 
where does the “normal” leave off and the “abnor¬ 
mal” begin? Viewed from another angle, we may 
say: there are instances, where a condition—with¬ 
out evident factors, of a truly pathological or 
disease process—may be considered, by some, as 
“abnormal” in one individual; this same so-called 
“abnormal” condition may be considered as “nor¬ 
mal” in another individual; for instance, the 
“normal pulse” is said to be seventy-two beats to 
the minute, but there are many hundreds of people 
whose “pulse” beat is anywhere between seventy- 
four and eighty beats to the minute, and they are 
perfectly healthy in every respect; therefore, we 
cannot call these individuals “abnormal” to the 
extent of a “disease process” or a “pathological 
condition” extant. 

It is rather a difficult matter to confine our¬ 
selves to a precise definition of pathology—the 
science which treats of disease—because of its 
many angles of contention and its many phases 
of manifestation, all of which are of a compli¬ 
cated character and may lead us into a maze of 
mental confusion. This we wish to avoid. This 
subject to be justly understood in its most minute 


52 


Pathology 


53 


details, requires a knowledge of normal and ab¬ 
normal histology, bacteriology, physiology, and 
anatomy; a knowledge of the chemistry of life and 
the significance of cell life in pathology, and the 
inter-relationship of cells, organs and other struc¬ 
tures; the excitants of disease, the characteristics 
of disease, and the classifications of pathology, to¬ 
gether with its correlated sciences, which are many. 

In the study of pathology we should consider 
general pathology and special pathology, as being 
most important. The maintenance of the normal 
conditions in the human body during a lifetime, 
involves the sustaining of a continued normal 
mechanism, therefore, under this subject we must 
also consider those things upon which good health 
depends, namely, the disposition to disease in the 
different individuals, depending upon age, sex, 
race, heredity; disturbance of nutrition depending 
upon excessive or insufficient amount of food or 
drink and of the proper kinds; environment of the 
individual, such as, good air and water supply, 
sanitary conditions, excessive heat or cold, during 
the hours of occupation as well as in our moments 
of leisure and rest, together with a consideration 
of the proper amount of rest. 

Many authorities have likened a healthy man 
to an efficient machine, and its capacity for the 
transforming of energy has been expressed in 
physical terms. This comparison in many respects 
is misleading; every individual has—at least to a 
degree—a personality or individuality, which has 
its own susceptibilities, or affinities, immunities 
or aversions, and idiosyncrasies, physically and 
mentally. The human body fights infection and 


54 The Millennium and Medical Science 

attempts to heal or repair any damaged parts, no 
matter from what cause; it has such fundamental 
characteristics as, growth and powers of reproduc¬ 
tion of its kind, in addition to its five senses; this 
is where it differs materially from the mechanical 
engine. 

In every branch of study, in the world of sci¬ 
ence, the term “reaction” has its place. Nowhere 
can this term “reaction,” better express in a 
superior force and manner, its necessary use, than 
in the study of pathology. In no other field can 
it imply a greater meaning. In the study of 
pathology there is a genuine manifestation of its 
actual proof of definition, which is: to act again 
or to act in response. This “reaction” of living 
tissues of the human body is known, in this case, 
as “inflammation.” The reacting of tissues or the 
inflammatory process involves a phenomena or 
cycle which may be written scientifically as fol¬ 
lows: injury from any cause produces a reaction 
which is an inflammation, resulting in hyperemia 
plus exudation, and terminating in a destruction 
of cell life—more or less—with a consequent 
proliferation of a connective tissue or both. 

In all instances where there is present a more 
or less pathological condition, it has been con¬ 
ceded as a recognized fact that there is, primarily, 
some sort of an inflammatory process or a sec¬ 
ondary condition of inflammation, attendant in 
any and all diseases, to a lesser or greater extent. 

Therefore, while pathology is defined as, that 
branch of medicine which treats of the essential 
nature of disease, especially of the structural and 
functional changes caused by any diseased process, 


Pathology 


55 


the definition of inflammation is much more im¬ 
portant, comprehensive, and to the point. So we 
may say: while pathology is the science which 
treats of disease, and deals with disturbance of 
functions, alterations in structures, and abnormal 
performances in living beings, all of which are 
induced by unusual agencies and conditions, which 
in turn produce the signs, symptoms and lesions 
of disease, we must add: inflammation being an 
important branch of pathology, we will proceed 
to define it. 

Inflammation is the reaction of living tissue 
to an insult or injury; this insult or injury may 
extend, from a slight irritation (like sunburn) to 
destruction and death of many cells or perhaps 
an entire organ, for instance, the kidney or the 
lung. All will depend upon the extent and nature 
of the injury or insulting agency. This condition 
may be local or general in any part of the body 
or in any organ, and may be of a continual destruc¬ 
tive or of a reconstructive character. The tissues 
pass through the stages of a momentary con¬ 
traction of the capillary vessels, followed by a 
secondary dilatation; then there is a retardation 
with a secondary oscillation of the red blood cell, 
followed by a stasis and a diapedesis of the red 
blood cell and a subsequent migration of 
leukocytes (the white blood cells) generally of an 
ameboid movement character. As a result various 
tissue changes take place. 

To be more explicit, we may say that “inflam¬ 
mation” is the evidence produced as a result of 
any insult to any part of the living body, or, “in¬ 
flammation is the reaction of living tissue,” caused 


56 The Millennium and Medical Science 


by any stimulation or injury. This reaction ex¬ 
tends from a slight irritation to destruction and 
death of the cell or many cells,—of the tissues 
affected—in any part of the living body and is 
characterized by a discoloration or redness, heat, 
swelling, pain and—many times there is evident— 
a line of demarcation. This inflammatory process 
is always the result of bacterial, chemical, mechan¬ 
ical, thermol, electrical or other causes. There are 
a few instances in disease where we do not find 
the evidence—yet it may be present—of an inflam¬ 
matory process, but this is the exception to the 
rule. Almost every one has heard of the condi¬ 
tion known as a “cold abscess”; this is an instance 
of an infection by the invasion of the “bacillus 
tuberculosis” which breaks down the tissue struc¬ 
tures and leaves a walled off area of pus or caseous 
material; there may also be a mixed infection con¬ 
dition with the “bacillus tuberculosis” predomi¬ 
nating, in this case the result is similar, a mixture 
of pus formation; this condition does not come 
under the heading of inflammation, as a conse¬ 
quence we do not find the signs and symptoms of 
an inflammatory process, to-wit, redness, heat, 
swelling and pain, hence the name, a “cold 
abscess.” 

We say, “inflammation is the reaction of ‘liv¬ 
ing’ tissue to an insult or injury” for the reason 
that should one attempt to insult or injure a dead 
body by beating, burning, cutting or any other 
means, there will be no evidence of reaction, or 
inflammation, owing to the fact that the body is 
dead; in other words, when life goes out of the 
body nature has deserted it and there remains 


Pathology 


57 


no means of promotion of function, consequently 
there is no actual attempt of defense to preserve 
the life which is not there. It is a recognized fact 
that nature will make every attempt to defend 
itself against all insults and injuries and will also 
endeavor to heal the tissues of the “living body.” 

We are taught that every part, organ and 
minute cell of the human body has some particular 
function to perform which is necessary to the 
human economy and therefore essential to life. 
This, so far as we know, is true and holds good 
in every instance excepting one; it being proven 
many hundred times, by removal of the appendix 
that this obsolete organ—if we dare call it an 
organ—is not necessary to the well-being of 
humanity. The removed appendix has been sub¬ 
jected to all kinds of analyses and all manner 
of scientific investigations (known to man) with 
the resulting conclusion. The appendix in the 
human is said to be the rudiment of an organ 
which was once upon a time useful—perhaps 
many, many hundred years ago—long before the 
now human became a human, but was something 
else; the appendix has therefore outlived its use¬ 
fulness and is at the present time an obsolete struc¬ 
ture in our makeup, to-wit: it has no cellular 
construction of function, therefore performs no 
function. It is better out than in the body, be¬ 
cause while there it may at any time cause 
trouble,—many times causing much pathology in 
the abdominal cavity—perhaps, resulting in death, 
but one does not feel that it is necessary to have 
it removed while it gives no trouble, nevertheless 
man is better off and can live very nicely without 


58 The Millennium and Medical Science 

it. This is perhaps the only instance where the 
human body is the owner of something which has 
no function and is not necessary to its well-being. 

It has been said that the tonsils in the human 
might be classed with the appendix, inasmuch as 
they cause much trouble, and the individual can 
do very well without them. This is not true as far 
as science can determine. The tonsils are organs of 
function and have been called the catch basin of 
the human system, from the fact that the tonsils, 
intercepting all kinds of dust and bacteria, have 
the faculty—when in good health—of neutralizing 
or destroying these foreign bodies, this being their 
function; to guard the individual from infection. 
However, when the tonsils—for reasons known 
and unknown—lose their function they are better 
out than in the human. This is obvious, because 
the tonsils are in a position where they are easily 
accessible to the many kinds of infection and when 
infected cause many kinds of trouble or patho¬ 
logical conditions in different parts of the body. 

We may now give a few illustrations of a 
“pathological condition” or a “pathological 
process.” If the stomach in the human is an organ, 
and its sole function is a combination of container, 
capacity and digestion, why would it not digest 
itself, should any individual be so unfortunate as 
to be isolated from all food and drink? This is 
a fair question and has often been asked. Science 
gives us this answer: The stomach can not digest 
itself while it is alive and well. If for any reason 
the blood supply should be cut off from any part 
of the stomach wall—this condition occurring at 
times from many causes—that part, even though 


Pathology 


59 


it be only the size of a pin point, will eventually 
cease to function, because of loss of support and 
nutrition of the blood stream, and death of the 
tissues of that part ensues; at once this dead part 
is attacked by the gastric juices or bacteria and is 
treated as dead organic matter; it then becomes 
subject to the digestive process, the same as the 
organic food, such as meat and vegetables, when 
taken into the stomach. In many instances this 
explanation will also answer the question, what 
is the cause of gastric ulcer? 

For example, we say, “typhoid fever” is an 
acute, infectious, contagious disease, charac¬ 
terized, clinically, by a roseola—papulary rash on 
the abdomen—a stepladder temperature chart, 
and a positive Widal reaction, and characterized, 
anatomically, by an invasion of Pyers patches of 
the ilium—the inner aspect of the small intestine— 
by the “bacillus typhosis,” resulting in a patholog¬ 
ical condition and characterized pathologically, by 
a primary irritation with a secondary inflamma¬ 
tion and ulceration of this part, terminating in a 
cicatrization or a scar formation or perhaps in 
perforation of the intestinal wall. When we say, 
cicatrization or scar formation termination, it 
means there is a process of healing which leaves 
a scar where the original tissues were destroyed— 
by the bacteria and pathological process—and the 
patient fully recovers. When we say, termination 
by perforation, it means the pathological condi¬ 
tion or ulceration does not heal and the process 
of destruction continues until it or the bacteria 
eats its way through the intestinal wall; when this 
happens, as a rule, there follows a serious condi- 


60 The Millennium and Medical Science 


tion known as peritonitis and death of the patient. 

Tuberculosis is an infectious and contagious 
disease—but not considered a strictly contagious 
disease like small-pox and does not cause epi¬ 
demics,—for the reason that it is only contracted 
by direct contact with one who has the disease, 
such as, mouth to mouth kissing (syphilis may be 
contracted in the same way) or by indirect con¬ 
tact, such as handling or using articles which have 
come in direct contact with the individual who has 
the disease, or by eating foods, or breathing dust, 
which contain the “bacillus tuberculosis.” In other 
words, the “bacillus tuberculosis” must find its 
way into the human system. So we say: tubercu¬ 
losis is an infectious disease which has no respect 
or regard for any part of the human anatomy and 
may run an acute or chronic course—depending 
upon the immunity or susceptibility of the indi¬ 
vidual—being contracted by inhalation, ingestion 
and innoculation, and is characterized clinically 
by a symptom-complex peculiar to this disease, 
depending upon the part or parts affected and 
location of infection, and characterized anatomi¬ 
cally by an invasion of any part of the human 
body by the “bacillus tuberculosis,” resulting in a 
pathological condition known as a “tubercule” or a 
“tubercular process,” running a course of irrita¬ 
tion, slight inflammation, a breaking down or 
destruction of tissue, an accumulation of a caseous 
material—cheese-like or pus-like in consistency— 
with a proliferation, or infiltration, or formation 
of a white fibrous connective tissue process circum¬ 
scribing or surrounding the parts affected—which 
is nature’s attempt to heal—and terminating in 


Pathology 


61 


either, an active process of spreading destruction 
of tissue, destroying the infected organ in part or 
in its entirety and spreading to adjacent structures 
or parts by contiguity or continuity, ultimately 
causing death. But in any active healing process, 
where the individual has a general resistance and 
immunity to this disease, the following takes place; 
first, the warding off of other locations of infection 
in different parts of the body; second, the ability 
of the body to destroy the “bacillus tuberculosis”; 
third, the power of neutralizing the toxins by a 
detoxicating process; fourth, the faculty of retard¬ 
ing or preventing the original infection from 
spreading by calling upon the reserve forces of 
the body to institute a protective process, which 
will surround this part—or this original “foci” or 
point of infection—with a scar formation or a wall 
of white fibrous connective tissue, and the indi¬ 
vidual becomes well. 

Tuberculosis is contracted, first, by “inhala¬ 
tion,” or by way of the respiratory tract and may 
infect any part of this tract with which the 
“bacillus tuberculosis” comes in contact; second, 
by “ingestion” or by the gastro-intestinal tract, 
when food or drink which contains the “bacillus 
tuberculosis” is taken into the mouth, or where 
the “bacillus tuberculosis” otherwise gains en¬ 
trance to the mouth which may infect any part 
of this tract; third, by “innoculation” or by inva¬ 
sion of any part of the body by the “bacillus tuber¬ 
culosis”; through any break in the surface of the 
skin or by any means or process whereby the 
“bacillus tuberculosis” is permitted to enter the 
superficial or deep tissues of the body. 


62 The Millennium and Medical Science 

In the study of the subject “Bacteriology” we 
learn more and more every day, that each micro¬ 
organism has individual characteristics, the most 
prominent of these being, the “special affinity for 
certain tissue” or “the preference in selection of 
tissues” best suited for a particular form or type 
of microorganism. This rule of “special affinity” 
or “preference in selection,” for a particular part 
of the human anatomy or for any certain tissues, 
does not hold true in the case of the “bacillus 
tuberculosis.” Here we again have the exception 
to the rule, in bacterial life. So it may be seen 
that the “bacillus tuberculosis” is in a class by 
itself, being marked by the distinctive peculiarity 
of “lack of discrimination in selection” when at¬ 
tacking any part or organ of the human body, 
or its “failure of respect and indifference of re¬ 
gard” for any tissues of the human. This charac¬ 
teristic—desultoriness relative to non-preference 
in location or choice of tissues—is worthy of 
notice. As a consequence, one may have a tuber¬ 
cular infection of any part of the body or several 
parts may be involved at one and the same time. 
Some of these conditions are known as, phthisis 
or tuberculosis of the lungs; cervical adenitis or 
tuberculosis of the lymph glands of the neck; 
scoliosis, due to tuberculosis of the spine; lupus, 
or tuberculosis of the skin; Addison’s disease or 
tuberculosis of the adrenal gland; tubercular 
osteomylitis, or tuberculosis of the bone; tuber¬ 
cular meningitis, or tuberculosis of the brain; and 
so we may go on, mentioning all the various organs 
or structures in the human body, each having its 
own particular pathology and in every instance 


Pathology 


63 


giving rise to its special terminology, for the pur¬ 
pose of convenience, in the differentiation and 
treatment of these several conditions of disease, 
but all originating from the self-same or specific 
cause, the “bacillus tuberculosis.” 

When we lose one of our beloved ones—car¬ 
ried away by the so-called “galloping consump¬ 
tion” or tuberculosis of the lungs—and look back 
upon his history, we find, as a rule, these promi¬ 
nent facts: the beginning of the disease manifested 
itself at or about the age of puberty—between the 
ages of fifteen and twenty when there develops 
in youth a curiosity of learning and a craving for 
mental and physical excitement—when there is a 
tendency during this period to burn the candle 
at both ends, parties, dances and keeping late 
hours. In many instances there is an inclination— 
if the truth be known—to satisfy an increased 
sexual appetite which asserts itself, in this type of 
cases. All of these are important points to be con¬ 
sidered and add fuel to the flame or help to burn 
out the life of the young and inexperienced youth. 
These known facts should cause us to exercise care 
and discretion when choosing intimate friends and 
should stimulate a personal regard for our actions 
in our associations of new and short acquaintance. 

No longer is it advisable to keep secret the fact 
that “syphilis” is the primary factor in all cases 
of “locomotor ataxia”; here is an instance where 
it can be plainly seen how nature makes an error 
in its unguided and blind attempt to aid the un¬ 
fortunate individual who has contracted “syphilis.” 
To give a concise explanation of—“tabes dorsalis,” 
the scientific name—the so-called “locomotor 


64 The Millennium and Medical Science 

ataxia,” we may say it is the result of a truly 
pathological process which runs a course as fol¬ 
lows: the invasion of the human body by an 
animalcule—the spirochaeta treponema pallidum— 
which has an affinity for, or has the peculiarity 
of affecting the tissues of the spinal cord at a point 
where messages sent from the brain to the lower 
limbs are apprehended or interrupted; the tissues 
at this point, being destroyed, lose their function 
of transmission,—after a prolonged attack of the 
animalcule and its toxins; nature in its attempt 
to aid or heal fills in this space with a white 
fibrous connective tissue which has no function 
except to form a scar; as a result, no messages 
can be sent from the brain to the lower limbs 
and the individual loses the power of locomotion. 
This condition is defined, pathologically, as a 
degeneration of the posterior columns of the spinal 
cord, its principal marks being, incoordination and 
disturbance of sensation, with an ataxic gait, which 
is jerky and uncertain. 

Syphilis is also responsible in many cases of 
“paresis” and insanity. It is also a well known 
fact—or at least it should be—that gonorrhea is 
responsible for blindness in the new-born, as a 
result of the father or mother or both having had 
the disease; chronic joint disease, rheumatism 
and many other conditions occurring after middle 
life, in a great many instances, are due to the 
fact that the individual has had gonorrhea some 
time in early life, each condition having its own 
pathological process the signs, symptoms and 
lesions of disease depending upon the parts 
affected. 


Pathology 


65 


We have said, upon microscopic examination 
of body tissue, in all diseased conditions, we find 
much evidence of a more or less destruction of cell 
life,—sometimes destroying an entire organ. These 
pathological processes are known as the regressive 
(going backward) tissue changes. Here there is 
always distinguished a complete change of cell 
life, in the different organs,—a gelatinous, 
lardaceous, waxy, or homogeneous mass—of dif¬ 
ferent compositions and with a loss of nearly all 
original cell characteristics and function. These 
changes involve such terms as, atrophy (a wasting 
or shrinking) and the many kinds of degeneration, 
such as, albuminous, adipose (fatty) mucoid and 
colloid (mucus) hyaline and amyloid (waxy) cal¬ 
careous (chalk or stone formations) pigmentation 
(coloring) and (death of cell life) necrosis. 

Those men, tireless workers and seekers after 
truth, who have devoted much time and labor to 
experimental and practical work, in the field of 
“clinical and research” experience have earned the 
reputation of being authorities and are, therefore, 
the only criterions on the subject of pathology or 
disease. 

The vital question in society is, when shall we 
conquer disease? It may be truly considered as an 
eternal question in our present day world. The 
term, “disease,” meaning not at ease, or discom¬ 
fort or discontent, is the general term used to 
express any deviation from good health. It may 
be applied to any condition which may be tem¬ 
porary and of a trivial nature, or it may be of a 
serious character with a tendency to permanency 
and a consequent cause of dire distress, not only 


5 


66 The Millennium and Medical Science 

to the individual affected, but also to many others, 
especially members of his or her family. There 
are but few exceptions,—comparatively speaking, 
when we consider the many different kinds of 
disease (to which we are apparently heir) the 
human family has to contend with—where any 
disease of any importance cannot be traced to its 
etiology or cause, such as, infections, faulty 
metabolism or some kind of injury of a chemical 
or mechanical nature, or hereditary tendencies. 


CHAPTER IV 


IMMUNITY AND SUSCEPTIBILITY 


UR subject in this instance being of a two- 



fold nature, and closely related to bac¬ 
teriology and pathology, is not an easy one to 
handle in the language of the laity. Especially is 
this twin subject the more difficult of explanation, 
since it is not only a product of modern scientific 
research, but is more or less composed of, first, 
many technical terms, all of modern coinage and 
invention, but derivatives of Greek and Latin 
words, in most instances, and combinations of mix¬ 
tures of other languages, in other instances; sec¬ 
ond, it contains two sides of an argument, one in 
favor of the individual, the other against him; 
third, it has to do almost entirely with such things 
as, anti-toxins, serums, vaccines, bacterins, 
phylacogens, and several other modern discoveries 
which have found much favor, because of their 
virtues, in the up-to-date practice of medicine. 

The term, immunity, is from the Latin, im- 
munis, meaning, not subject to a munuS or public 
service. It is a general term for exemption from 
liability, used originally perhaps, in a legal sense, 
applying to those individuals, who enjoy immunity 
from danger of arrest or other interference of any 
kind with their persons. In international law, 
the term, immunity (“not subject” or “not serv¬ 
ing”) implies exemption from the jurisdiction of 
the state which otherwise exercises jurisdiction 


67 


68 The Millennium and Medical Science 


where the immunity arises. It is thus applied to 
the exceptional position granted to sovereigns and 
chiefs of states generally, and their direct repre¬ 
sentatives in the states to which they are 
accredited. In recent times this term “immunity” 
has been applied to the subjects of pathology and 
bacteriology, coupled with the term “suscepti¬ 
bility.” 

The term, susceptibility, may be defined as 
being, “the exact opposite of immunity.” Aside 
from this, the term is not so easily explained; how¬ 
ever, when the root of the term is run to earth, 
it gives this impression of its meaning; an indi¬ 
vidual may be captured and put in confinement, 
but under such conditions, that he remains a 
prisoner for the rest of his natural life, and sooner 
or later, the only termination is death. Under such 
headings as, electro-magnetism, terrestrial-magne¬ 
tism and magneto-optics, we find, in different in¬ 
stances, the term susceptibility used as follows: 

—“this ratio is called the susceptibility of the 
magnetized substance, and is denoted by,”— 
etc., 

—“the curves of permeability and suscepi- 
bility,”—etc., 

—“It was first discovered by E. Villari in 1868 
that the magnetic susceptibility of an iron wire 
was increased by stretching when the magneti¬ 
zation was below a certain value, but dimin¬ 
ished when that value was exceeded,”— etc., 
—“Important experiments on the susceptibility 
of oxygen at different pressures and tempera¬ 
tures were carried out by P. Curie.” 

—“The susceptibility of air being known, that 
of liquid oxygen can at once be found.”—etc., 


Immunity and Susceptibility 


—“A small but decided tendency to a decrease 
of susceptibility in very strong fields was ob¬ 
served. It appears, therefore, that liquid oxy¬ 
gen is by far the most strongly paramagnetic 
liquid known, its susceptibility being more than 
four times greater than that of a saturated solu¬ 
tion of ferric chloride.” 

—“There have been many recent determina¬ 
tions of the magnetic susceptibility of water.” 
All of these quotations are valuable evidence 
and worthy of notice, from the fact that we are 
speaking at all times of the primary elements of 
inorganic nature, especially oxygen and water. 
Here also may be seen, where and how the term 
was used many years ago in scientific work, later 
becoming a well meaning adoptive term, in the 
study of medicine and finally being applied 
directly to the individual or to the several condi¬ 
tions of the individual, relative to disease on the 
one hand, and to man’s well-being on the other. 

So we may say, by immunity is meant non-sus¬ 
ceptibility to a given disease or to experimental 
and accidental inoculation of the animal body, 
with a given microorganism or a toxin. It being 
a known fact that there are various degrees of 
immunity, it may be stated in this connection that, 
conditions of local or general diminished vitality 
play an important part in the increasing of the 
susceptibility. Any animal body which is naturally 
susceptible to any particular type of disease, may 
acquire immunity, on the one hand, by having had 
the disease and successfully passing through its 
attack, or, on the other hand, by submitting to the 
various methods of inoculation or the so-called 
vaccination, and other prophylactic measures of 


70 The Millennium and Medical Science 

recognized worth, all of which has its place and 
effect, relative to the producing of non-suscepti¬ 
bility or the creating of an immunity in those indi¬ 
viduals who have a susceptibility or who are prone 
to infection and affection by disease processes. 

Under these conditions of this apparent criss¬ 
cross of cause and effect and somewhat topsy¬ 
turvy state of affairs, it will be necessary to lay 
an understandable foundation, or begin at the 
beginning with a tangible basis, that we may build 
as we proceed, not a house of cards, but an insti¬ 
tution of much worth. This institution will be in 
need of good material of the concrete caisson and 
rock-bottom support variety, for mainly upon this 
human-citadel-like structure of the future, will all 
humanity lean most heavily. In the study of 
anthropology, the science which, in its strictest 
sense, has as its object the study of man as a unit 
in the animal kingdom, we find written: 

“The organized world presents no contrasts 
and resemblances more remarkable than those 
which we discover on comparing mankind with 
the inferior tribes. That creatures should exist 
so nearly approaching to each other in all the 
particulars of their physical structure, and yet 
differing so immeasurably in their endowments 
and capabilities, would be a fact hard to be¬ 
lieve, if it were not manifest to our observa¬ 
tion. The differences are everywhere striking; 
the resemblances are less obvious in the ful¬ 
ness of their extent, and they are never con¬ 
templated without wonder by those who, in the 
study of anatomy and physiology, are first 
made aware how near is man in his physical 
constitution to the brutes. In all the principles 
of his internal structure, in the composition and 


Immunity and Susceptibility 


71 


function of his parts, man is but an animal. 
The Lord of the earth, who contemplates the 
eternal order of the universe, and aspires to 
communion with its invisible “Maker,” is a 
being composed of the same materials, and 
framed on the same principles, as the creatures 
which he has tamed to be the servile instru¬ 
ments of his will, or slays for his daily food. 
The points of resemblance are innumerable; 
they extend to the most recondite arrangements 
of that mechanism which contains instrumen- 
tally the physical life of the body, which brings 
forward its early development and admits, after 
a given period, its decay, and by means of 
which is prepared a succession of similar beings 
destined to perpetuate the race. 

“The problem of ascertaining how the small 
number of races, distinct enough to be called 
primary, can have assumed their different 
types, has been for years the most disputed 
field of anthropology, the battleground of the 
rival schools of monogenists and polygenists. 
The one has claimed all mankind to be de¬ 
scended from one original stock, and generally 
from a single pair; the other has contended 
for the several primary races being separate 
species of independent origin. The great prob¬ 
lem of the monogenist theory is to explain by 
what course of variation the so different races 
of man have arisen from a single stock. In 
ancient times little difficulty was felt in this, 
authorities such as Aristotle and Vitruvius 
seeing in climate and circumstance the natural 
cause of racial differences, the Ethiopian hav¬ 
ing been blackened by the tropical sun and his 
environment. Later and closer observations, 
however, have shown such influences to be, at 
any rate, far slighter in amount and slower in 
operation than was once supposed. 

“During the development of civilization, the 
conditions of man at the lowest and highest 


72 The Millennium and Medical Science 


known levels of culture are separated by a 
vast interval; but this interval is so nearly filled 
by known intermediate stages that the line of 
continuity between the lowest savagery and the 
highest civilization is unbroken at any critical 
point. 

“An examination of the details of savage 
life shows not only that there is an immeasur¬ 
able difference between the rudest and the 
highest lower animal, but also that the least 
cultured savages have themselves advanced far 
beyond the lowest intellectual and moral state 
at which human tribes can be conceived as 
capable of existing, when placed under favor¬ 
able circumstances of warm climate, abundant 
food, and security from too severe destructive 
influences. The Australian black fellow or the 
forest Indian of Brazil, who may be taken as 
examples of the lowest modern savage, had, 
before contact with whites, attained to rudi¬ 
mentary stages in many of the characteristic 
functions of civilized life. His language, ex-, 
pressing thoughts by conventional articulate 
sounds, is the same in essential principle as 
the most cultivated philosophic dialect, only 
less exact and copious. His weapons, tools and 
other appliances, are the evident rudimentary 
analogues of what still remains in use among 
Europeans. His structures, such as the hut, 
fence and stockade, may be poor and clumsy, 
but they are of the same nature as our own. 
In the simple arts of broiling and roasting meat, 
the use of hides and furs for covering, the 
plaiting of mats and baskets, the devices of 
hunting, trapping and fishing, the pleasure 
taken in personal ornament, the touches of 
artistic decoration on objects of daily use, the 
savage differs in degree but not in kind from the 
civilized man. The domestic and social affec¬ 
tions, the care of the young, the authority of 
the elders, are more or less well marked in 


Immunity and Susceptibility 


73 


every savage tribe. There is usually to be dis¬ 
cerned amongst such lower tribes or races a 
belief in unseen powers pervading the universe, 
this belief shaping itself into an animistic or 
spiritualistic theology, mostly resulting in some 
kind of worship. 

“Lastly, chronicles and documentary rec¬ 
ords, taken in connection with archaeological 
relics of the historical period, carry back into 
distant ages the starting-point of actual history, 
behind which lies the evidently vast period 
only known by inferences from the relations 
of languages and the stages of development of 
civilization. The most recent work of Egyp¬ 
tologists proves a systemic civilization to have 
existed in the valley of the Nile at least six or 
seven thousand years ago. From the combina¬ 
tions of many considerations, it will be seen 
that the farthest date to which documentary 
or other records extend is now generally re¬ 
garded by anthropologists as but the earliest 
distinctly visible point of the historic period, 
beyond which stretches back a vast indefinite 
series of prehistoric ages. 

“The teachings of history, during the three 
or four thousand years of which contemporary 
chronicles have been preserved, is that civiliza¬ 
tion is gradually developed in the course of 
ages by enlargement and increased precision of 
knowledge, invention and improvement of arts, 
and the progression of social and political 
habits and institutions towards general well¬ 
being. 

“The existence of man in remote geological 
time cannot now be questioned, but, despite 
much effort made in likely localities, no bones, 
with the exception of those of the much dis¬ 
cussed Pithecanthropus, have been found which 
can be regarded as definitely bridging the gulf 
between man and the lower creation. It seems 
as if anthropology had in this direction reached 


74 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the limits of discoveries. Far different are the 
prospects in other directions where the work 
of co-ordinating the material and facts col¬ 
lected promises to throw much light on the his¬ 
tory of civilization. 

“Geology has made it manifest that our 
earth must have been the seat of vegetable and 
animal life for an immense period of time; 
while the first appearance of man, though com¬ 
paratively recent, is positively so remote, that 
an estimate between twenty and a hundred 
thousand years may fairly be taken as a mini¬ 
mum. This geological claim for a vast antiquity 
of the human race is supported by the similar 
claims of prehistoric archaeology and the sci¬ 
ence of culture, the evidence of all three depart¬ 
ments of inquiry being intimately connected, 
and in perfect harmony.” 

All of the above, with many other departmental 
branches of science, which has as an object the un¬ 
covering of the deep problem, the origin of man, 
tends to show that all these efforts have appar¬ 
ently failed, at least, up to the present. It is quite 
evident, however, in every scientific study in this 
direction, that there is an all important factor 
in the make-up of man which is responsible for his 
evolution. Is it possible that this dominating 
feature is the blood-stream, and that our present 
subject, “Immunity and Susceptibility,” plays its 
part! Not only in our present day life, but from 
the early beginning, “Immunity and Susceptibil¬ 
ity” was no doubt the all-important factor in cre¬ 
ating, with the aid of the blood-stream, the basis 
of physiological function and its approximate rela¬ 
tions of convolutions and evolutions eventually 
leading to the origin of man. 


Immunity and Susceptibility 75 

The “Blood” is the circulating fluid in the veins 
and arteries of all animal life. The word itself is 
common to all Teutonic languages; the English is 
blod; the Gothic, bloth; the Dutch, bloed; the Ger¬ 
man, blut. It is probably ultimately connected 
with the root which appears in “blow,” and 
“bloom,” meaning flourishing or vigorous. The 
Greek word for blood appears as a prefix, 
“haemo-” in many compound words, in our lan¬ 
guage of today. The blood is constantly circu¬ 
lating or passing “to and from” every cell, in every 
organ in the human body. Each living cell has a 
function to perform, and from the (arterial) 
blood-stream they extract the food materials re¬ 
quired for their sustenance; each cell produces a 
waste product, in the performance of its function, 
which accumulation would soon prove injurious 
to the cell, were it not being constantly removed; 
therefore it is discharged into the (venous) blood¬ 
stream, and finally carried away, and out of the 
body by way of the kidneys and other routes, 
peculiar to this complex human mechanism. 

Everywhere throughout the body the individual 
cell is constantly bathed in a fluid which fills the 
tissue spaces. The metabolism of all cell life is 
carried on through the activity of these fluids. The 
blood is looked upon as the most important of all 
the body fluids, and yet it is only one unit of the 
various fluid phases within the body; it exerts, 
however, the controlling influence and is the prin¬ 
cipal dominating factor in the maintenance of nor¬ 
malcy, in the cell and organ, together with the 
function and all production as known in the 
human economy. In the blood are found impor- 


76 The Millennium and Medical Science 

tant signs pertaining to the “Immunity and Sus¬ 
ceptibility” of every individual. Further, there are 
various degrees of “immunity,” and in this con¬ 
nection conditions of local or general diminished 
vitality (from many causes) play an important 
part in the increasing of the “susceptibility.” 

Some individuals have what is known as a 
“natural resistance” to many pathological proc¬ 
esses, which is sometimes called “hereditary im¬ 
munity” or “congenital immunity,” and this 
existing condition is considered the first in order; 
the second condition is the “acquired immunity,” 
so-called from the fact that, in certain diseases, 
once the individual has successfully passed 
through an attack of the disease, he has auto¬ 
matically established a resistance (to that particu¬ 
lar disease) which will (in many instances) last 
throughout his or her lifetime. Next in order 
comes the “active immunity,” so called from the 
fact that, by the various methods of inoculation 
different substances are administered for the pur¬ 
pose of creating an “active influence” against cer¬ 
tain diseases which generally last and protect the 
individual, by this “excited power” or “active im¬ 
munity,” over a long period of time. The fourth 
and last condition, known as “passive immunity” 
is only a temporary affair, and is generally applied 
to cases where a disease is present and when there 
is introduced into the human system of the patient, 
during or just before a severe attack of certain 
diseases, different substances which have the 
power to tide the individual over the disease, but 
only for the time being or during the passing of 
the disease or the creating of an “immunity” for 


Fig. 2. Run and Wiiitk Blood Culls (human). 
As viewed under the microscope, and being 
subject to a staining process. 



A. Normal red blood cells. 

Approximate size and shape, 
C. Abnormal red blood cells. 

The difference as to size. 

E. Abnormal red blood cells. 
The difference as to shape. 


B. Normal white blood cells. 

Polymorphonuclear leuk¬ 
ocytes. 

D. Abnormal white blood cells. 

Large and small lymph¬ 
ocytes 

P. Abnormal white blood cells. 

The difference in size and 
shape. 











































' 



























































Immunity and Susceptibility 77 

a short period. The last two conditions, when 
absent, can be brought about to a marked degree 
in many people, and has been practically applied 
for several years; it is sometimes called “preven¬ 
tive innoculation” against disease. 

Insofar as the degrees of “susceptibility” are 
concerned, little is known relative to its subdi¬ 
vision, grades or stages, in the individual, but in 
groups or races it may be estimated. We may as¬ 
sume, however, that the degree of “susceptibility” 
may be studied in contrast to the “virulence” of 
microorganisms which produce disease, as to 
manifestations, which varies greatly with circum¬ 
stances and under different conditions, prevalent 
at the time of illness. 


CHAPTER V 


METABOLISM 

W E should mention, for the benefit of those 
who have not given the question any con¬ 
sideration and because the entire subject will be 
more easily and thoroughly understood by all con¬ 
cerned, that it has been definitely known for many 
years that the human body has many organs which 
produce what are known as “the products of 
gland excretion.” The term “excretion” is limited 
to the process by which the end-products of tissue 
metabolism are removed from the body, the nature 
of the process, however, differing in no essential 
particulars from that underlying the process of 
“gland secretion.” The several structures involved 
and the forces at work being of the same general 
character, we cannot draw any hard and fast line 
of separation between them. Should the body re¬ 
tain these products (the end-products) they would 
be detrimental to normal metabolism, therefore, 
their prompt removal becomes a necessity to the 
maintenance of the well-being in the individual. 
In such excretions as, urine, bile, perspiration, and 
others, are found the end-products of metabolism. 

The most important of these glands or organs 
being the liver which produces the bile and pours 
it into the intestines, then we have the pancreas 
which produces the Amylopsin, Trypsin and Steap- 
sin and also pours these into the intestines; there 
is the stomach which produces the Pepsin, Rennin 


78 


Metabolism 


79 


and Hydrochloric-acid, which mixes with the food. 
All of these glands and their excretions (and many 
more glands and their excretions, which we have 
not the time or space to mention here) are neces¬ 
sary to, and aid in, the process of digestion and 
assimilation of all liquids and solids taken into the 
stomach in the form of food. This process of in¬ 
gestion, digestion and assimilation of food and its 
final excretion, principally by way of the urinary 
and alimentary tract, is known as “metabolism” 
or the “metabolic process.” 

Here may be seen a continuous cycle of cause 
and effect bringing about action and reaction as 
follows. Food is taken into the body; there are a 
number of glands which produce a product which 
acts upon this food to aid in its “process of diges¬ 
tion”; the nutritive substance obtained from this 
“process of digestion” is used to maintain life in 
the individual; as a result of this maintenance of 
life, two entirely different products are produced, 
by two separate sets of glands, one set “secreting” 
and the other set “excreting” some kind of mate¬ 
rial; in one set are found the kidneys and its 
allies, which produce a direct waste product; in 
the other set are found the liver and its allies, 
which produce an indirect waste product, being 
first used in the process of digestion; in this way 
we find there is a continual cycle of intake and 
output, with a secondary continual cycle of prepar¬ 
ation for the maintenance of the first cycle, at all 
times going on in the human body. 

In other words we may say that, within the 
human system there is constantly going on a 
building up and a breaking down process; this 


80 The Millennium and Medical Science 


is known in scientific terms as: Anabolism plus 
Catabolism, which equals Metabolism. We may 
find a much more satisfactory explanation in the 
following definition: anabolism, meaning to “build 
up,” is the term used when speaking of any con¬ 
structive process by which simple substances are 
converted by living cell activity into more com¬ 
plex compounds; catabolism, meaning to “break 
down,” is the term used in any destructive process 
whereby tissue material has a passage from a 
higher to a lower plane of complexity or special¬ 
ization; and metabolism, meaning to “undergo 
a change” is the term used to signify any “process” 
during the time while action of living cells or 
organs incorporate the matters obtained from food 
into a part of their own bodies. 

Before proceeding further it must be stated 
that this subject has much to do with what is 
known as the “physiologic equilibrium,” (the con¬ 
dition in which the amount of material taken into 
the body exactly equals the amount discharged) 
and connected herewith are the terms, “assimila¬ 
tion,” (anabolism or constructive metabolism) 
and “dissimilation,” (catabolism or destructive 
metabolism). All of which have to do with the 
fundamental facts of life in its continual and spon¬ 
taneous acts of decomposition and reconstruction 
of all things taken into the human body in the 
form of air, as well as all liquids and solids which 
make up the food substances. It is a difficult 
matter—at times, in this day and age of scientific 
advancement—to determine just when cause be¬ 
comes effect or effect becomes cause, in the dis¬ 
turbance of metabolism or the over-balancing of 


Metabolism 


81 


the physiologic equilibrium, which is at all times 
necessary in the maintenance or preservation of 
good health and the well-being of life, and the 
part this disturbance plays in its production of 
detrimental effects, known as disease. 

There is much evidence on record which goes 
to prove that, normally the cellular and molecular 
organization which constitutes the make-up of the 
human being is composed of a complex and deli¬ 
cate mechanism. Akin to this, there is also much 
evidence to show that, when this complex organ¬ 
ization is interfered with in any way,—in this 
instance, by an overindulgence in large amounts 
of one kind of food or foods of the same order, 
such as, sugars, starches or salted meats, on the 
one hand, while not enough sugars or green vege¬ 
tables would be detrimental on the other hand,— 
then there follows much disorder of function and 
evidence of disease process; this is known as 
faulty metabolism. When any pathological con¬ 
dition of this nature exists in the human body, 
the principal factors that must be taken into con¬ 
sideration are the foods, known as, carbohydrates, 
proteids and fats. While there are many patho¬ 
logical conditions brought about by a lost “phy¬ 
siologic equilibrium” or the interference with the 
normal action of any organ, insofar as science 
can determine, some of the more prominent 
diseases most frequently met with in the human 
being and caused by “faulty metabolism,” are the 
following: diabetes, rickets, scurvy, pellagra, beri¬ 
beri, and gout. All authorities agree that, in these 
conditions “faulty metabolism” is at least an im¬ 
portant factor in the cause and effect and that, 


82 The Millennium and Medical Science 


the diet should be considered as an essential aid 
in the treatment. 

It is important that we point out, in a brief 
manner, several instances of “equilibrium,” so 
that we may recognize the full significance of these 
several other angles, relative to the “physiologic 
equilibrium.” Equilibrium, (from the Latin, 
aequus and libra, meaning, being equal and a 
balance), is a term used to signify, a condition of 
equal balance between opposite or counteracting 
forces. By the “sense of equilibrium,” is meant 
the sense, or sensations, by which we have a feel¬ 
ing of security in standing, walking and indeed in 
all the movements by which the body is carried 
through space. Such a feeling of security is nec¬ 
essary for maintaining any posture, such as stand¬ 
ing or performing any movement. If this feeling 
is absent or uncertain, or if there are contradictory 
sensations, then definite muscular movements are 
inefficiently or irregularly performed, and the 
body may stagger or fall. When we stand erect 
on a firm surface, like a floor, there is a feeling 
of resistance, due to nervous impulses reaching the 
brain from the soles of the feet and from the 
muscles of the limbs and trunk of the body. In 
walking or running, these feelings of resistance 
seem to precede and guide the muscular move¬ 
ments necessary for the next step. If these are 
absent or perverted or deficient, as is the case 
in the disease known as “locomotor ataxia,” then, 
although there is no loss of the power of volun¬ 
tary movement, the patient staggers in walking, 
especially if he is not allowed to look at his feet, 
or if he is blind-folded. He then misses the guid- 


Metabolism 


83 


ing sensation that comes from the lower limbs in 
particular; and with a feeling of uncertainty that 
he is walking on a substance offering little or no 
resistance, he staggers, and his muscular move¬ 
ments become irregular. 

In animals whose limbs are not adapted for 
delicate touch nor for the performance of compli¬ 
cated movements, such as some mammals and 
birds and fishes, the guiding sensations depend 
largely on the sense of vision. This sense in men, 
instead of assisting, sometimes disturbs the guid¬ 
ing sensation. It is true that in “locomotor ataxia,” 
visual sensations may take the place of the tactile 
and muscular sensations that are inefficient, and 
the man can walk without staggering if he is 
allowed to look at the floor, and especially if he 
is guided by transverse straight lines. On the 
other hand, the acrobat on the wire-rope dare not 
trust his visual sensations in the maintenance of 
his equilibrium. He keeps his eyes fixed on one 
point instead of allowing them to wander to 
objects below him, and his muscular movements 
are regulated by the impulses that come from the 
skin and muscles of his limbs. The feeling of 
insecurity probably arises from a conception of 
height, and also from the knowledge that by no 
muscular movements can a man avoid a catas¬ 
trophe if he should fall. The bird depends largely 
on visual impressions, and it knows by experience 
that if launched into the air from a height it can 
fly. Here, in all probability, is the explanation of 
the large size of the eyes of birds. Cover the 
head, as in hooding a falcon, and the bird seems 
to be deprived of the power of voluntary move- 


84 The Millennium and Medical Science 

ment. Little effect will be produced if we attempt 
to restrain the movements of a cat by covering its 
eyes. A fish also is deprived of the power of 
motion if its eyes are covered. But both in the bird 
and in the fish tactile and muscular impressions, 
especially in the latter, come into play in mechan¬ 
ism of equilibrium. 

There is another channel by which nervous 
impulses reach the sensorium and play their part 
in the sense of equilibrium, namely, from the semi¬ 
circular canals, a portion of the internal ear. It 
has been pointed out, under the study of the 
“Hearing,” that the appreciation of sound is in 
reality an appreciation of variations of pressure. 
It is the action of the mechanism, contained in 
the labyrinth of the ear, produced by sound-waves 
or musical tones which causes us to hear. It has 
been found by physicians and aurists that injury 
of the canals, occurring rapidly, produces giddi¬ 
ness, staggering, vomiting, noises in the ear and 
more or less deafness. It is said, however, that if 
pathological changes come on slowly, none of 
these symptoms may occur. 

The term “metabolism” is from the Greek term, 
“change” or “alteration,” and is used in a bio¬ 
logical sense for the process of chemical change 
occurring in the living cell. All disease is pri¬ 
marily due to “alterations” or “change,” quanti¬ 
tative or qualitative, in the chemical changes in 
the protoplasm of some or all of the tissues of the 
body. While in some pathological states these 
modifications lead to structural changes, in others 
they do not produce gross lesions, and these latter 
conditions are commonly classified as “Functional 


Metabolism 


85 


Diseases,” being caused by “faulty metabolism.” 
When such functional disturbances affect the gen¬ 
eral nutrition of the body they have also been 
termed “Metabolic Diseases.” It is indeed a diffi¬ 
cult matter and almost impossible to draw a hard 
and fast line between functional and organic dis¬ 
eases, since the one, as a rule, passes gradually into 
the other, as is well seen and known in gout, mani¬ 
festing itself in various ways and attacking various 
tissues and parts of the body; also in diabetes, fol¬ 
lowed by gangrene and other pathological condi¬ 
tions; all of which are secondary signs, symptoms 
and lesions of disease. Nor is it always easy to 
decide how far the conditions are due merely to 
quantitative alterations in the metabolism and how 
far to actual quantitative changes, for it is highly 
probable that many of the apparently qualitative 
alterations are really quantitative disturbances in 
one part of protoplasmic mechanism, leading to an 
apparent qualitative change in the total result of 
the activity. 

The knowledge thus far acquired from analyses 
of vital phenomena and their changes under the 
influence of stimuli affords but a very indefinite 
temporary basis for the theory of the actual vital 
process itself, of which vital phenomena are the 
outward manifestation. The fundamental fact of 
life is the metabolism of living substances which 
is continually and spontaneously undergoing de¬ 
composition, and building itself up anew with the 
help of the food-substances it takes in. The vital 
phenomena of the cell may be derived mechan¬ 
ically from metabolism and the changes it under¬ 
goes under the influence of stimuli. Our knowl- 


86 The Millennium and Medical Science 


edge of this will increase more rapidly as we be¬ 
come better acquainted with the details of the 
metabolism of the cell itself. The relations already 
known are so exceedingly complex that only by 
slow degrees can we pursue the investigation of 
separate fragments of the entire metabolic series. 

The differentiation of nucleus and protoplasm 
in the living substance of the cell alone gives rise 
to an extraordinary complication in the metabolic 
process, for these two parts of the cell stand in the 
most complicated correlation with one another 
as well as with the environing medium; a fact 
which experiments have proven in the various 
free-living cell-forms, and wherein and whereby 
have been furnished abundant evidence. The 
farther such knowledge advances, the more 
rounded, clear and free from hypothesis will be¬ 
come our conception of the cell’s metabolism. But 
the cell is the elementary component part of all 
organisms, and from the life of individual cells is 
constructed the life of the separate tissues and 
various organs, and thus of the entire organism. 
Hence the cell is the only vital element which the 
organ possesses, and therefore the investigation of 
the vital process in its separate cells leads ulti¬ 
mately to a knowledge regarding the mechanism 
of life in the whole. 


PART II 


NATURE’S WORK 
AND 

ORGAN TRANSPLANTATION 
E will find in this part a concise description 



™ of the following: 

The transplantation of organisms in its many 
phases, as known to man, in all of nature’s family, 
composing the different groups and their mani¬ 
festations of life, as found in the atmosphere 
around the earth; in and on the earth surface, and 
in the small and large basins of the earth, which 
contain water. 

The vital glands in the human body and the 
possibilities of transplanting them from man to 
man, or from the lower animals to man, when such 
glands, especially in the human, become useless 
to the body, from disease, injuries and other 
causes. The possibilities and probabilities of suc¬ 
cess and of failure in the interstitial gland trans¬ 
plantation operation in the human being and in 
animals. The methods used today, in gland trans¬ 
plantation, being considered from its many angles. 
The relating of the logical causes and reasons why 
the transplantation operation is a failure, with 
the probabilities and possibilities of dangers to the 
individual, by the use of present day methods in 
this operation; the essential need of more knowl¬ 
edge relative to a new surgical technique and of 
new tests in this field of work. 


87 



88 The Millennium and Medical Science 


The laws of nature which govern or control 
the organs in the human, relative and necessary 
to the reproduction of its kind. In the human we 
find involved, first, the secret inclination of 
nature’s demands which lead to the combined act 
of the male and female, resulting in conception. 
In some instances, or at times in some individuals, 
nature’s laws exceed the mere inclination or 
natural desire and become or take on the form 
of a dominating and impelling force or a taunting 
tendency and goading action on the part of human 
nature, resulting in an abnormal desire. Second, 
the automatic transplanting of the female element 
of reproduction, the ovum or egg, from the ovary 
to the fertile field of reproduction (the uterus) 
in the female, and third, the transplanting of the 
male element of reproduction, the spermatozoa, 
from the gonads—involving its many stages of 
automatic production and the different steps in its 
delivery—to this same fertile field; fourth, nature’s 
deliberate transaction of apparent precision, its 
latent but viable, invisible and apparently un¬ 
guided process of amalgamation or the combining 
of both these elements in this same fertile field, 
culminating in the perfection of the human and the 
maintenance of a continuous cycle of life, involv¬ 
ing the following stages, production; transplanta¬ 
tion; fertilization; pregnancy and parturition 
which is the act or process of giving birth to a 
child; as a result of this cycle we have the propa¬ 
gation of the race. Fifth, the consideration of the 
laws and forces which develop and protect the 
primary elements, (the ovum and spermatozoa) 
the embryo (the unborn child in its primary stage 


Nature's Work and Organ Transplantation 89 

after conception occurs) the viability of the child 
in the last stages of pregnancy (before birth) and 
the physiological process of delivery of the child 
into the outer world; after birth takes place, the 
part played by nature in the developing and pro¬ 
tection of the individual throughout life. 

The body power of production and reproduc¬ 
tion. In one class we find the divers things pro¬ 
duced, by processes of secretion or excretion 
within the individual (here may be mentioned a 
few) the production of which are necessary fac¬ 
tors, in the human economy. The digestive gastric 
juice, which is a mixture of hydrochloric acid, 
pepsin and rennin, is produced in the stomach, by 
the functioning of the different cells, contained 
within the lining of the inner wall of the human 
stomach. The bile, which is sometimes called the 
gall, because of its bitter taste, is manufactured in 
the human liver; it is green or golden brown in 
color, contains water, salts of different composi¬ 
tion, fats in combination, cholesterin (which is 
said to have the power of neutralizing snake- 
venoms, and causing an immunization against 
them) lecithin (this substance is of both animal 
and plant origin and is said to be anti-venomous, 
its properties being antagonistic to poisonous 
insects) and various pigments. The above men¬ 
tioned (gastric juice and bile) products are said 
to have a marked influence upon the system of 
digestion, especially when brought in contact 
with the products of the pancreas, an organ which 
creates (by an unknown method) the following 
substances: amylopsin (sometimes termed, the 
amylolytic enzymes) which converts or transforms 


90 The Millennium and Medical Science 

starches into sugar; trypsin (sometimes termed, 
the proteolytic enzymes) which has the power to 
aid in the digestion of proteids (it also dissolves 
gelatin, elastic substances, certain membranes and 
tissues, such as meat we eat); steapsin (sometimes 
termed, the lipolytic enzymes) the action of which 
consists in the cleavage of fat substances into 
glycerin and free fatty acids, in the waging of a 
destructive and constructive process, which has 
much to do with the digestion and the changing 
of foods into the necessary saponaceous nature or 
state. In another class are found those apparently 
hidden animated attributes (from unknown 
sources but which are possibly produced in and 
by the chain of endocrine glands) containing the 
primary elements, maintaining the secret process 
of procreation, which go to make up in its termina¬ 
tion the ability of delivery, by the human, of those 
constituents which possess the power and function 
of impregnation for the purpose of propagation 
of the human race. 

Consideration of that so-called “personality” or 
“individuality” and the future possibilities of solv¬ 
ing this world-wide problem which has puzzled all 
humanity and men of science for many years. The 
importance of possessing these qualitative ele¬ 
ments or “important factors” in the proper quan¬ 
titative amounts or degrees, when striving for suc¬ 
cess in the different vocations of life; the apparent 
necessity of every individual containing, at least, 
a certain amount of these same “important fac¬ 
tors” in the “struggle for life,” in accordance with 
the laws of the “survival of the fittest.” 


CHAPTER VI 


THE GLAND OPERATION 

“Come forth into the light of 
things; let Nature be your teacher.” 

— Wordsworth. 

/ 'T V HE more recent interest in the “Monkey 
Gland” treatment is simply a revival of the 
work done in France some thirty years ago. About 
the same time, in Paris in 1889, the fluid extract of 
the gonads of the dog was used, being introduced 
into a man, subcutaneously. Since that time many 
experiments have been done on both lower ani¬ 
mals and man, with little or no results of a mate¬ 
rial nature. Just a few years ago the use of the 
“Goat Gland” method gained some little publicity 
and was advocated by some as giving the best 
results. These treatments, both goat and monkey, 
however, after being subjected to a crucial test of 
investigation, did not sustain their claims and 
they, too, were then thrown, with all others, up-to- 
date, into the scrap heap. Our purpose is not 
to discuss in particular the so-called, “Inter¬ 
stitial gland transplantation operation,” as it is 
being done today, but rather to throw some light 
upon the slow advances made in the art of sur¬ 
gery, especially in the particular field of operation, 
known as the transplantation of all organs or 
organisms, a field in which there is opportunity for 
vast improvement, and of which the human family 
stands very much in need. If, however, it is inci- 
91 


92 The Millennium and Medical Science 

dentally proven to the satisfaction of all concerned, 
in our writing, that this so-called “monkey or goat 
gland” treatment is nothing more or less than a 
“Mythical Farce,” it is not any special intention, 
but may automatically occur as being such, in the 
process of disclosing certain facts in the case of the 
so-called “Interstitial gland transplantation opera¬ 
tion,” as it is done today. At times, when we are 
sure of our ground let us stand firmly upon the 
facts in our possession and have the courage of 
our own convictions, without prejudice or par¬ 
tiality, and with a placid deliberation, in a resolute 
and logical manner, “Hew to the line, let the chips 
fall where they may.” Should there be exposed, 
by incontestable proof, formulated on a scientific 
basis of deduction plus practical experimentation, 
plus the attack from every possible standpoint of 
reason, the flaws and fallacies contained within the 
argument and contentions, as to the relatively true 
merits in any theory, especially as to its relative 
truth and accuracy as a practice; then the human 
race will surely have gained something, making 
for a healthier and happier life. Only, in this way, 
can we proceed in all branches of medicine and 
surgery, step by step, achieving our victories one 
by one, until we thereby attain the long sought 
“Millennium.” 

This is a world in which we, “live and learn,” 
provided, we will use our “powers of observation” 
in the full sense of the words; but, unfortunately, 
there are those among us who live and learn not, 
and we must expect to find them in so large a 
group as the human family and place them in the 
class, with “There are none so blind as those who 


The Gland Operation 


93 


will not see.” As a result of this blindness or 
ignorance, there are many who become ill, some¬ 
times invalids for life, from over indulgence, 
physical neglect and excessiveness, bacterial infec¬ 
tions, lack of proper nourishment; directly or indi¬ 
rectly, intentionally or unintentionally, as the case 
may be. There are however, two instances, in 
particular that we know of, where the individual 
is not at fault; one instance is, where nature, for 
many reasons, known and unknown, has failed to 
perform her functions properly, in other words, 
nature has failed to produce a normal and healthy 
child, when to all appearance, nature should finish 
her work and produce that normal and healthy 
child; at times, we are at a loss to explain this 
delinquency on the part of nature; at other times, 
we know that nature was not delinquent, but was 
handicapped in her work by a disease, for it has 
been written, “The sins of the father and the 
mother, are visited upon their children, even unto 
the third and fourth generation.” As to whether 
or not this disease is a sin, is a question not to be 
discussed at this time. We can readily see the sig¬ 
nificance in the writing. The other instance is the 
congenital or hereditary tendency of the several 
susceptibilities to any disease, disturbance or dis¬ 
order, each belonging in its own particular class 
and which may or may not leave its mark upon 
the parent or upon the child of the parent, ac¬ 
quired or congenial, “Even unto the third and 
fourth generation,” before or after birth.” 

There has been of late years much talk and 
publicity, relative to the interstitial gland trans¬ 
plantation operation and the wonderful results ob- 


94 The Millennium and Medical Science 

tained by the individual after this operation. The 
public in general have been led to believe, in a 
rather doubtful and confusing manner, that great 
benefits can be obtained, or wonderful cures and 
marvelous results brought about by an operation 
of this nature. It has been stated that it will grow 
hair on the head, and in some cases cure rheuma¬ 
tism. That it will improve the voice and com¬ 
plexion. That it will cure diabetes and tuberculosis 
and in fact cure any and all diseases of mankind. 
Also, that it will make you young again, bestowing 
upon an elderly individual, all the vim, vigor and 
vitality of youth. To all the above claims there 
is some little foundation, but very little of a definite 
character and none proven true, as far as an opera¬ 
tion for the interstitial gland transplantation is 
concerned. As we read, we can see where the 
theory was derived from, and where this 
hypothesis is to blame for all of the above state¬ 
ments, as to their relative merits, in this opera¬ 
tion. While it is a possibility and quite probable 
that great things may be accomplished in this 
field of work, in the near or far future, it is safe 
and sane to say, that today, this so-called, inter¬ 
stitial gland transplantation operation is only an 
experiment, and should be performed only as such. 

All new theories of a momentous nature, espe¬ 
cially in the medical profession, gather more or 
less momentum and force by the publicity of the 
daily press, encouraged as it is, by the anxiety of 
the vast numbers of human beings who are in need 
(at all times) of medical care and advice, also 
those of the morbid curiosity type; and principally 
the moron in its various degrees of affliction whose 


The Gland Operation 


95 


trend of mind is diseased and which may be stated, 
as, “those who are ill in mind and know it not,” 
all should be considered. It is well to advise the 
public in general, that they may do some investi¬ 
gating for themselves, before undergoing an opera¬ 
tion which may be absolutely useless, perhaps 
harmful, and possibly fatal. It is admitted and 
advocated by many investigators, that we may 
expect great things from this source of study, but 
up-to-date there is very little knowledge which 
may be called definite, in this operation. How are 
we to judge as to the relative merits and logical 
sequence of this operation in any case, especially, 
those of general debility or loss of youth and 
vitality? If we are to use our judgment in this 
matter, it is necessary that we resort to a “logical 
means in general,” in so doing. 

After the schooling and educating of the human 
being,—of the so-called intelligence, or the un¬ 
known power of mental capacity to grasp this in¬ 
telligence,—there travels hand in hand, in some 
individuals, consciously or unconsciously, a so- 
called “tact for business,” or, as termed in the 
olden days, success in the application of “barter 
and trade.” In these men we find a subtle mind, 
of the, “crafty thought for gain,” variety. This is 
admitted by the world in general as a trait of 
genius in the commercial man or merchant, while 
at times it may be termed, as anything but genius 
in the medical man. It, therefore, requires a hard 
and remorseless logic with which one would arm 
oneself as with a sword of cold and tempered 
steel, with which to combat this apparent perver¬ 
sion of duty, performed no doubt, in all righteous- 


96 The Millennium and Medical Science 

ness in the mind of some individuals, surgeons 
whose “inner sense,” is in reality and truly that of 
the merchant. We find written, “The key of 
knowledge ye hid; ye entered not in yourselves 
and to them that would enter in, ye opened not.” 

Logic arose, at least for the Western world in 
the golden age of Greek speculation which culmi¬ 
nated in Plato and Aristotle. There is an Indian 
Logic, it is true, but its priority is more than dis¬ 
putable. In any case no influence upon Greek 
thought can be shown. The movement which ends 
in the logic of Aristotle is demonstrably self-con¬ 
tained. Logic cannot dispense with the light af¬ 
forded by its history so long as counter-solutions 
of the same fundamental problems continue to 
hold the field. A critical review of some of the 
chief types of logical theory, with a view to deter¬ 
mine development, need no further justification. 
Logic is the science of the process of inference. 
What then is inference? It is the mental opera¬ 
tion which proceeds by combining two premises 
so as to cause a consequent conclusion. In the 
main there are three types, analogical, inductive 
and deductive. 

So it may be said, by logic we eventually arrive 
at the place of passing judgment, and judgment 
in general is the mental act of believing that some¬ 
thing is, or is not, determined. Consequently we 
have the verbal expression of such a belief. 
Finally, though sensory judgment is always true of 
its sensible objects, inferential judgments are not 
always true, but are true so far as they are logically 
inferred, however indirectly, from sense; and 
knowledge consists of sense, memory after sense 


The Gland Operation 


97 


and logical inference from sense, which, we must 
remember, is not merely the outer sense of our 
five senses, but also the “inner sense” of ourselves 
as conscious thinking persons. We come then at 
last to the question, What is truth? Truth 
proper as Aristotle said in the metaphysics, is the 
mind; it is not being, but one’s signification of 
being. Its requisites are, that there are things 
to be known and powers of knowing things. (It 
has been written “A man shall not hesitate to 
ask concerning [himself and] his place in the 
kingdom. Ye shall know. Everything that is not 
before thy face and that which is hidden from thee 
shall be revealed unto thee. For there is nothing 
which shall not be made manifest, nor buried 
which shall not be raised.”) It is an attribute of 
judgments and, derivatively, of propositions. That 
judgment is true which apprehends a thing as it 
is capable of being or known to be. Or, to com¬ 
bine truth in thought and in speech, the true is 
what signifies a thing as it is capable of being 
known. Secondarily, the thing itself is ambigu¬ 
ously said to be true in the sense of being signi¬ 
fied as it is. Truth, then, is not the agreement of 
knowledge with an object beyond itself, and there¬ 
fore unknowable, but the agreement of our judg¬ 
ments with the objects of our knowledge. A judg¬ 
ment is true whenever it is a belief that a thing 
is determined as it is known to be by sense, or by 
memory after sense, or by inference from sense, 
however indirect the inference may be, and even 
when in the form of inference of non-existence it 
extends consequently from primary to secondary 
judgments. 


7 


98 The Millennium and Medical Science 


The aim of logic in general is to find the laws 
of all inference, which, so far as it obeys these 
laws, is always consistent, but it is true or false 
according to the data as well as its consistency; 
and the aim of the special logic of knowledge is to 
find the laws of direct and indirect inferences from 
sense, because as sense produces sensory judg¬ 
ments which are always true of the sensible things 
actually perceived, inference from sense produces 
inferential judgments which, so far as they are 
consequent on sensory judgments, are always true 
of things similar to sensible things, by the very 
consistency of inference, or, as we say by parity of 
reasoning. We return then to the old view of Aris¬ 
totle, the truth is believing in being; that sense is 
true of its immediate objects, and reasoning from 
sense true of its immediate objects; and that logic 
is the science of reasoning with a view to truth. All 
we aspire to add is that, in order to attain real 
truth, we must proceed gradually from sense, 
memory and experience through analogical par¬ 
ticular inference, to inductive and deductive uni¬ 
versal inference of reasoning. Logic is the science 
of all inference, beginning from sense and ending 
in reason. In conclusion, it may be said, seemingly, 
the logic of the last quarter of the 19th century 
may be said to be animated by a spirit of inquiry, 
marred by a love of paradox and a corresponding 
hatred of tradition. But we have found, on the 
whole that the logical tradition rises superior to 
logical innovation. In other words, we may say, 
“truth,” is what the seekers after “truth,” find, as 
a consequence of a certain number of definitions, 
axioms, paragons and postulates, accepted as 


The Gland Operation 


99 


known facts and used as a tangible basis upon 
which we work, in making final deductions, when 
giving expression in words as to the result of our 
work, in some particular study, by a sane and 
sound life of reason. Again we find written, “Let 
not him who seeks, cease until he finds and when 
he finds he shall be astonished; astonished he shall 
reach the kingdom and having reached the king¬ 
dom he shall rest.” 

When we use the term “Kingdom” in quota¬ 
tions, this term may justly be translated into 
“heaven” or “millennium” and have practically the 
same meaning; “Kingdom” no doubt was the ver¬ 
nacular of those days, while “millennium” is a 
term of today. There is no question as to the 
holy Bible being our oldest and greatest history 
and the character “Christ” was indeed a good and 
wise man, one who lived and died before “His” 
time, as many good and wise men have lived and 
died, from the day of the “Crucifixion,” up to the 
present day, paying the penalty of suffering many 
tortures and death; not because they were good 
and wise, but, because perhaps, their ideas and 
opinions were detrimental to the political or com¬ 
mercial intrigues and machinations of the knaves 
of the times. We, therefore, find in history, the 
character, the “Savior” which stands out clear, 
over and above all other things and the fact that 
“He” was a good and wise man. Nowhere do we 
find during “His” career upon earth, the manifes¬ 
tation of the tendency of “barter and trade,” which 
is in itself a strange and significant instance, of the 
revolutionary departure of the individual, from 
the hereditary characteristics of his race, and the 


100 The Millennium and Medical Science 


man of those times upon earth. “He” whom, we 
say, walked through life “barefooted” and who 
came to show us, “how to live and how to die.” 
All this is worthy of note, when we consider, He 
was himself a “Jew.” 


CHAPTER VII 

ORGAN TRANSPLANTATION 

1 ITERALLY, millennium, a period of a thou- 
J sand years, means little or nothing, but the 
term is used today to depict in the mind of man 
a conception of a time in the future when all 
flaws in human existence will have vanished; when 
harmony and happiness will prevail; the day when 
Love, Truth, Justice and Goodness will govern all 
things upon earth, and Man’s life will be complete. 

It has been written, “in six days God created 
the world, on the seventh He rested.” Rut a day 
of God is perhaps equal to a thousand years. 
Hence, it is said the world will last until six thou¬ 
sand years of toil and labor have been spent. Then 
will come one thousand years of Sabbath rest for 
man. Is this seventh millennium to be the end or 
will it be followed by the eighth day of eternal 
duration, and then the day of judgment? 

All Philosophical and Theological speculation 
will be abandoned for the time being, and, in fact, 
all views with the exception of “The Millennium” 
which the physician contemplates in the practice of 
medicine. All new ideas born in the mind of Man 
are at first phantasms or idiotic, impossible imagi¬ 
nations, then wild dreams of a thinking mind. For 
instance, modern chemistry and surgery, the 
Phonograph, Wireless Telegraphy, and many 
more. Then one day, behind locked doors or some¬ 
where away from the criticizing cynics and public 


101 


102 The Millennium and Medical Science 

gaze , the scheme is tried, or the experiment is 
made and proven a success. 

I would now speak of the “Transplantation of 
all organisms,” meaning, all parts of the human 
body, a subject, or should I say, a theme on which 
there cannot be found one single book written,— 
that is to say, no book of an authentic nature; it 
is true there has been much publicity given to the 
subject, in recent years, by newspapers, magazines 
and novels, all of which are sadly lacking and 
many times misleading, as to the material facts 
and none of which can be construed as coming 
from a reliable or dependable source; all seem¬ 
ingly appeal only to the idle, sometimes, morbid 
curiosity—and very little literature of an authentic 
nature could be obtained which was devoted to 
this subject. How long will it be before the medi¬ 
cal student will learn from his text book the secrets 
of the process which takes place in the transplan¬ 
tation of an organism? How and when will this 
great task be accomplished? This is a question in 
which every human being should be interested. 

When we trace in broad outlines the record 
of man on earth, it brings forward the story since 
the nebulous time when the “Man of the Drift,” 
was struggling for existence amidst the Wild. The 
earth is Man’s tomb and with him lie buried the 
evidence of his progress from savagery to civiliza¬ 
tion. This mass of testimony accumulates from the 
earliest period of his record on earth. In his burial 
he has written his history. 

Scarcely less interest attaches to Prehistoric 
than to Historic Man. The stones he cut and 
shaped into weapons and crude tools attest his 


Organ Transplantation 


103 


kinship to all men who have come after him. The 
age of Stone is but a step towards the age of Steam 
and Steel. In that far away day Man turned his 
eyes towards the same mysterious heavens that 
meet our wondering gaze. The winds and the tide, 
the succession of the seasons, the course of Nature 
were then as now. He groped for higher things 
as do men today. 

The Prehistoric World was a stage of Man’s ex¬ 
istence; of the transition to the Historic stage we 
know less than we would know, yet we find a 
record that shows that the transition covered a 
long period of time. Almost without notice, Man 
emerges from the dawn and mists of his past into 
the culture of the Orient; Egypt with its Obelisks 
and Pyramids, the Far East, famous for the won¬ 
derful and grand Architecture, Greece, Rome—and 
we may say the next morning we awaken to behold 
the Sun shining on the Modern World. 

It is the large record of Man that interests us; 
little events slip past unnoticed,—only the essential 
and abiding arrest the mind. It is Man’s career on 
the earth as a rational being, marked by his 
capacity to adapt himself to the organic world in 
which he moves that essentially concerns us. The 
law of civilization is the law of adaptation. Why 
cannot we, from a standpoint of medical science, 
make the law of adaption the law of civilization? 
In other words, why cannot we, with all the dis¬ 
coveries of modern science at our command, re¬ 
move any objectionable organ from the human 
body and replace it with a more efficient one? 

Transplantation, grafting, or the inserting of 
living tissues may be in the form of organisms, 


104 The Millennium and Medical Science 

limbs, skin grafting, mucous and serous membrane 
transplantation, or transplantation of periosteum, 
perichondrium and vessels; transplantation of 
teeth and bone, properly speaking, does not occur, 
this being implantation. Implantation, while a 
similar process, does not demand the use of a “liv¬ 
ing tissue” as a graft. This field of work must 
necessarily come under the jurisdiction of the Sur¬ 
geon. But at the same time the Physiologist and 
Zoologist must be given some consideration, as 
most of the work, to the present time, in this field 
of operation has been performed on animals. 

To begin at the beginning, Cytology, the study 
of cell life, informs us that the cell theory ranks 
with the evolution theory in the far reaching influ¬ 
ence it has exerted on the growth of modern 
biology. 

The phenomenon referred to by many authors, 
that cells of like order attract one another seems 
to be the main theory upon which all operators 
depend. It is known that sudoriferous glandular 
epithelium may be transferred into cuticle 
epithelium, but not into nerve cell. Connective 
tissue may become transformed into cartilage or 
bone, but not into muscle—and parathyroid into 
thyroid, but not into kidney or liver. 

Transplantation of protoplasm is of the widest 
occurrence in nature. In plants, the male element 
or pollen is carried to the ova (the female element 
of reproduction). Gravity, or air currents are the 
most important direct carrying agents in some in¬ 
stances,—as Indian corn or maize, whilst insects 
play important roles as transmitters. Frog’s ova 
are deposited outside of the body along with an 


Organ Transplantation 


105 


abundant supply of food material, and the sperm 
of male elements are deposited on the eggs (or 
ova) outside of the body, thus maternal and pater¬ 
nal elements are united outside of the body, but 
inside the body, the ova are transplanted from the 
ovary to the uterus (womb) and the sperm from 
the male into the ova (inside the uterus). Such is 
the natural process of fertilization and the result¬ 
ing organisms may or may not present identical 
objective characters of those of the parents. By 
artificial means it is possible to remove the fer¬ 
tilized ova of some mammals and successfully 
grow them by placing them in the uterus of 
another animal. 

Another form—propagation of plants by cuttings. 

The remarkable results obtained by grafting 
in arboriculture and gardening are familiar, and 
low forms of animals show a great readiness for 
growth if they are grafted; with the warm blooded 
animals however, this is by no means the case. 
One may make a general statement to the effect 
that immediately after grafting the tissue inserted 
may grow—perhaps into a tumor,—yet in a com¬ 
paratively short time the planted tissue becomes 
absorbed and a cicatrix alone may remain, al¬ 
though sometimes the graft forms a frame work 
upon which the regenerated tissue fills in the area. 
Even in this short period of growth after trans¬ 
plantation it is often notable that the prolifer¬ 
ation of the transplanted tissue occurs through 
generations of cells that gradually become less 
specific. Expressed in other words , there is at 
once reversion in the type of the cell trans¬ 
planted. 


106 The Millennium and Medical Science 

As far back in history as the 16th century, when 
scientific zoology began, and even to the present 
day, Zoologists have studied the lower animals 
from every angle, and one of the principal 
branches of the study, which has received special 
attention of late years and at the present day, is 
the transplantation of specific organisms. The 
curiosity of Zoologists has long been aroused to 
know whether the reproductive glands of a ver¬ 
tebra can be successfully transplanted from the 
body of one individual to another, and if so, will 
the gland thereafter functionate in its new envi¬ 
ronment, and if it does whether the nature of its 
products will remain unaltered. The fact has been 
repeatedly pointed out that experiments of this 
sort, if successful, should afford a crucial test of 
the Lamarckin and the Weisinannian views, re¬ 
spectively, the relation of the germinal substance 
to its environment, and in particular to the 
body. 

Outside the scientific world an immense mass 
of observation and experiment has grown up in re¬ 
lation to the subject of breeding. From the earli¬ 
est times the Shepherd, the Farmer, the Horticul¬ 
turist and the Fancier had for practical purposes 
made themselves acquainted with a number of 
biological laws and successfully applied them 
without more than an occasional notice from the 
academic students of biology. 

It is one of Darwin’s great merits to have made 
use of these observations and to have formulated 
their results to a large extent, as the laws of varia¬ 
tion and heredity. It would not be so wonderful 
a discovery today to find that after the transplan- 


Organ Transplantation 


107 


tation of organs had been perfected to some extent 
we could prolong youth, and therefore, Life, for 
many years. Heredity should not be lost sight of 
from the fact that every member of the human 
family being to a greater or lesser extent a victim 
of its environment, would, perhaps in time, be¬ 
come accustomed to the process and profit thereby. 
When we regard the subject matter of this process 
which may develop into a new science and which 
we may term “Renewed Life,” for want of a more 
scientific name, we can readily see it is not sur¬ 
gery, zoology or physiology, but a combination of 
the three in one. No doubt it will form part of 
the studies of the collector and systematic Zo¬ 
ologist who will co-operate with an efficient sur¬ 
geon,—one who has pursued the studies of organic 
and physiological chemistry and physiology from a 
medical standpoint—with only one object in view, 
namely, the “Transplantation of Organisms.” 

Whenever the breeder selects a congenital vari¬ 
ation which suits his requirements, and by breed¬ 
ing from the animals (or plants) exhibiting that 
variation, obtains a new breed specially charac¬ 
terized by the variation, so is it demonstrated in 
nature that there is a selection amongst the con¬ 
genital variations of each generation of a species. 
This selection depends on the fact that more young 
are born than the natural provision of food will 
support. In consequence of this excess of births 
there is a struggle for existence and a survival of 
the fittest. Consequently an ever present neces¬ 
sarily acting selection which either maintains ac¬ 
curately the form of the species from generation 
to generation or leads to its modification in cor- 


108 The Millennium and Medical Science 

respondence with changes in the surrounding cir¬ 
cumstances which have relation to its fitness for 
success in the struggle for life. We may observe 
an occurrence or living demonstration of the above 
statement, in every day life by watching the growth 
and development of a litter of pigs, cats, dogs or 
other animals, from birth. In almost every in¬ 
stance there is a so-called stunted one who is ap¬ 
parently sickly or weak. This stunted one is 
pushed aside and deprived of its nourishment by 
the others “in the struggle for existence.” If the 
stunted one survives it will remain stunted or ab¬ 
normal through life, as a rule it dies, being phys¬ 
ically unfit. This stunted one, if it lives, is never 
used for breeding purposes. 

In the transplantation of an organism, indica¬ 
tions are that it will struggle for life as all cell life 
will, provided, however, it is given succor along 
the lines which it requires for that life. For in¬ 
stance, there is on record a case of heteroplastic 
ovarian grafting followed by pregnancy, the bear¬ 
ing and delivery of a living healthy child with no 
evidence of ill results to either mother or child. 
The operation was performed by Dr. Morris of 
New York, on February 11, 1902. In reference 
to this case Dr. Morris writes: “I have done 
heteroplastic ovarian grafting in fourteen cases 
and this is the only one, to my knowledge, where 
the mother has given birth to a living child.” In 
this case the ovaries of Mrs. P. were transplanted 
in, or transferred to Mrs. W. Dr. Morris says: “In 
the case of Mrs. W. it is probable we have an 
instance of tolerance of the tissues of Mrs. P. that 
may have amounted to complete tolerance.” It 


Organ Transplantation 


109 


will also be interesting to watch the case and note 
who the child resembles, the husband of Mrs. W. 
or Mrs. W. herself, or perhaps Mrs. P., or someone 
of her family. (Dr. Morris gives no absolute proof 
that the operation was actually responsible for the 
birth of the child, in the one case out of fourteen. 
Until such proof is shown by satisfactory demon¬ 
stration, it is quite natural to believe and reason¬ 
able to assume that, this mother would have un¬ 
doubtedly and in all probability given birth to a 
child regardless of this operation. It is quite pos¬ 
sible that nature was slowly but surely preparing 
this expectant mother for conception long before 
the operation was performed, because it is an es¬ 
tablished fact, that some females of the human 
race require a long period of stimulation in mar¬ 
ried life, before conception takes place.) 

It is important to experiment along these lines 
with animals so we may prepare animals for toler¬ 
ating the tissues of each other. While this idea 
may not appeal to the “I am holier than thou” 
reformer or to those who are opposed to what is 
known as, venesection and animal experimenta¬ 
tion, it would be well for these so-called reformers 
to ask themselves: “What about the infants who 
cannot tell their troubles to the mother or physi¬ 
cian when ill?” Which is the lesser of two evils? 
Shall we let the innocent suffer the agonies of 
death, or, experiment on animals and save the 
child? It may be said, it is within the realm of 
sane and sound reasoning, that if the “I am holier 
than thou” reformer who is continually interfering 
in all animal experimentation, which is at all times 
done under the most humane circumstances pos- 


110 The Millennium and Medical Science 


sible, would do less interfering in scientific re¬ 
search and investigation, being conducted by those 
who seek the truth and knowledge of all patho¬ 
logical conditions afflicting the human race, there 
is a great possibility that the study of medicine and 
surgery would be much farther advanced and the 
physician would be better able to advise and aid 
the sick, in the hour of need. It is, of course, pos¬ 
sible that many of these reformers have no chil¬ 
dren and do not understand. 

From the physiological point of view, life is the 
continual functioning of the organs in the living 
body, but if for some known or unknown reason 
one or more of these organs should be removed 
from the living body, would that body continue 
to live without the missing organ, or would the 
body lose its life from the want of the vital activity 
of the lost organ? 

When we look back at primitive man one of 
the first things he wondered at was the Sun, Moon 
and Stars in the firmament over his head. Then 
he wondered what caused the change from dark¬ 
ness of night to dawn of day,—and next he ob¬ 
served that he himself was alive. He walked about 
and did things and wondered what made him do 
so. In other words,—What was life? (It was only 
after man began to gather knowledge, that he 
asked, What is death?) 

Life, or vital phenomena has been a bone of 
contention since the days of Adam. It has had, 
we might say, since the beginning of the world, 
according to Man’s belief, two principles,—a 
natural and a mystical,—some believing in one, 
some in the other and the rival believers have at- 


Organ Transplantation 


111 


tempted to explain it, sometimes one theory find¬ 
ing favor and then the other. The followers of 
Hippocrates found its clearest expression in 
Galen’s system, the doctrine of the Pneuma. The 
Pneuma was supposed to exist in atmospheric air, 
to be inhaled into the lungs of Man and thus 
through the blood to reach all parts of the body, 
where it produced vital phenomena. Later, in the 
middle ages the conception of the Pneuma lost its 
original force, and the mystical powers were 
looked up to and vital phenomena explained by 
a supernatural theory. And so it went on, the 
people believing first one thing then another. 

After the establishment of a scientific method 
in physiology by William Harvey, and the devel¬ 
opment of Descartes’ mechanical system of re¬ 
garding living bodies, the natural explanation of 
vital phenomena once more universally found 
favor. At once two schools arose,—the Iatrophysi- 
cal and the Iatrochemical. When both of these 
failed, then by degrees there emerged once more 
the tendency to explain vital phenomena by mys¬ 
tical means, finding expression in the “Animism” 
of Stahl. In the second half of the 18th Century, 
“Vitalism,” originating in France, began its vic¬ 
torious march throughout the whole scientific 
world. Again the opinion of mystical powers was 
entertained. And so it went on, back and forth 
until the discovery of the law of “Conservation of 
Energy,” by Robert Mayer. Later its application 
was applied to the living organism. 

Then Frankland, Rubner and others proved 
that the manifestations of energy by the organism 
are simply the result of quantity of potential 


112 The Millennium and Medical Science 

energy received into the body by the means of 
food. Finally the stupendous results arrived at 
by Darwin, the establishment of the fundamental 
law of “Biogenesis,” by Haeckel, prepared the way 
for a natural explanation of the enigma of evolu¬ 
tion and structure of organisms. So today we find 
that physiology, as the doctrine of life must there¬ 
fore confine itself to the material vital phenomena 
of organisms. 

The last important step in this direction was 
made by Schleiden and Schwann, in the discovery 
that all organisms are built up of elementary living 
structural components—namely, of cells. 

The three general elementary groups of vital 
phenomena, growth, reproduction and develop¬ 
ment are therefore in reality merely the expres¬ 
sion of the various aspects of one and the same 
process, of the actual process itself. 

The ultimate of all physiology is to discover 
what this vital process is,—that is to say, what is 
the exact cause of these manifold vital phenomena, 
a goal from which we are at the present time still 
very remote. 

As every physical and chemical phenomenon of 
inorganic nature occurs only under distinct condi¬ 
tions, so vital phenomena are also dependent upon 
certain conditions of life. Every living body, every 
living cell requires food, water, oxygen, and 
further, a certain temperature and a certain pres¬ 
sure in its environment. These are the general 
conditions of life. But the special conditions on 
which depends the continued existence of the indi¬ 
vidual forms of organisms, are as numerous as the 
forms of organisms themselves. 


Organ Transplantation 


113 


In the endeavor to study the subject of trans¬ 
plantation of organs no doubt these special condi¬ 
tions are the things that must be considered and 
studied, for if we wish to transplant an organism 
it would be well for the transplanter to know if the 
operation will be successful, or after being trans¬ 
planted whether the organism will grow, thrive 
and bear fruit, so to speak. From a surgical stand¬ 
point little can be said regarding transplantation 
of organs except that which is already well known 
to the medical profession in general, namely, sur¬ 
gical experience, surgical cleanliness, antiseptic 
and aseptic technic, hygienic environment. In fact 
all that any surgeon can do in transplantation of 
an organ is just what he does in every other major 
operation, where he knows, ninety-nine times out 
of a hundred, he will be successful, but when an 
organ becomes atrophied, diseased or injured and 
an operator replaces it with another organism of 
its kind, with either an animal or human organism, 
it is an experiment and he must trust to Providence 
that all will go well. In the opinion of some it 
may be a question of vascular anastomosis (the 
bringing together the ends of blood vessels) or 
surgical skill, or hygienic aseptic technic, or the 
general constitution of the patient, or a question 
of tolerance of tissues. 

When we take into consideration the chemical 
composition of protoplasm or proliferation of cell 
life in general, it might be found beneficial in cases 
where transplantation of organs or tissues are 
made, to take into consideration also the chemical 
composition of the nourishment administered; also 
the chemical composition of the water and air. 


114 The Millennium and Medical Science 

According to one author, success in transplanta¬ 
tion depends on conditions of nutrition and the 
mass and tenacity of life of the tissue. 

In transplantation of organs the material used, 
no doubt, would be the greatest factor in every 
case. The operation may be autoplastic (the re¬ 
pair of diseased or injured parts by pieces taken 
from another part of the body), isoplastic (tissues 
or organs transferred from one human to another) 
or heteroplastic (where parts of the lower animals 
or foreign bodies are used to repair diseased or 
injured parts in the human). In the transplanta¬ 
tion of the thyroid gland we find there has been 
comparatively great success. Also experiments 
with the mammary gland and the ovaries, to a 
certain extent have been successful. 

Dr. Carrel has been considered somewhat of a 
wizard in this field of operation. He has tried 
many experiments in the transplantation of organs 
and limbs and has in many cases been more or 
less successful. In some instances Dr. Carrel, has 
used fresh material, making the transfer as quickly 
as possible. He also kept material on ice for hours 
before using it and both operations were more or 
less successful, some to a marked degree. 

It is also stated that a physiological salt solution 
maintained at one hundred degrees Fahrenheit, 
into which the material is placed until used, has 
been found very beneficial. There has been 
very little work done in this field of operation, 
comparatively speaking, therefore a vast record 
of statistics cannot be referred to in order to obtain 
a given percentage as to what methods, technic 
or material is best to use. 


Organ Transplantation 


115 


Transplantation of organs is as yet in its in¬ 
fancy and work being done along this line might 
be considered not only from a surgical but also 
a physiological and zoological view. The great 
benefits to the human family in perfecting work 
in the transplantation field is readily seen when 
we consider the examples of physiological Hyper¬ 
trophy (increased in size) found in many organs 
of the human anatomy in every day life, in medical 
practice. Atrophy (decreased in size) of an organ 
may be from many causes which we will not take 
time to mention here. There are many kinds of 
accidents where grafting or transplantation would 
be of the greatest value. There are toxic actions of 
bacteria and protozoa, vegetable and animal mic¬ 
roorganisms of many kinds which are bent on 
pathogenic purpose (causing or giving origin to 
disease), and are in many cases the cause of the 
removal of an organ from the human body. 

When “The Millennium” has arrived, be it the 
near future or many thousand years hence, will the 
medical man have accomplished this wonderful 
feat? Is this operation to be one of the stepping 
stones to lead us to our goal in the future, making 
for a happier and healthier race? 

For a comprehensive explanation of “organ 
transplantation” especially the ductless glands of 
internal secretions and their functions, it will be 
necessary to give a brief summary of the different 
branches of the anatomy, each constituting an in¬ 
dividual study of the human body. First, the bony 
skeleton, which at birth is composed of a more or 
less cartilaginous structure, increasing in density 
and hardness as the individual grows older. This 


116 The Millennium and Medical Science 

foundation acts as a frame-work held in position 
by the different layers of muscles attached to them 
and which supply the motive power to move these 
bones. This branch of the anatomy is known as, 
Osteology, and may be defined as, the sum of what 
is known regarding the bones or the study of the 
bones of the human anatomy, in health and dis¬ 
ease. Second, the muscles, divided into two classes 
known as voluntary and involuntary, meaning 
those muscles over which the individual has con¬ 
trol and those which cannot be controlled. This 
branch is known as, Myology, defined as, the sum 
of what is known regarding the muscles or the 
study of the muscles of the human body, in health 
and disease. Third, the internal viscera con¬ 
tained in the thoracic and abdominal cavities, this 
is practically the power house or the machinery 
composing the organs which manufacture the 
energy that makes us go. This branch is known 
as, Splanchology, defined as, the sum of what is 
known regarding the viscera or the study of the 
internal organs of the human body, in health and 
disease. Fourth, the blood vessels which are 
divided in three separate sections known as 
arteries, veins and lymphatics. The arteries carry 
red blood, the veins carry blue blood and the 
lymphatics carry white blood or lymph. This 
branch is known as Angiology, defined as, the sum 
of what is known regarding the blood and lymph 
vessels or the study of the blood and lymph vessels 
of the human body, in health and disease. Fifth, 
the nerve tissues, which make up the brain, the 
spinal cord and its branches, the nerves, which are 
the telegraphic system to the brain by way of the 


Organ Transplantation 


117 


trunk line, the spinal cord. This branch is known 
as Neurology, defined as, the sum of knowledge 
regarding the nerves or the study of all nerve tis¬ 
sues in the human body, in health and disease. So 
we see there are five different divisions to be con¬ 
sidered in the general make-up of the body and 
for convenient study all divisions are again divided 
and subdivided into many parts. Any of these 
parts may be attacked from different angles or by 
different causes which we term, diseases, meaning, 
not at ease or something going wrong. 

The feasible possibilities of success, in the ques¬ 
tion of transplantation of organisms, by grouping 
all the tissues of the human anatomy under one 
head for the purpose of study in any instance 
whatever, are never advisable. We will therefore 
select a certain class or part of tissues known as 
the ductless glands and especially discuss this 
integral part of the whole, giving emphasis to the 
important points in this particular part, relating 
what we know, what we do not know and what has 
been done in the way of experiments, showing 
failure and success, as the case may be, and in 
conclusion what really has been accomplished up 
to date, in this class or part of organs, but at the 
same time when necessary, laying stress upon the 
essential facts pertaining to the relation of these 
organs to the human body as a whole. It will also 
be necessary to bear in mind, at all times, that 
any question of this type and caliber cannot, intel¬ 
ligently, be discussed as a unit by itself, but to the 
contrary, must be considered in unison with those 
things necessary to its life, which in this case are 
biology, physiology, anatomy and pathology. 


118 The Millennium and Medical Science 

Of late years, the secondary subject on which 
we are writing, known as, the ductless glands and 
their internal secretions, has in a way, been placed 
in a separate division by themselves, being partly, 
yet not entirely, excluded from all of the above 
mentioned studies. This late subject is known as, 
Endocrinology or study of the internal secretions. 
These ductless glands seem to be made up of a 
somewhat different tissue and are of a different 
complex construction and function. These glands 
are widely distributed throughout the human body, 
from the head to the lower part of the trunk. It 
is an undisputed fact that most of these glands are 
involved in an essential mechanism of intimate 
relation, making any one of these glands depen¬ 
dent upon and necessary to the other, by the way of 
their internal secretions, thrown into the blood 
stream. The pituitary gland is located in the head, 
below or at the base and near the center of the 
brain. The pineal gland is also located in the 
head, in the tissues of the brain. The thyroid 
gland and the parathyroid gland are located in 
the neck, the thyroid in front, the parathyroids 
behind the thyroid gland, between the head and 
shoulders. The thymus gland is located in the 
upper part of the chest. The adrenal glands are 
located just above each kidney, the pancreas below 
the liver behind the stomach, the spleen below the 
diaphragm on the left side, all the last three 
named, in the abdominal cavity. The above loca¬ 
tions are approximately correct and will answer 
our purpose. No attempt has been made or will 
be made at any time, to give exact locations and 
positions, using the full anatomical nomenclature 


Organ Transplantation 


119 


and detailed scientific description. The late inves¬ 
tigators have divided most of these glands into 
different parts which are called lobes. The gland 
as a whole may have two or more lobes and the 
gland as a whole may have one or more functions 
or each lobe may have its own particular function. 

It never has been explained, that is, to the en¬ 
tire satisfaction of everybody, just which one of 
these glands is of the utmost importance, but it has 
been admitted by the large majority of all investi¬ 
gators, that all these glands are essential to the 
welfare of the human economy and concerned in 
the regulating of health and well being of every 
human individual, from the day he is born into 
the world, until the day he dies and leaves it. The 
product of these ductless glands are called, the 
internal secretions and which we will see later, 
are of great significance and influential value, 
when thrown into the blood stream and thereby 
carried throughout the body. All these glands are, 
more or less essentially, very closely related to 
each other, to the extent, that when one gland 
meets with any disturbance, in some way this dis¬ 
turbance, which may be from one or more of many 
causes, has a direct or indirect effect upon one or 
more of this group of glands, by way of the blood 
stream. Some authorities claim that when all these 
glands are normal in size, function and location 
and work in harmony with each other, this lucky 
individual cannot help but enjoy good health. 
These glands are subject to stimulation at certain 
times under certain conditions, according to some 
of our well recognized authorities, and when neces¬ 
sary will produce an increased amount or a de- 


120 The Millennium and Medical Science 

creased amount of their internal secretions, ac¬ 
cording to response to this stimulation. Under 
normal conditions there will be only the normal 
amount of secretion but if there happens to be an 
over-production of this secretion, which may hap¬ 
pen from many causes, the individual practically 
becomes poisoned and suffers therefrom and when 
there is not enough of this secretion or an under¬ 
production, the body suffers from want of this 
internal secretion. In other words when an indi¬ 
vidual is ill, one or more of these glands is failing 
to function properly and when an individual dies 
then one or more of these glands have failed en¬ 
tirely, or one or more of these glands have func¬ 
tioned too great, in either instance the result is 
fatal, sooner or later. 

These glands are sometimes referred to as the 
endocrine glands. Some authorities say the 
product of any one of these glands carried by the 
blood streams to any other gland or most all the 
other glands of this group, acts as a stimulation 
in some instances, in other instances it is a process 
of, inhibition, to one or more of this same group. 
One author writes as follows, his views and 
findings several times, having been corroborated 
by others: “Experiments have shown, the sexual 
glands inhibit the thymus gland, as well as the 
pituitary gland. The pituitary gland in turn in¬ 
hibits the thyroid gland and stimulates the gonads, 
while the thyroid gland inhibits the adrenal 
glands. This tangled skein of cause and effect, of 
influence and counterinfluence, of stimulation and 
inhibition, holds within its mesh the great future 
of the study of medicine. And unto him to 


Organ Transplantation 


121 


whom there is given an understanding of the laws 
of the internal secretions, together with a knowl¬ 
edge of the specific action of the hormones or 
granules contained therein, unto him, there shall 
be added all things else.” It can be seen, that from 
the above acknowledged facts, all of which, to a 
marked degree, have been fully recognized, that 
the subject is becoming more complicated as we 
proceed. It is therefore, claimed on facts well 
founded, that when one of these glands is im¬ 
paired by disease or otherwise disturbed, there is 
not the proper mixture or the normal amount of 
the internal secretion being thrown into the blood 
stream and thereby carried throughout the body, 
supplying its several tissues with an essential need; 
this has a telling effect upon the individual, for it 
is then that he begins to lose ambition and there 
may be a general lowered vitality as a consequence, 
or he may become seriously ill, this illness always 
terminating fatally in extreme cases, there being 
little or no help for him. 

Several investigators have proven that most of 
these glands have more than one internal secretion 
and each secretion has its own particular or 
peculiar properties, its substance or power or its 
own particular latent potential energy; that is 
found manifested in its effort or action, and by 
virtue of which this substance or power,—sup¬ 
posedly contained in minute bodies which are 
known by different names, such as, granules, hor¬ 
mones, enzymes or ferments,—produces certain 
physical changes in the individual, which may be 
considered from a moral, mental, anatomical and 
pathological viewpoint. It is quite evident that 


122 The Millennium and Medical Science 


these minute bodies bear their message, or act as 
a messenger secretly, unheard and unseen, bring¬ 
ing hour after hour, month after month, year after 
year, their glad tidings of good health and great 
joy, which has not, up to date, been recognized nor 
appreciated by the world at large. In other in¬ 
stances these messengers bring ill health and dire 
distress, which may take our beloved ones from 
us. So it may be seen that much depends upon 
these minute bodies, even to the extent of life 
and death. These are the important factors, found 
in the internal secretions, produced only in the 
ductless glands and only when the glands are alive 
and well, and in good health, so to speak, and can 
perform their normal function. These are facts 
which are well recognized by all of our best 
authorities on this subject, who have made a 
special study of this branch of medicine and sur¬ 
gery. 


: 























• • 



i 






« 




* 















i 
















/■ 




















* 









< , 








1 


Vital Glands in the Female of the Human. 



Fig. 3. Schematic drawing showing location of glands of internal 
secretion (endocrine glands) in the middle and lower part of 
body in the female. 








Vital Glands in the Male of the Human. 










' I 







■ 







































































































• 

































CHAPTER VIII 


OUR VITAL GLANDS 

T HE thyroid gland is located in the front of the 
neck in its lower half and consists of two 
lobes which lie more or less, one on each side of 
the middle line with a third part called the median 
isthmus which unites the two lateral lobes. The 
tissue of this gland is composed mostly of small 
vesicles, which are small sacks that hold the secre¬ 
tion of this gland produced by the surrounding 
cells. This secretion is a colloid material in which 
the supposed physiologically active thyroid con¬ 
stituent, called iodothyrin, is embodied, its prin¬ 
cipal ingredient resembling iodine. This secretion 
is carried into the blood-stream by way of the 
lymphatic channel. In this gland and its internal 
secretion, we find, as in all others in this group, a 
conspicuous relation to the blood-stream and the 
ever present, hormones or granules. 

The thyroid gland and its internal secretion is 
a mass of confusion and a complex problem which 
cannot be explained in a few words. This gland 
has a far reaching influence over the entire body, 
according to its function, which may be normal or 
abnormal, because it is subject to many dis¬ 
turbances, causing much suffering and no end of 
trouble in the human family. It has lately been 
agreed and accepted by most authorities, that the 
internal secretion of the thyroid gland exerts an 
important influence upon general metabolism and 
123 


124 The Millennium and Medical Science 


nutrition. The secretion of this gland, in a general 
way, is an important factor in the destruction or 
neutralization of toxic wastes, foreign material, 
bacteria and their harmful products. There are 
differences of opinions as to precisely how this 
secretion brings about its influence or action. 
After extended study of several thousand cases of 
disturbance of the thyroid gland, there was doubt 
as to the cause of the trouble, which may have 
been, perverted function, altered rate of normal 
function or infection. 

The thyroid gland is called by one writer, “The 
Keystone of the Endocrine Arch,” and he claims 
that it most certainly plays a very important part 
in the symptom-complex of pernicious anemia, 
which is a disease of the blood-stream proper, 
which may be the result of many causes, princi¬ 
pally, any bacterial infection; others claim the ad¬ 
renal glands have something to do with this con¬ 
dition, since adrenal insufficiency is a very com¬ 
mon occurrence in pernicious anemia. The most 
common disease of the thyroid gland is known 
as goiter, or enlargement of the thyroid gland. 
The condition or disease has many names and 
alterations, depending upon the case. When there 
is a lowered function of the thyroid gland with a 
consequently lessened internal secretion from this 
gland, in extreme cases, there develops a condi¬ 
tion or disease, known as myxedema which occurs 
in adult life. This condition generally occurs where 
the thyroid gland shows a distinct atrophy or a 
reduction in size, but there are cases on record 
where this disease was present, in which the thy¬ 
roid gland showed a marked increase in size at 


Our Vital Glands 


125 


first, atrophy following gradually. In children 
where there is a decrease in the internal secretion 
of the thyroid gland there develops a condition 
known as, infantile myxedema or cretinism and 
occurring as it does before the body growth is com¬ 
plete, we find as a result, there is a marked re¬ 
tarded mentality and a general physical back¬ 
wardness, the sexual development is practically at 
a stand still; the child does not grow up, but takes 
on the appearance of a dwarf, and with the mental 
and physical stigmata makes a pitiable picture, 
which one does not care to look upon. Where there 
is an excessive amount of the internal secretion 
thrown into the system, by an overactivity of the 
thyroid gland, as a rule, there is increased heart 
beat and rapid loss of weight, with many other 
symptoms, terminating in convulsions and death, 
in severe cases. 

Experiments with animals have shown, that 
when the animal has been fed extracts of the thy¬ 
roid gland it has a marked resistance to all infec¬ 
tion and to poisoning by organic matter, while 
those animals whose thyroid gland had been re¬ 
moved, fell easy victims to infections and poison¬ 
ing by chemicals. Some claim, that experiments 
have shown that the hormone in the internal secre¬ 
tion of the thyroid gland stimulates and supports 
the gonads and without this stimulation and sup¬ 
port there is a marked sexual deficiency. Most 
authorities agree, that where there is trouble with 
the gonads the thyroid is always involved, more so 
in the female than the male of the human. Also, 
whenever there is any disturbance of the thyroid 
gland, there will always be found its influence on 


126 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the function of the gonads. Removal of the thy¬ 
roid gland in its entirety does not necessarily cause 
death at the time of removal, but may later cause 
impaired general nutrition, loss of weight, with 
marked changes in the blood stream, all of which 
eventually cause death, due to the lack of the 
internal secretion of the thyroid gland. 

One author says, “the foundation for the theory 
that old age comes on or that youth is lost as a 
result of changes in the thyroid gland, lies in 
the fact, that in old age the thyroid becomes atro¬ 
phied, its follicles shrink and retrogressive changes 
take place in the epithelial cells.” On the other 
hand, another author states that he is inclined to 
think, that old age has more to do with deficiency 
of the function of the adrenal glands. The truth, 
perhaps, lies in the fact that in old age all the 
ductless glands are undergoing atrophic changes, 
which may account for the general symptoms of 
senility. The same conditions prevail, no doubt, 
in the symptoms of senility in the middle aged. 
The more the medical profession study the thyroid 
gland and its internal secretion, including its hor¬ 
mones, it seems, the more they must study it, if 
we would learn its full significance. This is due 
to the fact, that new light on this subject is being 
brought forward every year, explaining new phe¬ 
nomena in its action. Some day we may conquer 
it, especially its specific function in relation to its 
associates, the other ductless glands, their internal 
secretions and hormones. 

The adrenal glands, sometimes called the 
suprarenal bodies, are each composed of two por¬ 
tions or lobes, called the cortex and medulla. 


Our Vital Glands 


127 


These glands are located in the abdominal cavity 
just above the kidneys, there being two in number, 
one mounted, apparently on each kidney but hav¬ 
ing no direct connection with the kidney. It is 
a known fact that during fetal life (during the 
stage of development before the child is born into 
the outer world) the adrenal glands are much 
larger than the kidneys, that at birth they are about 
equal in size, and that a process of involution is 
immediately inaugurated, which slowly brings 
about old age. According to our late authors, the 
cells of these glands contain small granules which, 
when sufficiently dense, diffuse out of the cells into 
the adjoining small blood vessels, and appear in 
the small adrenal veins as a yellowish brown, 
mucoid material; this is the internal secretions 
which pass from the small into the large veins, 
then to the heart and into the general circulation. 
Once more we find two seemingly essential factors 
in the make-up of these glands which are, numer¬ 
ous blood vessels and the granules. 

Some of the scientific investigators collecting 
evidence relative to the function of the adrenal 
glands say the adrenals give to the human being 
all the courage and ambition which is required in 
any crisis or wherever a special effort is needed 
in extreme exertion. Also, that any impairment 
of function of the adrenal glands, such as, tumor 
formation, atrophy or disease, would undoubtedly 
cause old age, while on the other hand, the integ¬ 
rity of the adrenal glands plays an important part 
in the promotion of longevity. One author writes 
as follows: “There are direct nerve-paths con¬ 
necting the adrenal and pituitary glands, this is a 


128 The Millennium and Medical Science 

sort of line of communication and these glands 
telegraph their wants to each other.” Experiments 
in animals showed that small doses of the extract 
of the adrenal gland will stimulate the thyroid 
gland to activity and increase its secretion. Many 
authors claim, it has been a long recognized fact, 
that the adrenal cortex of the gland is capable 
of exerting a marked stimulating influence on the 
essential organs of reproduction, by way of the 
blood stream. 

The most important and common disease 
known to affect the adrenal glands are infections, 
principally tuberculosis, and tumor formation, 
principally the true cancer type; in either case 
this is known as Addison’s disease, which as a rule, 
in all instances, terminates fatally. Any rapidly 
developing disease, causing destruction of the ad¬ 
renal glands or the removal of both of these glands 
in man or the lower animals, causes early death. 
Also where there are any chronic progressive 
changes, causing slow destruction of these glands, 
it always terminates in coma and sudden death, 
due to the lack of the product of this gland; its 
internal secretion. Where there is an over-pro¬ 
duction on the part of this gland, there is an exces¬ 
sive amount of the internal secretion sent into the 
blood stream, resulting in a general premature 
development as the most prominent symptom. 
Therefore, when we see children thus afflicted, 
they appear to become rapidly grown-ups, not only 
in size, but in sexual development as well. Hence, 
a child of seven years may look like an individual 
twenty years of age. Any tumor formation on the 
part of this gland may cause a child of five to 


Our Vital Glands 


129 


appear ten or fifteen years of age. It is a known 
fact, among the medical profession, when the ad¬ 
renal glands are affected, those individuals must 
use marked caution in sexual matters; any over- 
indulgence may be very detrimental to the general 
health. 

The pituitary gland, sometimes called the 
pituitary body or the hypothysis cerebri, is com¬ 
posed of three separate and distinct parts or lobes. 
It is located in the median line and about the cen¬ 
ter, in the base of the brain, just above the base of 
the skull on a bony prominence, called the sella 
turcica, meaning a Turkish saddle which this struc¬ 
ture resembles, the gland apparently riding in the 
saddle. In this gland we again find its construc¬ 
tion mostly made up of the blood vessels and 
secretory cells which produce a colloid material 
containing granules; this is known as the internal 
secretion of this gland. Again we find a strong 
contention that the blood stream is considered as 
the real channel for the distribution of the pitui¬ 
tary granules or hormones. All late investigators 
have come into agreement to the effect that this 
organ is essential to life, its complete destruc¬ 
tion or removal causing death. It has been said 
by some authorities, that this gland acts as a gov¬ 
erning center of the adrenal and thyroid glands. 
An over-production or secretion from the pituitary 
gland will produce a disease in the human, in 
childhood, known as gigantism or the excessive 
growth in the skeletal bones. This may be re¬ 
garded as the prodromic syndrome or the primary 
stage of a disease found in adult life, from the 
same or different causes, and known as acro- 


9 


130 The Millennium and Medical Science 


megaly. Some authors claim that gigantism and 
acromegaly are two separate and entirely different 
diseases and caused under different conditions, 
involving the pituitary in either case. 

Where there is a decrease in function of this 
gland causing a deficiency in its secretion, there 
is always the reverse in type of the individual, 
more or less marked. In childhood we find in¬ 
fantilism and dwarfism usually with obesity, while 
in youth under development of the gonads in both 
male and female. In the adult male there is a 
tendency to acquire feminine characteristics, such 
as, altered distribution of hair and fat, large breast 
and change of voice, in the adult female there is 
a more or less masculine or a mannish appearance, 
with change in some way of the monthly function. 
In both male and female there are other marked 
symptoms, including lack of ambition and low¬ 
ered sexual activity. All the above signs, symp¬ 
toms and conditions, and many more, are caused 
from the fact that the human system or body is 
suffering from the want of, or lack of the internal 
secretion of the pituitary gland. 

Confirmation of the especially prominent influ¬ 
ence of this gland on the essential organs of repro¬ 
duction has been brought to light by the following 
experiments on animals, which have shown: 
When a small portion of the gland is removed 
in the young, there is a characteristic state of 
sexual infantilism, while in adults there is incom¬ 
plete or defective structure of the generative 
organs. The feeding of extracts of this gland to 
the young produced premature maturity and func¬ 
tional activity of the reproductive organs. The 


Our Vital Glands 


131 


animals bred earlier and oftener when fed this ex¬ 
tract, the effects lasting throughout the adult life 
of these animals, as compared with those animals 
which had not been fed the extract and which were 
used as a control. Some authorities have found by 
experiments on animals that feeding the extract of 
the pituitary gland caused excessive structural and 
functional development of the sexual organs. 
Other animal experimentalists have found that in¬ 
complete removal of the pituitary gland in many 
instances results in genital atrophy, while some 
authorities have proven that complete removal of 
the pituitary gland is always fatal. It may also be 
added, that in nearly every case of disease of the 
pituitary gland and where examination of the 
pituitary gland has been practicable—before or 
after death—there was always found evidence of 
tumor formation, in many instances of the true 
cancer type. In one report on record, of twenty- 
nine cases of tumor formations of the pituitary 
gland, there were twenty-three of these tumors true 
cancer, more than ninety per cent, cancer. There 
is little or no evidence on record where any dis¬ 
ease except tumor formation, has affected the 
pituitary gland. 

The organ known as the pineal gland, some¬ 
times called the pineal body, so named from its 
shape which resembles the pine cone, is located 
in the brain tissue and has had a varied career. 
Descartes thought it contained the soul. The pineal 
gland is supposed to constitute what remains of a 
special visual organ, called by some the pineal eye, 
in certain invertebrates and low vertebrates, espe¬ 
cially the reptilia. In the higher vertebrates, nearly 


132 The Millennium and Medical Science 

all the structural peculiarities of a definite sense 
organ have been lost, and the main histological 
features (the microscopic study of the anatomy) 
are those of a gland. Of late years this gland has 
been raised to the rank of a useful organ in the 
human being. Again we find the important 
granules and many blood vessels which make up 
the greater part of this organ. Some claim that 
this gland has something to do with the control 
of the growth, activity, intelligence and develop¬ 
ment of the gonads in the human. There have 
been many contradictory reports, however, to em¬ 
phasize the fact that little is known concerning 
the actual functions of the pineal gland. Some 
authorities, after much investigation, make the as¬ 
sertion, that the pineal gland is not necessary to 
the human economy. Others declare this gland 
cannot be considered as an organ of internal secre¬ 
tion and that at the present time our knowledge 
of the function of this gland is more problematical 
than accurate, also that the experimental observa¬ 
tion upon the lower animals leaves us without any 
reasonable hypothesis which may be remotely re¬ 
lated to the pineal gland function. 

By experiments in feeding with pineal gland, 
animals showed more rapid growth of the body 
uniformly and an early sexual maturity. Strange 
to say, that during the experiments, when once the 
animals attained their natural size the gland feed¬ 
ing seemed ineffective in producing further results 
and no sign or tendency to gigantism was noticed. 
The small amount of one-third of a grain, given 
once a week proved sufficient to stimulate growth 
beyond the usual or natural rate. The reproduc- 


Our Vital Glands 


133 


tive organs of the male animals showed a fifty 
per cent increase in size and activity, also a more 
rapid rate of reproduction, other animals being 
used as a control and not fed the gland. There 
is little or no evidence on record of any disease 
of the pineal gland, except tumor formation of 
different types. 

It should be stated now, that any tumor forma¬ 
tion is sometimes called neoplasm, which means, 
new growth. Under the heading of tumor forma¬ 
tion or neoplasm there are many types of tumors. 
Two of the principal types of these tumors are 
carcinoma and sarcoma; either one of these two 
tumors is known to the laity as cancer, which is so 
commonly found in the human being. One case 
of pineal tumor,—found in the human,—verified 
by autopsy, and reported in one of the medical 
journals, showed that there was an extreme pre¬ 
cocious sexual development state, appearing more 
or less suddenly with a certain amount of adiposity. 
There are on record, forty-seven cases of pineal 
tumor formation, fifteen were sarcoma and four 
were carcinoma, which are the two principal types 
of cancer, making a total of nineteen cases of true 
cancer in forty-seven cases. When we consider 
that almost every case of pineal gland disturbance 
is caused by tumor formation, which means that 
apparently only tumors affect the pineal gland, and 
then remember that cancer is a type of tumor, to¬ 
gether with the fact that nearly fifty per cent of 
tumors of the pineal gland were cancer, also that 
ninety per cent of tumors found in the pituitary 
gland were cancer, and then bear in mind the pos¬ 
sibilities of influence of the pineal and the pitui- 


134 The Millennium and Medical Science 

tary gland upon the gonads, it should make an 
individual think twice, before undergoing an oper¬ 
ation for interstitial gland transplantation. 

With our meager knowledge on the subject 
there is enough evidence to warrant a warning, 
that there are grave possibilities attending the risk 
of an interstitial gland transplantation operation, 
at least until we learn more facts as to what may or 
may not happen and even then it would be well 
to have the percentage of good points in our favor, 
before having the operation done. The last state¬ 
ment above, without other knowledge, from the 
standpoint of biological, physiological, pathologi¬ 
cal and anatomical facts, is not very elucidative, 
however, it is worthy of some consideration. 

As we read, we cannot help but notice the in¬ 
fringement at all times, of any one function of 
these glands upon the others, insistently and con¬ 
stantly. It almost amounts to an intrigue in a 
measure, as if these glands with their secret meth¬ 
ods were some clandestine group, wherein there 
were some rebels, at one time all working together 
in harmony and at another time fighting each 
other, at times one gland invading the domain of 
the other fighting it alone, while another runs 
amuck attacking the entire group with an over¬ 
whelming amount of secretion, at another time one 
gland will refuse to function at all, as if in pro¬ 
test for some reason or other, against all the other 
glands. When viewed from another standpoint, 
it may be said, that there is much evidence to 
prove, that none of these glands are entirely inde¬ 
pendent of the others at any time during the life 
of the individual, but on the contrary, each gland 


Our Vital Glands 


135 


is dependent in some way upon all the others or 
at least some of its fellows for some assistance 
for its vital existence by the way of the blood 
stream and apparently when one gland suffers, 
regardless of the cause, all glands in the group feel 
the effects, more or less, with the result that all 
glands in the group suffer, more or less as the case 
may be. 

The parathyroid glands are generally four in 
number, there may be more, there may be less. 
They are about the size of a pea having the ap¬ 
pearance of an oval disk and located, as said be¬ 
fore, in the neck behind the thyroid gland and in 
front of the “posterior” muscles. (All of these 
muscles “posterior” which are attached, more or 
less, to the ligamentum nuchae and which is said 
to be in man, merely a rudiment of a once im¬ 
portant elastic band and fibrous membrane,— 
which, in some of the lower animals, especially the 
quadrupeds or four-footed mammals, serves to sus¬ 
tain the weight of the head,—is perhaps another 
point in favor of the Darwin theory.) It can be 
seen that these glands are well protected because 
it has been proven that these glands are very neces¬ 
sary to life and when removed in their entirety 
death soon follows. We have very little knowl¬ 
edge of these glands as they give us very little 
trouble because they are very rarely affected by 
disease. There are only two important facts 
found on record, one is that at times the para¬ 
thyroid glands may be so closely connected 
with the thyroid gland, that should these glands 
be removed in such cases by mistake, when 
operation for removal of the thyroid gland is done, 


136 The Millennium and Medical Science 

it ends fatally; the other is that there are several 
cases on record of tumor formation of the para¬ 
thyroid glands, some of them of the cancer type. 
The physiology and function of the parathyroids 
is still disputed, some claim these glands have a 
specific and independent function, others say it is 
doubtful, no substantial proof having so far come 
to light. In the literature we find that these glands 
would seem to furnish to the blood path a hormone 
which renders innocuous or tends to neutralize, 
any poison that may exist in the body. This is a 
special function which is called the detoxicating 
function. 

The thymus gland is sometimes called a tempo¬ 
rary organism growing to full size in the second 
year of life in the human, then it ceases to grow 
and remains practically stationary until the age 
of puberty, at which time it rapidly degenerates, 
or undergoes a process of retrogressive change, but 
does not entirely disappear. When this gland is 
full grown it is found to extend from the lower 
part of the neck down over the lungs in the chest, 
and is about three inches long, two inches wide, 
one-half inch in thickness. It is of pinkish-gray 
color, lobulated surface and of soft consistency. At 
birth it weighs about half an ounce. From the 
beginning of life, until the individual, male or 
female, is twelve or fifteen years of age, the thymus 
gland seems to dominate the situation and there 
are little or no developments of sexual charac¬ 
teristics. Then the gonads of both sex seem to 
declare themselves and demand their rights and 
the change from the child to man or woman begins 
to take place. The action of other glands during 


Our Vital Glands 


137 


this change is disputed or unknown. When once 
the man or woman has been firmly established the 
thymus gland seems to have served its purpose 
because it then seems to atrophy and almost disap¬ 
pear. Since the year 1853 it has been known that 
there is a distinct relationship between the thymus 
gland and the gonads of the male. The physiology 
and function is said to be that the thymus sup¬ 
plies, through the agency of its lymphocytes (white 
blood cells) an excess of phosphorus in organic 
combination (through the process of metabolism), 
which the body, particularly the osseous, nervous, 
and genital system, requires during its develop¬ 
ment and growth. It is claimed also that the secre¬ 
tions from this gland take an important part in 
the autoprotective functions of the body, in con¬ 
junction with other glands. There are cases of 
tumors, syphilis, tuberculosis and other infections 
of this gland on record. There is a special condi¬ 
tion known as “status thymicolymphaticus” being 
an enlargement of the thymus gland and which has 
caused death in children and young people; this is 
known as “thymus death,” with heart failure. 

The gonads or interstitial glands of the human 
being in the male differ very much in their loca¬ 
tion, structure and function, from that of the fe¬ 
male. The location of these glands in the female 
is one which affords every protection to these 
glands, from all ordinary external injury. Nature 
seems to have placed all our vital glands in a 
position or location where they are naturally well 
protected or where they can easily be protected 
by the individual. In the location of the gonads 
of the male of the human, however, there is one 


138 The Millennium and Medical Science 


instance where nature has apparently failed in her 
purpose, but if we accept the Darwin theory of 
evolution, nature did not make any mistake even 
in this instance, because any one can readily see 
and understand, how the gonads of all quadrupeds 
are very well protected. This apparent failure 
then, on the part of nature, in the male, is due to 
the evolution and civilization of man; possibly this 
is also a point in the favor of the Darwin theory. 
As far back in history as 1849 experiments showed, 
on removal of the gonads of a young rooster, the 
characteristic developmental changes in his voice, 
and his fighting spirit and comb were missing. It 
has many times been proven, since that time, that 
when the gonads of the young male fowl have been 
removed before it is old enough to develop a crow, 
this rooster will never crow. The fowl is then 
called a capon, and it is said this procedure will 
improve the flesh and growth of the fowl, at the 
same time it may be a demonstration of the claim, 
that the interstitial gland transplantation opera¬ 
tion will bring a change of voice or vocal organs. 
The question here arises, Is the change of voice or 
vocal organs caused directly by the removal of the 
gonads, or indirectly from the loss of the internal 
secretions given into the system by the glands that 
were removed, it being possible that the product 
of the gonads when thrown into the blood stream 
and thereby carried to other glands would have 
some action on these other glands and produce 
the crow or change in voice? This question may 
some day be answered. It is to be remembered 
that the gonads of the male and female in the hu¬ 
man, are not, anatomically, ductless glands, but in 


Our Vital Glands 


139 


addition to their reproductive usefulness, it is an 
unquestioned fact that they do produce an internal 
secretion, which is correlated with the hormones 
of the true ductless glands in maintaining the 
physio-chemical balance of the human body. 
About thirty years ago, there was published in a 
medical journal in France, a treatise dealing with 
research, on interstitial gland organotherapy. 
There it was stated, a man offered himself as 
a subject and had injected into his body, a 
preparation prepared from the gonads of the 
dog. He reported that almost instantly he was en¬ 
dowed with renewed vigor and virility but the ef¬ 
fect soon disappeared. The charlatans of Paris 
commercialized this fact by promptly seizing the 
announcement. As a result the real significance of 
the facts were lost in the effect of unethical practi¬ 
tioners to secure large sums of money from suscep¬ 
tible patients. One fact stands out clear in this 
case, it was not an operation of gland transplanta¬ 
tion, but a preparation of the gonads, which was 
introduced into the body, which no doubt, when 
carried in the blood stream to other glands, acted 
as a stimulation to these other glands in the body 
of this man, hence, the apparent rejuvenation, for 
a time, while the stimulant was effective. It is 
also necessary to consider the possibilities of the 
psychosis or psychophysiology in these cases of 
experiments, that we may learn the exact benefits, 
if any, and to what extent good results, of a sub¬ 
stantial, permanent and truly material character 
may be obtained; in other words, there is a possi¬ 
bility of a mental phase in these experimental in¬ 
stances. 


140 The Millennium and Medical Science 

It is hardly within the power of the family 
physician or any clinician to be able to go deeply 
into all factors in all cases as they pass by in the 
rush of a day’s work, but it would seem that in 
addition to the objective clinical pictures, there 
should be made as far as possible, an analysis of 
the personality, an investigation into social and 
environmental activities, a study of the instinctive 
demands, and a determination of the level of the 
emotional threshold which would be helpful in the 
treatment of so many of these qualitative and pre- 
quantitative endocrine disorders, especially those 
in which the nervous symptoms predominate, and 
which, unfortunately, heretofore, have received 
such limited attention. In truth, success will al¬ 
ways attend those efforts which go beyond the ordi¬ 
nary methods of procedure, and it will surely be an 
advantage to him whose conception is big and 
broad enough to comprehend these disorders in the 
fullest possible aspect. It is a fact that cannot rea¬ 
sonably be denied that nearly all neurotic condi¬ 
tions are, more or less commonly associated with 
various ductless gland disturbances. It has also 
been noticed that certain cases of mental in¬ 
volvement, having a tendency towards insanity 
which may have terminated as temporary or per¬ 
manent insanity cases, have been aided, while oth¬ 
ers have fully recovered, by organotherapy. 

































' 

' 




Vital Glands in Male and Female of Human. 


Pine 


Parathyroids 


Pituitary 


Thyroid 


mus 


Fig. 5. Schematic drawing showing location of glands of internal 
secretion (endocrine glands) in upper part of body in both male 

and female. 











Vital Glands, Connected By Blood Stream, in Human. 






























. 




. 










* 








CHAPTER IX 


INFERENTIAL JUDGMENT 

N OWHERE, at any time, has there been any 
attempt of explanation, to the public, relative 
to the gross amount of complications and implica¬ 
tions of the ductless gland organs in the human 
body, all of which play an important part in the so- 
called, interstitial gland transplantation operation. 
The wide distribution and location of these organs 
or glands throughout the body makes the discus¬ 
sion of this subject all the more complicated and 
confusing. It makes all scientific investigators and 
the medical profession, more or less skeptical in 
their views regarding the precise function and 
exact importance of contribution to life itself, from 
these glands, directly or indirectly, also in health 
and disease of the human body. Arthur Keith, 
lately, in his presidential address before the “Rrit- 
ish Association for the Advancement of Science,” 
concluded, “that bodily and mental features which 
mark the various races of all mankind are best 
explained by the statement that the conformation 
of every vertebrate animal is determined by a com¬ 
mon growth controlling mechanism which is resi¬ 
dent in a system of complex glandular organs, 
known as, the pituitary, pineal, thyroid, adrenal 
and interstitial glands, with the pituitary gland as 
one of the principal pinions in the machinery.” 
So it may be readily seen that of late years these 
glands have been set apart from all other parts 
141 


142 The Millennium and Medical Science 

of the human anatomy, in a class by themselves 
for the purpose of study, in conjunction with 
the other parts of the body, in health and dis¬ 
ease. 

After summing up all the evidence which has 
been produced and brought to light up to date, re¬ 
garding transplantation of organs or glands, from a 
practical and scientific point of view, it is noticed 
that there is not a single case on record where it 
has been proven that any gland transplantation 
operation would be a success before the opera¬ 
tion was done, nor is there a single case on record 
where it has been proven that an interstitial gland 
transplantation operation was truly a success. 
This statement is based on the following reasons : 
When the prospective patient asks the physician 
before the operation, “Will the operation help 
me or will it be a success,” the physician, if he 
tells the truth, must say, “I do not know.” Why 
must the physician or surgeon say, “I do not 
know”? Because it has not yet been definitely 
proven, just what are the essential factors or re¬ 
quirements necessary to make this operation a suc¬ 
cess, first on the part of the prospective patient 
and second on the part of the best material to 
be used in the transplant. In other words, there 
is not at the present time, any practical or scien¬ 
tific test known, or at least such a test has not 
been brought to light, up to date, if known, where 
a test can be made on the prospective patient, 
or on the expectant donor of the material to be 
used, or on the material itself, which will serve 
to give the operators any information whatever as 
to the relative success of the operation in any given 


Inferential Judgment 


143 


case. These are the things we must learn in the 
near or far future. The measure of duration is 
absolute. Time alone is responsible for the slow 
but sure change in all things, so, by degrees, the 
magnitude of this problem will slowly come to be 
known to man. 

This can be all the more appreciated and more 
easily comprehended when we recall the vast num¬ 
ber of failures in the past years, when the opera¬ 
tion for blood transfusion first came in vogue. 
Today the medical man can test his patient and 
the donor before the operation in any given case 
where a blood transfusion is necessary and the 
physician can assure his patient the relative suc¬ 
cess and therefore benefits, which the patient may 
expect. By this test, the possibilities of injury to 
the patient or of placing the life of the patient in 
jeopardy, by using the blood of a donor whose 
blood would be incompatible and antagonistic to 
the blood of the patient, is eliminated. All this 
may be ascertained before the operation takes 
place, in blood transfusion, by selecting the proper 
donor. To use the blood of any Tom, Dick or 
Harry, which may happen along will not do, the 
result may be injurious, perhaps fatal. Therefore, 
the blood of the donor must be tested and selected 
in every individual case. It is as important as 
selecting the food we eat; some is good and nutri¬ 
tious and some is bad and poisonous. 

As the compatibility and incompatibility, some¬ 
times called tolerance or intolerance, of one indi- , 
vidual’s tissues for the tissues of another indi¬ 
vidual, no doubt plays an important part in every 
case of gland transplantation, this point will some 


144 The Millennium and Medical Science 

day be given much consideration. There will 
perhaps be a test worked out for the patient, and 
for the donor of the material to be used. This 
would give us one more point in our favor as to 
determining the relative or complete success of 
a transplantation operation in the expectant pa¬ 
tient, in addition to the type of blood test. 

Gland transplantation, at least in the human 
being, as practised today, is considered a failure 
from all points of view and should not be done 
until we have more knowledge on the subject. In 
support of this contention the following facts are 
shown: First, that a certain set of organs are in 
a class by themselves, each of them closely related 
and dependent on the other by way of the blood 
stream and nerve connections. Second, because 
of the definitely known process of stimulation and 
inhibition by the different methods, of one gland 
in relation to one or more of its fellows in this 
group. Third, the function of these glands is to 
produce a substance known as the internal secre¬ 
tions and that both gland and internal secretions 
are of vital importance to sustain life in a normal 
and healthy condition at all times. Fourth, be¬ 
yond all doubt, the internal secretions of these 
glands contain in every instance one or more of its 
own specific factors, known as hormones which 
are live minute bodies, very powerful in their hid¬ 
den process of energy, constructive in health or 
destructive in disease, as the case may be. Fifth, 
these glands can only perform their function of 
producing this internal secretion containing these 
hormones, when they are alive and normal, being 
properly connected with the blood stream and the 


Inferential Judgment 


145 


nerve supply. Sixth, it is known that the extracts 
of these glands in the dry or solution form, when 
properly administered under necessary conditions 
and circumstances, will produce wonderful results 
in the practice of medicine. When the dose is 
too small it is useless, when too large it is dan¬ 
gerous and may be fatal, acting just as an overdose 
of any drug or a dose of poison. 

The full significance of the life saving and death 
dealing powers of these internal secretions or the 
hormones contained therein, may be appreciated 
in a more comprehensive light, when two or three 
of the many illustrations are given, of what 
secreting glands in the animal body can do. We 
have many instances of toxin production in dis¬ 
ease, one in particular worthy of mention in a 
disease commonly known as lock-jaw or tetanus; 
a toxin in this disease is produced by the tetanus 
bacillus, which, by tests, has been found to be more 
deadly than the venom of the American rattle¬ 
snake. There are many insects, reptiles and lower 
animals who have the faculty of secreting and stor¬ 
ing up in their bodies a deadly poison. It is also 
a strange fact that these animals, reptiles and 
insects carry in their bodies these deadly poisons 
without harm to themselves, but with the ways 
and means to use these toxins with deadly effect 
in self-defense. Perhaps, without our knowledge 
the human being also carries a gland which 
secretes a certain poison, without injury to our¬ 
selves, but to be used with deadly effect in com¬ 
bating our greatest enemy, all bacterial disease, 
such as tuberculosis, syphilis, typhoid, tetanus and 
many more. It is logical to assume that this de- 


10 


146 The Millennium and Medical Science 

toxicating power in the human is an established 
fact for the reason that many cases of lock-jaw 
(tetanus) do recover and get well, if it were other¬ 
wise every case of lock-jaw would necessarily be 
fatal. This same theory holds true in many other 
diseases. 

The Indian Mongoos is able to kill venomous 
reptiles with safety to itself. This is no doubt due 
to the fact that the Mongoos possesses a gland 
which produces an internal secretion containing 
a hormone thrown into the blood stream, which 
will neutralize the venom of the reptile, when this 
animal is attacked. The Indian Mongoos is espe¬ 
cially serviceable in India as a serpent-killer and 
seems to enjoy an immunity from the venomous 
reptiles unless repeatedly bitten. The American 
pig is said to be able to kill an American rattle¬ 
snake and eat it, without harm to itself; it has 
been proven that certain chemical poisons can be 
fed by the pound to the American pig without 
harmful effects on the animal. It is of great sig¬ 
nificance to note that these deadly poisons do little 
or no harm except when introduced directly into 
the blood circulation, when it is nearly always 
fatal. These are a few of the thousands of proofs 
that there is surely something confounding and 
confusing in the complex duplicity of the ductless 
gland, producing a secretion, containing a some¬ 
thing, thrown into the blood stream of all the 
higher and lower animals. This something surely 
has an infinite potential capacity, which when 
called into action, will serve in a dual capacity 
which may be detrimental or beneficial to the 
animal life as requirements demand. Legend has 


Inferential Judgment 


147 


for ages linked our tree of all knowledge to the 
serpent, especially the secret pertaining to life 
and death. Now, strange to say, we find the venom 
of the serpent a possible factor or a link in the 
chain of chains of our present knowledge which 
may prove to be in years to come a revelation. 
This continual welding together year after year 
for many centuries the knowledge explaining the 
factors, pertaining to and disclosing the truth, as to 
what makes life and what causes death, may con¬ 
tain herein the answer to the eternal question: 
What is life and what is death? 

Some radical changes must be made in the art 
of surgery, if we would be successful in the trans¬ 
plantation of organs or glands. This is self-evi¬ 
dent. The fundamental principle of surgery as it 
is today, its technique and instruments are appar¬ 
ently not to be used, it being quite evident that 
there must come a day when these methods will 
necessarily be revolutionized, eventually evolving 
into those methods with which we may meet the 
actual requirements in this field of work. When 
and how this revolutionary procedure will occur 
we will not attempt to say. In the act of trans¬ 
planting a gland, using our method of today, it 
must first be removed from its original owner. 
This procedure is not successful because it is neces¬ 
sary to cut many structures connected with the 
glands, arteries, veins and nerves. We now have 
removed the blood supply to the gland proper and 
it cannot be repaired, hence the gland being de¬ 
prived of its vital nourishment dies and its power 
of secretion is gone forever. The gland now as 
a dead body is transplanted into its new and 


148 The Millennium and Medical Science 

strange environment, the entire system and nature 
of the recipient rebels against the new intruder and 
treats it as it should, according to all nature’s laws; 
a foreign body invading a private domain. The 
battle of antagonism is begun. The gland is at once 
attacked and surrounded by a white fibrous con¬ 
nective tissue process, the gland now becomes a 
walled off object under pressure. From the very 
moment the gland found its new resting place, the 
surrounding tissues—whose functions are to de¬ 
stroy, if possible, all foreign bodies,—begin to con¬ 
flict, their intentions and duty being, by penetra¬ 
tion, dissemination and assimilation to dispose of 
this gland, looking upon it as an enemy. This is 
nature’s attempt to heal and protect every indi¬ 
vidual from harm and injury, and will occur in 
any and every instance, in any part of the human 
anatomy, more or less. If this circumstance were 
not true, the days of the human family would 
surely be numbered. In the particular case of the 
gland transplantation operation, this same circum¬ 
stance will prevail and nature itself, or nature’s 
laws, innocently and unknowingly, destroys our 
good intentions, thereby defeating us in our pur¬ 
pose, while it is always nature’s intention to do 
good. The result is, in a short time we find nothing 
remains of the transplanted gland but a hard, 
shrunken, perverted mass, absolutely useless. The 
situation of the gland when transplanted may be 
favorably compared with a bullet, buckshot, small 
piece of metal, wood or any foreign body which 
many people carry around with them, in their 
every-day life, in different parts of their body as 
a result of accidental injuries. These foreign 


Inferential Judgment 


149 


bodies, for some reason or another were never 
removed, but were attacked like the gland and sur¬ 
rounded by a semi-cartilaginous connective tissue- 
mass and not being able to destroy it, nature was 
content to hold it securely as a prisoner. The trans¬ 
planted gland once surrounded by this wall of con¬ 
nective tissue process is cut off from the blood 
stream and could not possibly perform its function, 
even though it were not dead, and should like to 
function. There are many old soldiers, whom you 
will meet and who will say to you, “Feel that lump 
in the muscle of my leg, well, that is a bullet and 
it has been there for years, but it never annoys 
me, so I pay no attention to it.” Nature has sur¬ 
rounded it with a connective tissue process. Con¬ 
nective tissue has only one function and that is, 
to form a so-called scar. 

It can now be plainly seen—therefore, truth¬ 
fully and honestly said, without any hesitation or 
fear of contradiction—that the interstitial gland 
transplantation operation, as it is done today is 
only an experiment and has all the ear-marks of a 
hocus-pocus and a bunkum-bunko game, only done 
for mercenary reasons. In justification of the above 
statement, it should be well to remember that we 
never hear of this interstitial gland operation being 
done by such men as the Drs. William or Charles 
Mayo or any other of the recognized surgeons in 
the United States. This is no doubt due to the 
fact that these surgeons who have made their 
reputations by doing good work, do not care to 
have their names placed on the same categorical 
plane with charlatans, clairvoyants and gypsy for¬ 
tune-tellers who will read the cards, your palm, 


150 The Millennium and Medical Science 


or gaze into the crystal and then tell your past, 
present or future for fifty cents. 

There are many reasons why this operation 
should not be done, first because of the post-opera¬ 
tive dangers entailed in any major operation, such 
as, pneumonia, infection of the wound and surgical 
shock, any of which may prove fatal. Any good 
surgeon will admit that there is always some risk, 
even in the best prospective cases. Then there are 
the possibilities of what may happen, as we know 
so little about the transplantation operation and 
therefore, cannot afford to overlook or omit such 
possibilities and even probabilities as, tumor for¬ 
mation including cancer, also, syphilis or tuber¬ 
culosis resulting from tissues used in the trans¬ 
plant, because it is always a question as to such 
material used (be it human or lower animal tis¬ 
sues) being entirely and positively free from these 
two well known infectious diseases. 

The argument that one of these transplantation 
operations has been successful now and then has 
never been proven to be true. There has never 
been any absolute proof brought to light to show 
when and how the operation was a real success. 
In every case there is always that veil of secrecy 
thrown about the operation, always the new dis¬ 
covery some surgeon has made in the method used 
or the new technique they say and refuse to say 
more, or a new kind of material is to be used in 
the transplant, there is always that mysterious and 
superiority of knowledge attitude. All this makes 
a fine cloak to hide behind, giving the operator 
a chance to get the money while practicing this 
type of quackery. We say, “this type of quackery” 


Inferential Judgment 


151 


because there are many kinds of quackery, and 
quackery is defined as: “ignorant or fraudulent or 
unfounded pretentions, in medical practice.” It 
is quite clear that any one who will do this opera¬ 
tion is either ignorant, or a fraud, or the preten¬ 
tions are unfounded, except in those instances 
where the operator made it plain to the expectant 
patient, that the operation is only an experiment 
and any beneficial results are problematical; under 
all other circumstances there are great possibilities 
of evident grounds for suit for malpractice; unless 
new light is thrown upon the present day methods, 
both practically and scientifically. There are many 
methods of deception which may be used, inten¬ 
tional and unintentional, depending upon the igno¬ 
rance or knowledge of the operator, on the subject, 
and especially in the case where there is a large 
fee involved as an inducement to perform the oper¬ 
ation. This does not include those investigators 
who do “experiments” and who seek the “truth.” 


CHAPTER X 


PERSONALITY 

I F consciousness be set on one side as over 
against reality, and merely holding up a mirror 
to it;—then it follows with naturalness that the 
truly real must be something which lurks unseen 
behind the subject’s representation of it. Hence 
come the different varieties of a so-called phe¬ 
nomenalism. It is said that anything phenomenal 
is something visible or directly observable, as an 
appearance, an action, or any unusual occurrence; 
an inexplicable fact or something so extraordinary 
as to excite wonder or admiration; as a person 
or thing of remarkable qualities or powers. The 
above can be appreciated when reading the state¬ 
ment which follows; for many years research 
workers have studied what are known as, the inter¬ 
nal secretions, found in the human being and in 
the lower animals. These internal secretions are 
said to contain minute bodies of ultramicroscopic 
existence. The research work of late years, which 
has been done relative to these minute bodies, has 
shown that it is quite possible and very probable 
that these minute bodies are the all-important 
factors involving the producing of a human being, 
who is known in life as, a wonder, marvel or phe¬ 
nomenon. It is also a grave possibility that future 
research work may prove that these same minute 
bodies are responsible, directly or indirectly for 
the production of the oth$r extreme of the human 
152 


Personality 153 

being in life, the so-called monstrosity of human 
nature. 

We will be well repaid if we review for a few 
moments these two extreme forms of nature’s pro¬ 
duction. In either case it is, apparently, only a 
slight or a gross negligence—as the case may be,— 
on the part of nature or the result of an unknown 
infringement on the natural law of propagation. 
The only excuse offered today, in the case of the 
handsome man or the beautiful woman, in face or 
figure, is that nature did her work very well in 
producing the phenomenon; but in the case of the 
ugly looking person, in face or in figure or both, 
which may be to the extent of repulsiveness, nature 
refused or neglected to finish her work, sometimes 
so much so, as to go to the extreme of producing 
the monstrosity. 

When nature does produce a phenomenon in 
the male, we find as a rule, the physique of the 
athlete with handsome face and symmetrical 
form, denoting a general picture of good health 
and in most instances accompanied by a remark¬ 
able intellect and adept disposition, a ringing 
laugh melodic and pleasing to the ear, a voice 
clear in tone and enunciation, full of meaning and 
expression; all of the other special senses acting 
in coordination and harmony, with a pleasant hap¬ 
piness emanating from his whole being. In the 
case of the production of the phenomenon in the 
female all the above hold true, but from the stand¬ 
point of true femininity, including all the virtues 
which make the beautiful woman, the exceptional 
wife and ideal mother. 

There are, of course, the two extremes in 


154 The Millennium and Medical Science 

nature’s production of the human being, or the so- 
called “positive” and “negative” phase of human¬ 
ity;—as viewed from the standpoint of personality 
or phenomenalism, or, the “positive” phase, signi¬ 
fying the possession of those qualifications which 
give to an individual the so-called personality or 
individuality; while the “negative” phase tends to 
explain the absence of the “positive,” or those 
exemplary and much desired characteristics— 
there are the many types of individuals in between 
these two extremes, each with its make-up and 
character having a tendency towards the “posi¬ 
tive” or towards the “negative” phase. In the case 
of either male or female, where there is a demon¬ 
stration of definite disposition and possession of 
the “positive” phase, it is a living exposition—or 
an instance—where nature for some unknown rea¬ 
son, has been both gracious and generous to one 
individual, giving all the prerequisites which make 
life worth living, either at the time that the mother 
of this individual conceived and became pregnant, 
or added these many coveted virtues of individu¬ 
ality—possessed by the child,—during the term of 
pregnancy. The “negative” phase is just the op¬ 
posite, where for some unknown reason nature has 
been unkind and sometimes even cruel in her ap¬ 
parent desertion of the individual, in some in¬ 
stances, depriving the individual of those vital 
qualifications necessary to a wholesome life; 
should such an individual survive there will be 
many years of mental anguish and physical suffer¬ 
ing on his part, from childhood to old age, and 
much discriminating negligence on the part of 
society, during the life of the individual. 


Personality 


155 


This positive phase has been defined as “per¬ 
sonality” or termed “individuality” and sometimes 
called “individual congenital congeniality” or 
“personal magnetism,” any and all of which de¬ 
note the development or revelation of character 
and sentiment, especially required in a successful 
career in our every day walk of life, and much 
more so, when pursuing—in any instance—one of 
the several arts or sciences, as a vocation. 

When the above or “positive phase” is com¬ 
pared or brought in heavy contrast with the “nega¬ 
tive phase,” which has been termed “no personal¬ 
ity” or “no individuality” this “negative phase” in 
life, is truly an instance of individual catastrophe. 
There are many unfortunate human beings born 
into the world, who are, without question, in the 
negative phase class, the different forms and types 
ranging from the average misfit individual to the 
totally helpless and dependent imbecile or mon¬ 
strosity. 

The comparison of difference in these two ex¬ 
treme phases is so great in contrast that human 
conception is at a loss to understand it and there¬ 
fore cannot define or give expression in mere 
words, as to the actual cause of the overwhelming 
absurdity on the part of nature. 

We find in our every day walk of life the several 
types, in the negative phase group of humanity, 
in particular, the imbecile or idiot; the much 
talked of so-called moron, who is classified as a 
type of feeble-minded person endowed with a 
slightly higher degree of intelligence than that of 
an idiot. There is the pervert, sometimes called 
the degenerate, in its different stages of degeneracy 


156 The Millennium and Medical Science 

or its different forms of perversion. The inebriate, 
habitual or common drunkard who is, as a rule, 
commonly known as the “ne’er-do-well” or “good- 
for-nothing.” The drug addict or so-called dope 
fiend, in its numerous forms. Perhaps it would 
be well to stop here,—although we could go on and 
mention many more instances and conditions, but 
the livid picturing of the many failings, short¬ 
comings and imperfections of the human family, 
(which are indeed very great, much greater than 
the average individual can realize) will not add to 
the tendency of proud man, to overcome his moral, 
mental and physical delinquencies—to continue 
this morose and vivid description would surely be 
disgusting and offensive. It is not the intention to 
excite aversion or create a loathsome tendency 
towards these unfortunates. Enough has been said 
to bring home to the minds of those who read this 
book, the incomparable contrast of nature’s pro¬ 
ductions, sometimes marvelous and sometimes 
freakish. At times mother nature seems good and 
kind in her donations and endowments of health, 
strength, beauty, intellect and virtue, and at other 
times she is cruel to the extreme when conferring 
or extending her much sought for favors. Call this 
a prank or a freak of nature or call it what you 
will; so far as is known today no one has solved 
the problem, except in the few instances where 
hereditary disease is said to play an important part 
and is materially to blame for the cause of the 
trouble. In any case of the negative phase, it is 
a life lived in sorrow and suffering, wrongfully re¬ 
jected by society, unjustly condemned to isolation 
and deprivation. This is truly all the more pitiful 


Personality 


157 


when we take into consideration the fact that such 
individuals are born into the world through no 
fault of their own and surely innocent of all per¬ 
sonal blame. How often have the many unfortu¬ 
nate fathers and mothers,—in the hours, days, 
weeks, months and sometimes years, of their trials 
and tribulations—sat alone with their thoughts and 
wondered, asking themselves the same question 
over and over again, “Why should my child be an 
imbecile,” especially when there is perhaps, a liv¬ 
ing example of the “phenomenon” type of individ¬ 
ual, day after day before their eyes, in the form of 
a nearby neighbor’s child. 

It has been said “nothing succeeds like success.” 
What then constitutes success? Many people will 
answer “personality.” This answer again brings 
us back to the “positive phase” of our subject. 
If it is true that “personality” spells success, and it 
is alone responsible, partially or wholly, it is then 
obvious that many of us have been unduly cheated 
in life and greatly handicapped from birth; also 
the source of our failure has been pointed out. 
Many hundreds of times the question has been 
asked “What is personality?” and, is it inherited, 
inspired, or cultivated? What are the potential 
qualities in the make-up of this strange and excep¬ 
tional characteristic, and how do you define it? 

The term “personality” is applied in philoso¬ 
phy, as well as in common speech, to the identity 
or individuality which marks a being (person) for 
what he or she is, or marks the individual off for 
all that he or she is not. So do we hear it said, 
many times, he or she has “no personality.” 

We must all admit the many failings in the 


158 The Millennium and Medical Science 

make-up of the human being. In this instance, the 
proneness to criticism, on the part of the average 
individual; any statement whereby we make use of 
the terms, “no personality,” aimed directly or indi¬ 
rectly, at any individual, seems the more im¬ 
portant, in as much as, it is more commonly used 
with a disparaging tendency or insinuation of in¬ 
significance; any one of us dislikes to hear or have 
it said, that we have, “no personality,” be it true 
or not. 

It will be necessary to fore-go any further argu¬ 
ment or discussion on the subject, at this time— 
on account of its foreign character so far as any 
definite knowledge is concerned,—because of its 
tendency to lead us nowhere or around in a circle 
back to where we started. However, we may con¬ 
cern ourselves at present, to this extent: from the 
use of the term “person” as distinguishing the self 
from the not-self arises the phrase “personal equa¬ 
tion” for those peculiar characteristics or idiosyn¬ 
crasies which have to be taken into account in esti¬ 
mating the value of an individual judgment or 
observation. The question of “personal equation” 
is especially important in the study and practice 
of medicine; it is reasonable to assume that the 
doctor of divinity, the doctor of law, the doctor of 
philosophy and many more, will also profess the 
importance of “personality” or the “personal equa¬ 
tion” in each profession or vocation, in the differ¬ 
ent walks of life. 

However, be all this as it may, the fact remains 
that these unfortunate individuals, as well as the 
fortunate, are with us. It is the unfortunate class, 
“of the negative phase,” with which society has to 


Personality 


159 


contend. One object in writing this chapter is to 
bring forth, if possible, some much needed light— 
in the way of argument, pro and con, by those men 
who have made a study of this question—on this 
obscure and darkened problem relative to nature’s 
action or incomprehensible laws. As we read the 
chapters which follow, it may be seen, that it is 
quite possible, these few pages of strange and insig¬ 
nificant words of today, will in the near or far 
future, prove to be a small ray of light, weak and 
dim coming from afar, but the foundation of a 
welcome beacon of the future, whose powerful 
rays will penetrate the darkness of the recesses of 
the perplexing problem. 










PART THREE 


SCIENCE TRIUMPHANT 

AND 

ITS TRUE PRACTICE 

T AKING for granted that “Mother Earth” was, 
at the beginning, as it is at present, the only 
and original abode of “man” and that all “life” in 
its different branches and phases had its origin 
upon “Mother Earth” we may proceed to relate 
in this part, “in accordance with science” and 
“logic,” the following important facts: 

The recognized worth of the late discoveries 
and improvements (in the practice of medicine) 
of an old theory, theme and study, now known as 
“Endocrinology,” its practical and useful applica¬ 
tion in the treatment of disease, in the up-to-date 
practice of medicine, its late elevation to a place of 
prominence and its recognition as an important 
branch, in the field of medicine. The history of 
“Endocrinology” in a concise form; its wonderful 
possibilities of the future, in the practical treat¬ 
ment of abnormal conditions and disease, heredi¬ 
tary or acquired, in the human family. The new 
discoveries and lately recognized study of the duct¬ 
less glands (from a scientific and practical point 
of view) which produce the internal secretions of 
the human being. The strange actions of these 
secretions or the apparent “factors” contained 
161 


11 



162 The Millennium and Medical Science 

within these internal secretions, the so-called “hor¬ 
mones” or “enzymes” or “ferments” or the “minute 
bodies” or so-called microscopic and ultra-micro¬ 
scopic “granules.” 

In this part we may also notice, human nature’s 
transmission of physical or mental heredity traits 
and taint of class and kind, with its leaning ten¬ 
dencies toward color, stature, endurance, person¬ 
ality, health and disease. The necessity of 
harmony of function of the different organs and 
the natural or normal processes which are essen¬ 
tial to the well-being of the individual. The abnor¬ 
mal or unnatural conditions as a result of disease, 
and the important factors, causes and reasons of 
diseased conditions in the different organs of the 
human body, from the standpoint of the “endo¬ 
crine glands.” 

Here we may read the opinions of recognized 
learned men, in the different branches of science, 
all having a bearing, more or less, upon our sub¬ 
ject. The few opinions mentioned here are in 
perfect accord with thousands of clinicians and 
scientific research workers (those men who seek 
and would know the truth), those who are famed 
in the history of medicine, and others who have 
been many times honored for their achievements 
in aiding all humanity throughout the civilized 
world, and who are therefore entitled to every 
consideration. 

In this part of our work, we again find the im¬ 
portance of the ever essential and positively pre¬ 
siding element, “the blood-stream,” in the human, 
driven by the heart through the vascular system 
in an uninterrupted stream, supplying all parts of 


Science Triumphant 


163 


the body with all substances necessary for their 
growth, maintenance and function of production. 
In addition to being the carrier of the nutritive 
and waste substance of the body’s metabolism, the 
blood is a very complex fluid tissue, and all of its 
constituents are not fully known. However, it 
may be said: the blood is essentially constructed 
of a watery consistency (plasma or serum) in 
which are dissolved various gases (oxygen, carbon 
dioxide, nitrogen, argon), organic and inorganic 
bodies, such as, proteids (fibrinogen, globulin, 
albumin), mineral salts (sodium, calcium, potas¬ 
sium), phosphates (magnesium, chlorides and 
other compounds), red cells (erythrocytes), white 
cells (leukocytes), platelets, fibrin, ferments and 
enzymes. 

Under normal or abnormal conditions (as the 
case may be) the blood is said to contain such 
products as, acetone, sugar, creatinin, amino-acids, 
urea and other substances. There are also found 
the so-called “buffers of the blood,” defined as, the 
direct defenders of the neutrality of the blood¬ 
stream, being composed of salts of either weak 
bases or weak acids, their function being to engage 
any invading acid or alkaline substance; having 
the ability to enable solutions in which they are 
present to receive additions of limited amounts of 
either an acid or alkaline substance. In addition 
to the above it is acclaimed that the so-called 
enzymes, ferments and hormones are contained in 
and carried by the blood-stream and that these 
“minute bodies” give to the constituents of the 
blood such properties as, first, the power to de¬ 
stroy bacteria and other foreign bodies; second, 


164 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the ability to combat or neutralize the toxins pro¬ 
duced by bacteria; third, the protection of the in¬ 
dividual against all animal, insect and vegetable 
poisons and, fourth, possibly adds to the power of 
coagulation of the blood, in cases of injury, there¬ 
by protecting the life of the individual. 

For many years the following contentions have 
been held: that the blood is that part which car¬ 
ries hereditary tendencies which the child is be¬ 
lieved chiefly to inherit from its parents; it is the 
supposed seat of the passions and emotions; in all 
pathological conditions where disease attacks the 
blood-stream, directly or indirectly, these diseases 
are nearly always fatal; principally among these 
diseases we find the several anemias and different 
types of dyscrasia. (The anemias are conditions 
in which the blood is deficient either in quantity 
or in quality or both, as found in wasting diseases, 
direct loss of blood, and imperfect nutrition, while 
the condition known as dyscrasia may be defined 
as any “abnormal composition” of the blood and 
humors or a “depraved state” of the blood, liquids 
and juices, of the human body, such as, invasions 
by parasites, bacteria and foreign bodies or any 
evil mixture of agents or products, having a ten¬ 
dency to cause serious damage to the blood¬ 
stream.) 

From the above it may be seen, where is found 
or upon what is based, those olden time quota¬ 
tions “it is in the blood,” and another, “the blood 
will tell.” These inferential judgments and de¬ 
ductions being correctly or definitely made many 
years ago, by the old masters, purely from the 
standpoint of observation, long before modern 


Science Triumphant 


165 


science made possible our present knowledge of 
the blood-stream. As we learn, more and more, 
year after year, thereby adding to our present and 
vast amount of knowledge (in the study of hema¬ 
tology) it proves to be a practical demonstration 
of the far-reaching complexity of what still re¬ 
mains (to a great extent) an unsolved problem, 
“the mysteries of the blood-stream.” 


CHAPTER XI 

ENDOCRINOLOGY 

“To him who in the love of Nature 
holds communion with her visible 
forms, she speaks a various language.” 

—William Cullen Bryant. 

I N the concise presentation of an historical 
sketch of “Endocrinology” we should consider 
its progress of opinion and practice to the present 
day, as well as its early origin as a study of and 
its relation to the ailments of man. In the days of 
Hippocrates, the ancient Greek physician, philos¬ 
opher and writer, sometimes termed the “Father 
of Medicine,” we find much evidence of the theory 
and the practice, of our present-day subject, 
“Endocrinology.” 

According to Soranus,—a Greek physician, who 
was born at Ephesus, and who lived during the 
reigns of Trajan and Hadrian, in A. D. 98 to 138— 
Hippocrates was born in Cos, in the first of the 
80th Olympiad, i.e., in 460 R. C. 

Plato, sometimes termed the great Athenian 
philosopher, was born 427 B. C., and lived to the 
age of eighty; his literary work is said to have 
extended over the first half of the fourth century 
B. C.; he has referred to Hippocrates as an emi¬ 
nent medical authority. 

The opinions of Hippocrates are also quoted 
by Aristotle, another Greek philosopher, who was 
a pupil under Plato; this is all the more important 

166 


Endocrinology 


167 


when we learn, that Aristotle from the first, prof¬ 
ited by having a father who, being physician to 
Smyntas II, king of Macedon, and one of the 
Asclepiads who, according to Galen, practised their 
sons in dissection, both prepared the way for his 
son’s influence at the Macedonian court, and gave 
him a bias to medicine and biology, which certain¬ 
ly led to his belief in nature and natural science. 

The original theory of “Endocrinology,” (in the 
days of these ancient physicians and writers) was 
much the same as those views held today, to-wit; 
that every organ in the human has a function and 
is necessary to the human economy; that many of 
these contribute—to a greater or lesser degree, 
either by a process of secretion or excretion—a 
certain characteristic substance, pertaining to the 
well-being of the individual; that deficiencies of 
these organs or the substances produced by these 
organs were the underlying cause for certain dis¬ 
eases. The original practice, in accordance with 
these ideas, was a crude one, nevertheless logical 
in many instances; it consisted of administering 
to patients, the organs of the lower animals in dif¬ 
ferent forms, certain animals being selected for 
the cure of certain diseases; the liver (being fed 
to the patient) was used for the diseases of the 
liver; the lungs for diseases of the lungs and so 
on. This practice was by degrees dispensed with, 
and in the revolutionary changes which followed, 
in the narrowing down to specific studies, not only 
of remedies but studies of organs and their func¬ 
tions, we have learned to consider only a few of 
the many glands in the human, as belonging in 
this class; and wonderful processes have been de- 


168 The Millennium and Medical Science 

veloped in their preparation for medicinal use. 
These are the ductless glands, their study being 
known as Endocrinology. 

The pituitary and thyroid glands were known 
to Galen—sometimes termed, the most celebrated 
of ancient medical writers, who was born at Per- 
gamum, or Pergamus, in Mysia, about A. D. 130— 
Vesalius named the pituitary in 1543 and the 
adrenal glands were described by Eustachius in 
1563, the parathyroids were discovered in 1880 by 
Sanstrom. It was not until about the middle of the 
nineteenth century, when Claude Bernard (the 
French physiologist, born in July, 1813, in the vil¬ 
lage of Saint-Julien and died in Paris in 1878) by 
his work awakened the interest of the world. 
Then Charles Edward Brown-Sequard, (known as 
a British physiologist and neurologist, his father 
being an American and his mother a French¬ 
woman) who was born at Port Louis, Mauritius, 
in April, 1817, and who in 1878 succeeded Claude 
Bernard, as professor of experimental medicine in 
the College de France, (where he remained till 
his death, in April, 1894) also contributed largely 
to our knowledge of “Endocrinology.” He did 
valuable work on the “internal secretions” of or¬ 
gans. Since that time the study of internal secre¬ 
tions or endocrinology has gone forward in leaps 
and bounds. 

Ever since the year 1880, up to the present time, 
we find many men have done good work in this 
field of study, and some of our very prominent 
physicians and scientific workers continue to carry 
on, in this interesting and promising field of hu¬ 
man endeavor. So it may be seen, from the above 


Endocrinology 


169 


historical dates and the general character of those 
men involved, “Endocrinology” as a study, has 
both time and logic to its credit. Here also we find 
at times in illustrative literature, the mixture of 
medicine and religion—a remnant perhaps, of the 
Mosaic laws—in the days of the Greek philoso¬ 
phers, physicians and writers of ancient times. 
The latter day workers and present day investi¬ 
gators have attacked the subject matter, not only 
from a scientific view, but from a clinical and 
practical standpoint, involving much laboratory 
work and research. 

The branch of medicine which makes a special 
study of the ductless glands and their internal 
secretions, in health and disease, is called Endo¬ 
crinology. All of these glands are, when in normal 
condition, giving into the blood stream of every 
individual the normal amount of their product, 
“the internal secretions,” but one or more of these 
glands, at the same time or perhaps first one and 
then another at different times, are under certain 
conditions and stimulations, subject to an over¬ 
acting or to a lessened activity. In other words, 
they may work over-time and produce more of 
their particular secretion than the human body 
can use or care for; this then acts as a poison and 
the individual suffers a toxemia from over-pro¬ 
duction. There are other cases and instances 
where these glands, one or more, “go on strike” or 
“lie down on the job,” so to speak, and do not pro¬ 
duce enough of one or more of the necessary in¬ 
ternal secretions and as a result the individual 
suffers from want of these products in the blood 
stream. 


170 The Millennium and Medical Science 


The study of these glands and their internal 
secretions is yet in its infancy. The hidden mys¬ 
teries and great possibilities we may expect in the 
solution of the problem have just begun to come 
to light. When the day comes that we can deter¬ 
mine by some process or test, just what amount 
of internal secretion is required from each gland 
in a given case or individual, and how we may 
regulate that amount, so as to give to the individ¬ 
ual that normal balance required to maintain a 
physically strong and healthy body, and just what 
the exact relation of one of these glands is to the 
others, then it is possible that we may be in a 
position to call forth at the time of emergency that 
so-called “Elixir of Life,” which imparts to the in¬ 
dividual the vim, vigor and vitality of youth. 

At the present day it is a difficult matter to say 
just which of these glands is the most important 
as an organ of function in any human being. 
Some claim one, some another. We know by ex¬ 
perience (in cases where it became necessary to 
remove some of these glands, due to disease or 
injuries and from experiments on animals), when 
some of these glands were removed in their en¬ 
tirety, in a great many instances, the operation 
was fatal. It is also a known fact, that when some 
of these glands have been transplanted into in¬ 
dividuals, as a last resort to save life, the result 
was fatal. It being proven, that the gland trans¬ 
planted reacted with an antipathetical effect and 
to the contrary of our intentions to do good, result¬ 
ing in the death of the patient. We have learned 
that some of these glands are of vital importance 
the removal of which always ends fatally. Those of 


Endocrinology 


171 


most importance and which have possibly received 
most attention and study and especially of late 
years, are, the pituitary, thyroid, adrenals and 
gonads of male and female; next in importance 
come the thymus and parathyroids in this group. 

It must be stated here because of what is to fol¬ 
low, that there is a common complaint or disease 
known to the human family as mumps or parotitis 
which is an inflammation of the parotid or sali¬ 
vary glands. This condition as a rule is of little 
importance or consequence, at the same time it 
must be remembered that many cases result 
fatally. In these fatal cases there often is a con¬ 
dition resembling typhoid fever or there are 
nervous symptoms followed by delirium and 
convulsions. In many cases there is a high 
temperature from 101 to 104 degrees F. and 
other symptoms of severe toxemia. The cause of 
the disease is unknown, the pathology obscure and 
there is no specific treatment. There are cases on 
record in which the symptoms have resembled 
those of an acute pancreatitis or an inflammation 
of the pancreas, indicating the pancreas has taken 
some part in the disease. As an aftermath in 
mumps there are many complications in both male 
and female. In the male one or the other or both 
of the interstitial glands (gonads) may become 
hard, swollen and painful, this is known as or¬ 
chitis and is of serious import as in many cases 
when both glands are affected as a consequence 
there is a rapid atrophy and the serious sequela of 
inability to procreate. In the female the breasts 
or mammary glands sometimes become tender and 
enlarge and in some cases the interstitial glands 


172 The Millennium and Medical Science 

(gonads) become affected. It is a recognized fact 
that the interstitial glands and the mammary 
glands of the female are related and in sympathy 
with each other. 

After the above statements we find, (by ob¬ 
servation) that the interstitial glands of male and 
female and the pancreas, all of which have been 
mentioned before, are in some way associated. 
The new introduction is the parotid or salivary 
glands which are without a doubt also involved 
in the question of internal secretions, yet the paro¬ 
tid glands are not placed in the class with the 
ductless glands. It would not be surprising, if in 
the near future, research work would prove that 
the parotid glands should be included in our 
glands of internal secretions. There is enough sub¬ 
stantial evidence in our medical literature today 
to prove that all these glands are related or in 
some way closely associated. From the above 
statements we may presume so far as to assume 
that the secretions from the salivary glands are in 
some way related to the internal secretions, for we 
will now see that the secretions from the salivary 
glands also contain these so-called hormones, en¬ 
zymes or ferments. 

In a long fought battle with the innner-most 
secrets of nature, scientific research has of late 
years conquered to a marked degree thereby add¬ 
ing to its credit a remarkable victory which is 
worthy of notice. As a result of this triumph we 
now have a new department of treatment, which 
has recently proven to be of great advantage in 
the practice of medicine. The report of this new 
discovery apparently rings true and the vibrations 


Endocrinology 


173 


of its echo resound of good promises and pros¬ 
pects of material benefits for the human family 
of today and of tomorrow. It is quite evident 
that no one individual human brain, no matter 
how strenuous would be the intelligence of mental 
capacity, will ever work out this problem. The 
accumulation of practical and scientific work of 
many men of many minds with the addition of 
much time, will no doubt, some day, bring forth 
its entire solution as a whole, separating those or¬ 
gans of the “true endocrine” aspect, from those 
organs (the false endocrine glands) which are 
intimately, or apparently so today, related to 
the “true endocrine glands.” Before proceeding 
farther we will outline briefly those apparent 
“false endocrine glands,” all of which play, no 
doubt, an important part in the apparent “true 
endocrine system,” possibly from the principle of 
“a foundation position” in the function of the 
“true endocrines” and the production of the 
“hormones.” 

Due consideration must be given the “liver” in 
the human; from the standpoint of size and 
weight, number of functions performed, together 
with its “portal circulation,” it may be called the 
largest individual organ in the body and the most 
important in the system of general mandatory 
functions; pertaining to the “foundation position” 
of fundamental principles of the metabolism, 
endocrines and excretory mechanism in combi¬ 
nation. 

It is presumed that the pancreas is an organ 
with both an internal and external secretion. The 
external secretions are trypsin, steapsin and amy- 


174 The Millennium and Medical Science 

lopsin which aid materially in digestion. The 
most important disease in the human, from dis¬ 
turbed function of the pancreas, is diabetes mel- 
litus. When the pancreas is removed, the result 
is diabetes mellitus. The pancreas seems to regu¬ 
late the mobilization of all sugar products taken 
into the body. There seems to be a relation be¬ 
tween the pancreas, adrenal glands and blood 
stream. These three factors apparently have 
much to do with, and exert a well defined control 
over the immunizing powers of the body concern¬ 
ing the resistance of the body to infectious dis¬ 
eases. 

The spleen is supposed to be much concerned 
in the production of the red blood cell and also to 
act as a graveyard for all red blood cells. In 
other words, the red blood cells are born with the 
aid of the spleen and they return there to die. 
There is very little definite knowledge regarding 
the spleen, except it is very closely related to the 
blood stream, and becomes either enlarged or may 
atrophy in diseases connected with the blood 
stream. In some of these diseases of the blood 
stream it becomes necessary to remove the spleen. 

So far as the so-called interstitial gland (testis 
in the male) is concerned, in accordance with all 
the natural laws of propagation and all scientific 
postulates, recognized authorities admit the fol¬ 
lowing. Primarily, the initial and essential func¬ 
tion of this gland is, to produce the spermatozoa, 
which must necessarily pass through a form of 
evolution and growth involving several stages— 
a process which when investigated, seems to give 
the impression that these apparently animated 


Endocrinology 


175 


animalculae (known to be alive, being possessed 
with an unmistakable motile function, as seen 
under the microscope) in the natural state, are 
possessed of several functions, and developed by 
the thousands, apparently, from nothing and no¬ 
where (unless it be the nutrition of the human 
body process, [metabolism,] assisted by the blood¬ 
stream) in this gland, year after year, eventually 
becoming the male factor of the fundamental 
principle of a future human being. 

Many times it has been remarked, the genius or 
the artist is born not made;—meaning, the excep¬ 
tionally talented individual who has surpassed his 
fellows as a painter, musician, writer, and many 
other instances in life—it is true that the indi¬ 
vidual must be trained and his or her talent de¬ 
veloped, but if the foundation of the genius or 
artist is not there, as a primary factor, no amount 
of training and attempt to develop will produce 
the intended or sought for result; if the stone 
which comes into the diamond-cutters hands, is 
not primarily a genuine diamond no amount of 
labor in cutting and polishing will produce a 
genuine flawless diamond. Therefore, it may be 
true that, the genius or artist is born and not made. 
Then it is reasonable to assume that this indi¬ 
vidual acquisition is promoted or bestowed upon 
him or her before birth and may be considered as 
an “individuality” or “personality.” It would be 
indeed interesting to learn the truth relative to the 
precise part played, by these endocrine glands, in 
the giving of those exceptional qualifying char¬ 
acteristics or to know the exact manner in which 
these glands mold into being the distinguishing 


176 The Millennium and Medical Science 

features (sometimes to a marked degree) of every 
man or woman as an individual. 

The work on the subject of Endocrinology, 
which has come to light in recent times both 
scientifically and practically, is most gratifying 
and encouraging. The satisfactory evidence pro¬ 
duced in the past decade relative to Endocrinology, 
including the endocrine glands, their internal se¬ 
cretions, with its hormones and their functions of 
inhibition and stimulation in health and disease, 
tends to demonstrate and open the way for a more 
efficient treatment of those cases whose symptoms 
complex (a number of complicated symptoms) 
was not very well understood in the past. 

The transcendent fact lately established by 
some of our most eminent and well balanced men 
in the practice of medicine, regarding these 
hormones and their all important significance in 
relation to the health of society and the destinies 
of the future treatment of disease, has a tendency 
to show that the study Endocrinology is here to 
stay and it follows that the foundation is laid upon 
which will be built, in the future, the explanation 
of how this branch of medicine can and will come 
into harmony and alleviate those vexatious prob¬ 
lems and sordid contentions with which we came 
in contact, and with which we had to deal, in the 
many years that have gone. 

If we should take for granted, (so as to follow 
a reasonably sane and directly linked chain of 
thought) that there are three sets of so-called 
“endocrine” glands, in the human, and that each 
set is divided into at least two (perhaps more) 
classes, which may be termed class A and class B; 


Endocrinology 


177 


then it should not be a difficult matter to perceive 
the simple manner in which all these organs func¬ 
tion in harmony with each other. As all these 
glands are known to be more or less implicated in 
the “endocrine system,” especially in the dual pur¬ 
pose of the protection and production of life, we 
find an organization something in this order; first, 
the excretory or “foundation position” set of 
glands, of which in class A we have the liver and 
portal circulation, the stomach and small intes¬ 
tines, the pancreas and salivary glands, the spleen 
and lymphatic glands, all of which act as the 
primary essentials of assimilation of nutritive sub¬ 
stances, when taken into the body; in class B we 
find the lungs and heart, the kidneys and urinary 
tract, also the colon (large intestines), these would 
answer for the purpose of elimination of all waste 
products after the process of assimilation (meta¬ 
bolism) has taken place. Or we may term these 
organs the containers, mixers and converters as 
well as the users, carriers and dispensers of all 
raw materials taken into the body, in the form of 
foods, gases, liquids and solids. Second, in the set 
of secretory or “true endocrine” glands we find in 
class A the pituitary, thyroid and adrenals, and in 
class B the thymus, parathyroids and pineal 
glands; all or part of these glands would seem to 
utilize the products of the “foundation” set of 
glands. Or we may say these glands (or their 
products, the hormones) act as the builders and 
molders of character as well as constructors of the 
different tissues, in a primary and secondary way, 
with a subsequent development and growth of the 
individual. Third, we have the reproductive or 


12 


178 The Millennium and Medical Science 

“pseudo” (in a way false endocrines) set of endo¬ 
crine glands, (their purpose apparently being to 
procreate the spermatozoa), and with the aid of 
the “true endocrines reproduce life; in class A we 
find (in the male) the testis and blood-stream, and 
in class B the prostate and seminiferous tubules 
(store house for the spermatozoa); in the female 
there is in class A the ovaries and the blood¬ 
stream, and in class B, the fallopian tubes and the 
uterus (womb). The culmination of reproduction 
occurring only when there takes place (generally 
or normally, in the uterus, but not necessarily so) 
an amalgamation of the matured products of both 
the male and female reproductive glands. Viewed 
from another angle we may put it this way: the set 
of “foundation position” endocrine glands produce 
the hormones which are the “physical” workers; 
the “true” endocrine glands produce the hormones 
which are the mental workers, and as a conse¬ 
quence of this retinue of systematic physical effort 
put forth and the regime of mental energy ex¬ 
pended on the part of both glands and hormones 
in these two sets of glands, there is at the proper 
time (the age of puberty) produced in the third 
set of glands (in the gonads of both sexes) the 
necessary germ of life, each contributing to the 
final culmination (the amalgamation of the male 
and female elements in the uterus) which would 
produce life and at the same time give to the 
prospective offspring the characteristics of the 
father and mother or both, or one of their families. 

We have therefore accounted, in this chain of 
reasoning, (admittedly, in a crude manner), for 
the three most essential factors involved in the 


Endocrinology 


179 


continuous cycle of all animal life, namely assimi¬ 
lation, growth and reproduction or as viewed by 
many authorities, who claim that, “life itself” is a 
combination of functions, development and 
growth; which is one and the same thing. After 
the reproduction of its kind, in any instance there 
naturally and necessarily follows a repetition of 
the life cycle, beginning with assimilation of food; 
resulting in the growth and maturity; with a con¬ 
sequent reproduction of kind. 


CHAPTER XII 


THE HORMONES 

T HE mysteries concerning the functions of these 
hormones found in the internal secretions of 
the ductless glands have just begun to explain 
themselves. Knowledge of their exact relations to 
each other and their specific function is still want¬ 
ing and awaiting investigation. Those who will 
take up this work will find a vast field of possibili¬ 
ties and unlimited opportunities for great dis¬ 
coveries awaiting their efforts. Of late years there 
is a wealth of literature on this subject. No other 
branch of medicine can produce, in quantity and 
quality, during a similar period, the enormity of 
literature which has been written on this subject. 
There has been much criticism offered. Organ¬ 
otherapy of the gonads has suffered most. It is 
not, of course, a question to be discussed in the 
home at the dinner table by the family circle. The 
little children do not understand, they are young, 
care-free and are not interested. But every father 
and mother should know the full significance of 
this all important subject. It is important that 
they should know, if they would be a true parent 
and desire to rear their children to be healthy and 
happy and would see these children develop into 
strong, healthy, and happy, men and women. 
While this subject may be considered a “delicate” 
one, and even improper, by some, the days of the 
old-fashioned false pride, together with the ignor- 


180 


The Hormones 


181 


ance of long ago, as to the functions of all parts of 
the human anatomy, in at least a general way, is 
now a thing of the past. It is only by a knowledge 
of our physiology, anatomy and the ravages of 
disease in their different processes, that we will 
eventually learn how to care for our health and 
maintain that good health, when we have good 
health and avoid things which may cause disease 
and rob us of a healthy, clean body. It has been 
written “The disciples did say unto our Lord, 
‘When wilt thou be manifest unto us and when 
shall we see thee?’ He saith unto them, ‘When ye 
shall be stripped and not be ashamed.’ ” 

It is surely unbecoming and beneath the dignity 
of an ethical physician to promote radical meas¬ 
ures or foster pet theories of dreamers, to the ex¬ 
tent of putting them into practice (in the human 
family) before being submitted to scientific and 
experimental investigation. The writer will ad¬ 
vance a theory in this work (The Gengemmule 
Theory) but wishes to make it plain that it is to be 
considered only as a theory and does not claim 
its advocation as a subject of practice. However, 
it will be recognized, that the theory is based upon 
many facts both scientific and practical. 

The dangers of these radical measures and pet 
theories to society come through misleading state¬ 
ments and false impressions created by publicity, 
before sufficient information is gained and reliable 
tests are made as to their actual worth and true 
merits, thereby proving them as bonafide facts. 
It is never necessary to do any romancing—we 
can well afford to leave this sort of thing, with its 
composition of extravagant story-telling and its 


182 The Millennium and Medical Science 

pompous extravaganza, of a fictitious and extrane¬ 
ous nature, to the novelist and the dramatist—nor 
parading with brass bands, to herald far and wide 
the information of any new discovery in the field 
of medicine and surgery. The merits of any new 
discovery will, at all times, speak for themselves 
and in due time the genuineness of its truism will 
become known throughout the world. 

Nowhere in the whole realm of medicine will 
there be found a more fascinating branch, interest¬ 
ing as to scientific facts, more important as to its 
relation to all physiological and pathological con¬ 
ditions, than this study of the ductless glands and 
their products, the internal secretions which con¬ 
tain these hormones. It is, therefore, important to 
every human being, from infancy to old age. It 
is by far, a greater and broader matter, than the 
question of the gonads alone; it is one which en¬ 
tails an involvement of nearly all vital organs per¬ 
taining to the health and happiness of humanity, 
and most authorities contend that it should be 
treated as such, if treated at all. One author 
writes as follows: “In all ages of life , the activity 
of mind and body are registered on the dial of life 
in proportion to the nourishment of its tissues 
which are dependent to a great extent upon the 
activity of the ductless glands and their amount 
of internal secretions.” This means practically 
that the human being will live with a healthy body, 
half live or die with an unhealthy body, at the 
dictation of the ductless glands and their products. 
Death, in the broad meaning of the word, is ap¬ 
plied to the animal organism. Death is at all times 
due to cessation of function, caused in each and 


The Hormones 


183 


every case by the absence of a factor. Lack of, 
or an increase of, the internal secretions is the 
factor which, many times, causes death. In other 
words, the hormones in the internal secretions, 
are for some reason, known and unknown, re¬ 
duced below a minimum or increased to the 
maximum; activation ceases, for instance, 
the heart, or lungs will stop working and death 
ensues. 

Life is composed of a cycle, beginning with 
reproduction, followed by assimilation, metabol¬ 
ism, and growth, and then we complete the circle 
by again coming to reproduction; but what is the 
hidden power of the progressive progress? We 
will now venture a bold statement, not yet proven 
a fact but a possibility. It is quite possible that in 
some future time it can be demonstrated and 
proven as a scientific fact, that these ductless 
glands together with the contents of their pro¬ 
ductions, are in every respect responsible for 
our existence as human beings. Also, that 
these glands determine our character, making 
us good or bad morally and socially, weak or 
strong mentally and physically, tall or short in 
stature, lean or fat in figure; that they govern the 
growth, distribution and color of the hair on the 
body; control the radiant or sallow complexion 
and give color or pigment to the skin, making it 
white, yellow, red, brown or black; that they regu¬ 
late and confer upon us the susceptibilities and 
immunities to disease. In fact, these glands in 
every instance, give us our individualities, making 
us what we are, as a man, or a woman. When this 
time arrives it will be learned, no doubt, that the 


184 The Millennium and Medical Science 


sole factors of importance will prove to be those 
minute bodies, the so-called hormones. 

As an illustration, we used to say in chemistry, 
all things conceivable to the senses are made up 
of matter and mass which is composed of gases, 
liquids and solids all of which, when subjected to 
certain conditions, will eventually become or be 
converted into another gas or some one of the 
higher ethers. The study of these ultimate higher 
ethers is another question,—the so-called panthe¬ 
ism; not the religious aspect, but to the contrary, 
the philosophical view. These gases, liquids and 
solids are said to be composed of molecules and 
the molecules in turn made up of or composed of 
atoms and these atoms being or are believed to be 
the smallest thing which was known in chemistry. 
All chemistry was based on these laws until a few 
decades ago; then the scientific investigators came 
forward with a new theory and now claim they 
can prove that these atoms are made up of hun¬ 
dreds of thousands of small bodies called electrons 
or ions which are now admitted to be the smallest 
known component of matter or mass. 

At one time it was believed, and is still the be¬ 
lief of some, that the cell with its nucleus, proto¬ 
plasm and cell membrane is the smallest known 
part of any organ in the body. Of late years the 
scientific investigators claim there must be some¬ 
thing smaller than the cell, producing their evi¬ 
dence to prove it. It must be remembered here, 
that many years ago there was much talk of 
hormones, enzymes and ferments, but no one knew 
what they were. These men knew there must be 
something which showed strange results in the re- 


The Hormones 


185 


actions of experimental work and different men 
gave them different names, hence we have the 
names hormones, enzymes, ferments, and several 
others. Other investigators noticed the results of 
the “presence” of the so-called granules, gem- 
mules, idioblasts, bioblasts, protomeres and idio- 
somes. Here we have a repetition of the above 
circumstances, where different men gave different 
names to the same small bodies or particles. 

At the present time the contention seems to be 
that all these “minute bodies” are (to a marked 
degree) one and the same thing, call them 
hormones or granules as you please. The question 
now is; have they relatively the same function and 
if so, what is the specific function, of each group? 
In other words, the scientific world had just ac¬ 
cepted the cell theory as the ultimate morphologic 
and physiologic unit of life. Then came forward 
the late day scientific investigators, taking up and 
utilizing the results of the work done by other men 
in the past thirty or forty years, and by corrobora¬ 
tion and co-operation with this work and in con¬ 
junction with their own research work, now claim 
there must exist simpler and smaller elementary 
units or organisms which themselves are the 
fundamental component principle from which the 
cell is, in its elementary stage, made up. These are 
the hormones, as we will call them. 

If we can in any plausible manner prove this 
theory, it will then be quite possible to account for 
the heredity tendency in the human family “unto 
the third and fourth generations.” There are 
instances where a child will have characteristics 
of the grandfather or grandmother on the side of 


186 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the father or mother, such as, certain features of 
the face, the shape and color of the eyes, the color 
of the hair or the shape of the head, hands or feet. 
This would also hold true in hereditary disease 
“unto the third and fourth generations,” also cer¬ 
tain immunities and susceptibilities to disease 
which is called by the laity, on the one hand, good 
health; on the other hand, poor health. 

As an instance, for the purpose of illustration, 
in the propagation of frogs it is reasonable to 
assume that there is a quadruple manifold force, 
of voluminous variety of minute ultramicroscopic 
granules, in the form of male and female repro¬ 
ducing elements, contained in the spermatozoa of 
the male and the same combination of constituents 
in the ovum of the female. Taking this for 
granted, why not assume that there are contained 
within the individual spermatozoa (the male ele¬ 
ment of reproduction) two different groups of 
factors, which may be termed the positive and 
negative or the “male and female” groups, also 
that this same condition applies to the individual 
ovum (the female elements of reproduction) and 
that the male elements of the spermatozoa unite 
with the female elements of the ovum and the 
male elements of the ovum unite with the female 
elements of the spermatozoa. In this manner there 
would be a strong possibility of explaining one of 
those hidden phenomena in the process of repro¬ 
duction, which is, molding of a combination of the 
features of “the family resemblance,” of either or 
both mother and father (in the human), so com¬ 
monly reproduced in the new-born of its parents. 

This is all the more a reasonably logical fact, 


The Hormones 


187 


when two factors are once more pointed out, first, 
that it is a recognized fact that these ductless 
glands which produce the internal secretions, con¬ 
taining these granules, are the basic physiologic 
regulators which sustain life after once the human 
being is born into this world and that these duct¬ 
less glands maintain that same vital phenomena 
within the realm of life in which it lives, in¬ 
corporated in the life of that human being. Second, 
it is, therefore, a natural consequence that these 
granules could be and should be contained within 
the spermatozoa of the male and the ovum of the 
female, in numerous quantities from the different 
glands, because these granules are thrown directly 
into the blood stream, being carried from the 
different glands to the interstitial glands or 
gonads of male and female, without coming in 
contact with the outside world and therefore are 
not subject to alteration in structure or composi¬ 
tion from any atmospheric action, but deposited 
by the blood stream into the interstitial glands of 
both male and female where, no doubt, they play 
the important part in the manufacture or produc¬ 
tion of the matured and live spermatozoa in the 
male, also in the fully developed ovum in the 
female; it being quite possible that these two 
secondary elements contained within the sperma¬ 
tozoa and ovum are mostly or entirely composed 
of these granules. 

This being the case, life would not have its 
primary beginning in a prospective mother, at the 
time of conception, but would begin in both father 
and mother, long before the mother (of the child 
to be) had conceived, namely, at the age of 


188 The Millennium and Medical Science 

puberty. This would give us a better and more 
clear insight into the recognized law “like begets 
like,” this biological law, no doubt, is primarily 
dependent upon the proportional health and 
function of the ductless glands of the parents of the 
newborn, and secondarily, upon the ability of the 
reproductive organs of the male or female to ac¬ 
cumulate or take up in larger or smaller amounts 
these granules, which would thereby determine the 
dominating features and characteristics (in the 
child to be) of the father or the mother as the case 
may be, or members of their family. 

These hundreds of millions of peoples, who are 
(at all times, more or less) all affected in health 
and afflicted with disease, by the increase or de¬ 
crease in the function of those same little glands, 
each and every one, more or less at different times, 
all come to the physician in the hour of illness, for 
aid. If we are to view the situation from the 
standpoint of gland transplantation it may be 
summed up in a few words as follows. All these 
peoples are patiently waiting for the explanation 
of this vital phenomena, for which they are both 
ready and willing to pay great tribute. These peo¬ 
ples will hail such a man, as a “Saviour” of all 
mankind. There are only two small requirements 
necessary in a given case; first, name the gland to 
be used; second, tell where and how to place it so 
it will function (thereby producing the proper 
hormones) for the benefit of the individual; and 
then “prove” your operation is a success beyon'd 
question. 

We may say, these granules, hormones, en¬ 
zymes, or ferments, are minute bodies, which ulti- 


The Hormones 


189 


mately will be proven to be the beginning and 
ending of all life, animal and vegetable, and that 
it will lie within the power of the future family 
physician to form or change certain features and 
other characteristics in the production of life, by 
close observation and treatment of these glands of 
internal secretions. All this may come to light in 
the near or far future, by giving doses of different 
kinds of gland extract. This would indeed be 
bringing about the Millennium in the human 
family without any operation. 


CHAPTER XIII 
VERSED OPINIONS 
DVANCEMENT of “science and research,”— 



Jr\ termed at times, “the sole foundation” of a 
true practice—is never an over-night mushroom 
growth, but in every instance is based upon facts 
which act as our stepping stones. Here will be 
interspersed some of those incidents—in the form 
of expressions and opinions—whose influence 
must be recognized, in our march of progress; the 
fruits of which all civilization has enjoyed, some 
of which have, in their crystallization, startled the 
whole world and passed far beyond even the mind 
of the dreamer and original builder. As our guide, 
—for the purpose of a better understanding and a 
more comprehensive delineation of our compara¬ 
tively new subject, “hormones,”—it is apropos, at 
this point, to cite the expressions and opinions of 
the many men engaged in the different fields of 
science, research and practice,—men whose recog¬ 
nition has been granted, because of what they have 
said; what they have written; what they have 
done;—all of which has a bearing on, and there¬ 
fore has added much (from their several angles) 
to our “mother” subject, “Endocrinology.” 

“Take from the air every aeroplane; from the 
roads every automobile; from the country every 
train; from the cities every electric light; from the 
ships every wireless apparatus; from the shops all 
motors; from office buildings every elevator, tele¬ 
phone, and typewriter; let epidemics spread at 


190 


Versed Opinions 


191 


will; let major surgery be impossible—all this and 
vastly more, the bondage of ignorance, where 
knowledge now makes us free, would be the ter¬ 
rible catastrophe if the tide should ebb to the 
childhood days of men still living. Therefore, 
whoever desires progress and prosperity, whoever 
would advance humanity to a higher plane of 
civilization, must further the work of the scientist 
in every way he possibly can.” 

—William J. Humphries. 

“It is a strange feature of the modern educa¬ 
tional process, that although children are born 
richly endowed with scientific instincts, they en¬ 
counter from the cradle to the university constant 
opposition to the education of these instincts.” 

—Joel H. Hildebrand. 

“A half-educated man knows enough to criti¬ 
cize and abandon the customs of his father, but 
not enough to preserve their merits or to improve 
their defective parts.”—Thorndike. 

Several months after Dr. Maxmilian J. Herzog 
had passed on, there was published a resume of 
his work in the form of a monograph (a syste¬ 
matic exposition of one thing; in this instance, a 
description of the so-called hormones, or enzymes 
or ferments) entitled, “A Contribution to the Study 
of the Nature of Enzymes.” Extracts of interest 
from different parts of this monograph are as 
follows: 

“About twenty-five years ago, while studying 
the blood of a certain acute infectious disease, the 
cause of which remains unknown even to-day, the 
author made some observations and from them 
drew certain conclusions. It is not necessary for 
our present purpose to discuss here whether these 
observations themselves were correct or not; they 
suggested at the time, however, that the disease 


192 The Millennium and Medical Science 


studied was due to exceedingly small live gran¬ 
ules; that these were multiplying in the blood; 
that the morbid process was to be looked upon as 
a pathologic fermentation; that every fermenta¬ 
tion ultimately was due to such minute, either 
barely visible or entirely ultramicroscopic, gran¬ 
ules; that, in other words, unformed ferments or 
enzymes were not chemical bodies in the common 
sense of the word, but something alive, possessing 
all of the properties of live substances—namely, 
the power of assimilation, metabolism, growth, 
and reproduction; that they were, in fact, the real 
basis of life, the true elementary organisms of all 
that we call life; and that the latter, in all of its 
phases, was due to the activities of such exceed¬ 
ingly small live ferment granules. 

“These, of course, are very bold, revolutionary, 
and startling ideas. We have become so thoroughly 
imbued with the belief that trypsin, ptyalin, and 
other enzymes are purely chemical compounds of 
complicated, though not yet known formulae, we 
are so firmly in the fetters of this fixed idea, that 
it must be as difficult to the average physiologist 
or physiological chemist to conceive of the meta¬ 
bolism, growth, and reproduction of an enzyme as 
to conceive of the metabolism, growth, and repro¬ 
duction of an ordinary chemical compound like 
sulphate of copper. 

“Yet we will be able to furnish in this paper 
convincing, incontestable, experimental proof of 
our conception. 

“At the time when the author first came to the 
above conclusions (1894), nothing was known of 
ultramicroscopic, filterable viruses as the cause 
of such diseases of higher animals as, for instance, 
foot and mouth disease of cattle, hog-cholera of 
swine, etc. There had already been described, 
however, by Beijerink, the ‘mosaic disease’ of the 
tobacco plant, in which the virus could be filtered 
through clay filters and the disease could be trans¬ 
mitted by the cell-free filtrate from plant to plant. 


Versed Opinions 


193 


The virus, therefore, was called a ‘contagium 
vivum fluidum,’ (a fluid alive with contagion). 

“After having formed the idea that enzymes 
were either composed of ultramicroscopic or 
nearly ultramicroscopic granules, it was thought 
that it would be very easy to demonstrate this by 
the use of bacteriologic methods of transfer from 
one suitable culture medium to another. The 
enzyme selected for proving the theory was ptya- 
lin of saliva and malt diastase, now often called 
animal and vegetable amylases. The fermentation 
product of these enzymes is maltose, which can 
be very easily demonstrated and determined 
quantitatively by a number of tests, preferably by 
using Fehling’s solution, volumetrically, or accord¬ 
ing to Allihn’s method, gravimetrically. These 
amylolytic enzymes, therefore, appeared the most 
favorable objects for furnishing the experimental 
proof desired. The first difficulty met with in work¬ 
ing with saliva and diastase of malt was bacterial 
contamination. This, however, was completely 
overcome in the course of time, because compara¬ 
tive tests demonstrated in carbolic acid and sodium 
fluoride two strong antiseptics which did not inter¬ 
fere with amylolytic action, even in compartively 
strong addition, but even increased it in moderate 
percentages of carbolic acid and in rather high 
percentage of sodium fluoride. By the use of these 
antiseptics, therefore, bacterial contamination 
could be prevented and the activity of interfering 
microorganisms could be excluded without loss of 
amylolytic action. Still, when transplants accord¬ 
ing to bacteriologic methods were made from fer¬ 
menting starch solutions to sterile non-fermenting 
ones, amylolytic action could never thus be trans¬ 
ferred in a sufficient and convincing manner. This 
was then ascribed to the detrimental, inhibiting 
influence of the fermentation products—dextrines 
and maltose, present and accumulating. 

“After producing evidence to justify our work 
on this problem, and before going into the detailed 

13 


194 The Millennium and Medical Science 

experiments, we shall endeavor to throw some 
light on the subject by stating here the ideas of 
others. We shall show how the trend of biological 
thought leans toward the end we have in view. 
Many workers have had ideas similar to our hy¬ 
pothesis, but none have yet attempted to prove or 
offer any proof for their contentions. 

“A short time after the more modern concep¬ 
tion of the cell had been formed, following the 
publication of Schleiden and Schwan, the convic¬ 
tion was expressed that the cell could not be the 
ultimate morphologic and physiologic unit of life; 
but that there must exist simpler and smaller ele¬ 
mentary organisms which themselves are the 
building stones of the cell. This idea permeates 
the entire history of modern biology. Hule, as long 
ago as 1841 stated that the cell possibly was made 
up of simpler, vital units which would rank be¬ 
tween the cell and the chemical molecule. Bruecke, 
while refusing to adopt Hide’s conception, in 1861, 
stated: ‘We therefore are compelled to ascribe to 
the cell, aside from the molecular structure of the 
organic compounds which it contains, another 
structure, complicated in a different manner, and 
this is what we mean when we speak of the organi¬ 
zation of the cell.’ Later on Darwin, Spencer, Nae- 
geli, Eisenberg, Haeckel, DeVries, Strassburger, 
Weismann, Wiesner, O. Hertwig, and others, ad¬ 
vanced theories, maintaining that the cell must 
contain simpler organisms since their existence 
only could explain the problems of cell life, of 
evolution, and of inheritance. C. 0. Whitman in 
his lectures, ‘The Inadequacy of the cell theory of 
development,’ (Vol. 2, p. 112, Boston, 1894) says: 
‘We have long been aware that the cell could not 
be taken as the ultimate unit of life and every 
notable effort to account for heredity has led to 
the postulation of primary elements in comparison 
with which the cells appear as complex organisms. 
Since Ernst Bruecke first contended for the or¬ 
ganization of the cell in 1861 and the existence of 


Versed Opinions 


195 


smallest parts as the basis for this organization, 
we have seen similar ideas in the physiological 
units of Herbert Spencer, the gemmules of Dar¬ 
win. We will find the secret of organization, 
growth, development, not in cell formation, but 
in those ultimate elements of living matter, for 
which idiosomes seems to me an appropriate 
name. What these idiosomes are, and how they 
determine organization, form and differentiation, 
is the problem of problems on which we must 
wait for more light. All growth, assimilation, re¬ 
production and regeneration may be supposed to 
have their seat in those fundamental elements. 
They make up all living matter, are the bearers of 
heredity, and the real builders of the organism. 
Their action and control are not limited to cell 
boundaries.’ 

“Hertwig in his book on the cell (English trans¬ 
lation, London, 1895) in giving a resume of his 
conception of the cell, says: ‘We are forced to the 
conclusion that the cell is a highly organized body 
composed of numerous minute different parts, and 
that hence it is in itself to a certain extent, a small 
elementary organism. ... It is, of course, neces¬ 
sary to consider that the hypothetical idioblasts 
must possess the power of multiplying by means 
of division like the higher elementary units. . . . 
Darwin, Naegeli, DeVries, therefore, logically as¬ 
sume that their gemmulae, particles of idioplasm 
and pangenae are both able to grow and to divide. 
This assumption enables us to draw another con¬ 
clusion, about the nature of idioblasts, viz : that 
by their very nature they cannot be identical with 
the atoms and the molecules of the chemist and 
physicist, for the former are indivisible and the 
latter, although divisible, split up into portions, 
which no longer possess the properties of the 
whole. . . . On this account the idioblasts are 
not identical with the plastidules, the existence of 
which is assumed by Eisenberg and Haeckel.’ 

“Wiesner: (die Elementarstruktur der lebenden 


196 The Millennium and Medical Science 


Substanz, Jena, 1892) states: ‘The assumption that 
protoplasm contains organized separate particles 
which are capable of division, and that in fact it 
entirely consists of such living dividing particles, 
is forced upon us as the result of recent inquiry. 
By means of division of these particles, growth is 
brought about and all the vital processes occurring 
in the organism depend upon them. They must 
therefore be considered the true elementary or¬ 
gans of life.’ 

“Watase: (The Nature of Cell Organization, 
Biol. Lectures, vol. 2, Boston, 1894), a pupil of C. O. 
Whitman, states: ‘The behavior of the cytoplasm 
thread or net work suggests that it is formed of a 
group of small living particles, each with the 
power to assimilate, to grow and multiply by divi¬ 
sion. The chromosome in the same way is itself 
a colony of minute organisms of another kind, 
each endowed with similar attributes of vitality. 
The media in which they live, the cytoplasm and 
caryolymph, are the media in which they breathe, 
from which they derive their nourishment, or 
within which they deposit the products of their 
metabolism. The reason why the cell as a whole 
assimilates, grows and divides is ultimately due 
to the fact that the minute particles which com¬ 
pose the cytoplasm and the chromosomes are en¬ 
dowed with these functions.’ 

“While Darwin and other biologists assumed 
the existence of elementary units without entering 
into any morphologic considerations, there came 
later on a number of investigators who attempted 
to find such units by microscopic methods and to 
reduce the structure of protoplasm to component 
simple morphologic elementary bodies. A num¬ 
ber of theories of the morphologic structure of 
protoplasm and of simple elementary units were 
propounded especially by Fleming, Altman, and 
Butschli. M. Heidenhain in criticizing these theo¬ 
ries, very properly and in strong terms insists 
upon the futility of such attempt which searches 


Versed Opinions 


197 


for the ultimate organic units of life as something 
of necessity visible. He points out how irrational 
it is to suppose, a priori, that these ultimate units 
of life should fall within the limits of the power 
of the microscope; and he holds that we must 
reckon with the probability of an ultimate meta- 
microscopic structure of the cell and of the proto¬ 
plasm. Pfitzner observed in 1882 that chromatin 
granules of the karyosomes of cells of salamandra 
divided, and that, in fact, the division of the 
chromosome depended upon the division of such 
granula. This observation subsequently was con¬ 
firmed by Fleming and others. Brauer (Arch. F. 
mikroscop Anatomie, vol. 42, p. 203) in studying 
spermatogenesis of ascaris meyalocephala, noticed 
the same division of chromatin granula. He looks 
upon this division as an independent act of repro¬ 
duction and says that he does not look upon 
chromosomes as independent individuals, but only 
as the components of innumerable, small chroma¬ 
tin granules. The latter only he considers as truly 
individual units. 

“In Wilson (The Cell in Development and In¬ 
heritance, New York, 1900) we frequently find the 
idea expressed that the chromatin granules might 
belong to the much-looked-for elementary organ¬ 
isms. The author, for instance, says (p. 114) : 
‘These observations certainly lend strong support 
to the view that the chromatin is to be regarded 
as a morphologic aggregate, as a congeries of or 
colony of self-propagating elementary organisms, 
capable of assimilation, growth and division.’ 

“Wilson also considers the possibility that what 
we can see does not yet show as the true elementary 
organism, and he states further on (p. 292): ‘Yet 
we may still inquire whether the power of division 
shown by such protoplasmic masses as plastids, 
chromosomes, centrosomes, nucleoli and nuclei, 
may not have its root in a like power residing in 
ultimate protoplasmic units of which they are 
made up.’ 


198 The Millennium and Medical Science 


“Could we accept such a view, we might more 
easily meet some puzzling cytological difficulties. 
It may, however, again be pointed out that it 
would be quite irrational to conclude that the 
smallest visible granules first come into existence 
when they first come within view of the micro¬ 
scope. The homogeneous substance must itself 
consist of granules still smaller. The real question 
is not whether such ultramicroscopic bodies exist, 
but whether they are permanent organized bodies, 
possessing besides the power of growth, also the 
power of division. 

“The belief that visible cell granula, demon¬ 
strable by various staining methods, are the looked 
for hypothetical elementary organisms, found its 
strongest advocate in the skillful and resourceful 
histologist Altman. The fundamental principle 
advocated by this investigator is the following: 
The cell is not an elementary morphologic and 
biologic unit from which can be derived directly 
the physiologic activities of the organism. The cell 
is, both from the morphologic and the physiologic 
view, a complex structure; it is a colony of gran¬ 
ules; i. e., of live beings or bioblasts, which may be 
be compared to free living microorganisms. The 
cell granules or globules possess independently the 
property of assimilation, growth, and especially re¬ 
production, and they possess the property of dif¬ 
ferentiation so that they can take upon themselves 
various functions of the cell. Even Altman, how¬ 
ever, conceded in later publications that the visible 
granules might take their origin from still smaller 
invisible granules, although he insists upon look¬ 
ing at the visible granules as elementary organ¬ 
isms. It is rather unfortunate to compare and 
place side by side, the hypothetical elementary 
biophoric units and unicellular microorganisms 
like bacteria, because the bacterial organism, as 
everybody who has done much bacteriological 
work knows, is not at all a very simple body and 
is no more a real elementary organism of bioblast 


Versed Opinions 


199 


than a tissue cell of a higher multicellular being. 
A very important objection against Altman’s 
claims, as pointed out by Verworn (Allgemeine 
Physiologic Jena, 1897, p. 67) is the following: 
Altman has failed to demonstrate that his granula 
show the general functions of life, and without 
such a demonstration one cannot speak properly 
of an organism. Verworn, however, raises against 
Altman’s granular elementary organisms, an ob¬ 
jection which is not at all valid; namely, that it 
is not permissible to speak of an elementary or¬ 
ganism in a cell unless we are acquainted with 
free living elementary organisms of this type. 
This is not sound reasoning in itself, because there 
might be an elementary biophoric unit in the cell 
which does not exist anywhere free in outside 
nature; or such units may exist, live, and multiply, 
outside of the cell, but they might heretofore have 
evaded detection. The latter, of course, is what 
really has occurred in the past. Verworn, how¬ 
ever, could not see it thus, and his final conclusion 
is that the cell is the individuum of the lowest 
order, that it is indeed the elementary organism 
itself. 

“Wiesner (quoted from Heidenhain) believes 
in the existence of smallest ultra or ‘meta-micro- 
scopic’ bodies, representing the last ultimate limit, 
where divisibility of the living substance ceases, 
because mere fractions of the ultimate unit will 
no more possess the character of protoplasm or of 
a live body which can multiply by division. O. 
Hertwig has accepted Wiesner’s theory. Heiden¬ 
hain calls those hypothetical smallest, ultimate, 
‘meta-microscopic’ bodies ‘protomeres’ and he be¬ 
lieves every form of growth to be due to the divi¬ 
sion of these bodies. He also holds that the ‘pro¬ 
tomeres’ are the cause of the universal automatism 
of live matter and that they possess the power of 
metabolism, of assimilation and dissimilation, of 
increase in mass, and divisibility. They also 
possess individuality; they keep themselves alive 


200 The Millennium and Medical Science 


by metabolism; and they must be looked upon as 
a biochemical system which, on the basis of its 
structure, is able to undergo cleavage and division. 

“Wilson, p. 431. In its physiological aspect, 
therefore, inheritance is the recurrence in succes¬ 
sive generations of like forms of metabolism and 
this is effected through the transmission from gen¬ 
eration to generation of a specific substance or 
idioplasm which we have seen reason to identify 
with chromatin. The validity of this conception 
is not affected by the form in which we conceive 
the morphological nature of the idioplasm — 
whether simply a mixture of chemical substances, 
as a microsome of invisible germs or ‘pangens,* as 
assumed by DeVries, Weismann and Hertwig; as a 
storehouse of specific ferments as Driesch sug¬ 
gests; or as a complex molecular substance 
grouped in ‘miscellae,’ as in Naegeli’s theory. 

“The contribution of Beijerink entitled: ‘Uber 
ein Contagium vivum fluidum als Ursache der 
Fleckenrankheit der Tabaksblaetter’ (Central- 
blatt fuer Bacteriologie, Abth. 11 Vol. V, 1899, p. 
77) is not very often quoted, yet the vegetable 
disease he described represents the first morbid 
condition in which an invisible, filterable, ultra- 
microscopic virus was recognized and fully estab¬ 
lished as the etiological factor. Beijerink was not 
the first to study this vegetable disease—this was 
first done by Adolph Mayer in 1887, who estab¬ 
lished its contagious nature. In the same year 
Beijerink tried to demonstrate aerobic or an¬ 
aerobic bacteria as the cause of the disease, but 
failed. Later he established the filterable nature 
of the virus; the explanation, however, in which he 
tries to give his observations is not at all correct. 

“Hertwig, p. 339; ‘Just as the plant or animal 
can be divided into milliards of elementary parts; 
viz., cells, so each cell is composed of numerous 
small hypothetical elementary particles.’ 

“We must also look upon the intercellular sub¬ 
stances of multicellular organisms as true live sub- 


Versed Opinions 


201 


stances, in other words, as composed of elementary 
biophoric granules. Virchow, when developing 
his cellular pathology and his dictum ‘omnis cel- 
lula e cellula,’ found something in the nature of a 
stumbling block in the intercellular substances of 
the body, and he then formed the conception that 
intercellular substance, as a mere product of cell 
activity possesses no true life itself, and was en¬ 
tirely depending in its nutritional activities upon 
the cells originally furnishing such substances by 
excretion, deposit, etc. 

‘M. Heidenhain protests against a conception 
of life of one structure which is only borrowed of 
some other structure and he very properly remarks 
that according to the true conception of life, live 
matter must be something always active, preserv¬ 
ing its own structure by its own efforts or function, 
and not by the functions of another structure. 
Hence Heidenhain speaks of the automatism of 
life. Some of the intercellular substance of the 
body is, as we all know, composed of ordinary 
chemical matter, and this of course is not live sub¬ 
stance. But wherever we find an intercellular 
substance, capable of true nutritional changes, we 
must be dealing with live, assimilating and repro¬ 
ducing ferment granules. This, of course, opens 
up an entirely new field and points out the fact 
that a large part of the body of multicellular 
beings is composed of live substance not present 
in the form of cells, but in the shape of elementary 
units existing in the body independently of the cell 
organization. 

“If one views critically what has been hereto¬ 
fore taught about the nature of the enzymes, the 
so-called soluble, unorganized ferments, one is 
compelled to confess that those bodies, non-organ- 
ized as they have been supposed to be, are chemi¬ 
cal compounds which do not follow the elemen¬ 
tary laws of physics and chemistry, bodies which 
are not bound and regulated in their action by the 
laws of the conservation and correlation of energy, 


202 The Millennium and Medical Science 


as laid down by Robert Mayer, Helmholtz and 
Joule. 

“I will endeavor to show in this article, by a 
series of experiments conducted on a chemical 
and mainly on a bacteriological basis, that malt 
diatase and ptyalin are by no means unorganized 
dead bodies, but consist of exceedingly small 
round granules, which grow and multiply in the 
proper nutritive soils, not only in the grain of malt 
and in the alveolar secretory cells of the salivary 
glands, but also in artificial soils, kept in the 
incubator, and which form, in the presence of 
starch, dextrins and sugar as products of their 
metabolism. 

“It has been taught heretofore that the action 
of the enzymes in general and the amylolytic 
action of diatase and ptyalin in special is to be 
looked upon as a catalytic process. 

“By catalysis, contact, or cyclical action, is to be 
understood a class of chemical changes that are 
induced in certain chemical compounds or agents 
by a substance which does not itself undergo any 
permanent alteration, but whose presence under 
suitable conditions brings about a rearrangement 
among the molecules of the bodies with which it 
is placed in contact. The material acting in this 
manner without apparently being affected itself 
by the changes it induces, has been termed a 
catalytic or contact agent. 

‘We know a large number of catalytic proc¬ 
esses, the purely nonanimated chemical nature of 
which is beyond any doubt at all. The con¬ 
version of saccharose (cane-sugar) by dilute acids 
into invert sugar (glucose levulose); the con¬ 
version of the glucosids by dilute acids into glu¬ 
cose and another body or bodies, depending upon 
the special glucosid; the process of converting 
starch into dextrin and sugar by dilute acids at 
high temperatures are examples of such catalytic 
processes. 

“In the process of converting starch into dex- 


Versed Opinions 


203 


trins and sugar through the medium of the cata¬ 
lytic action of dilute acids a great number of 
caloric units are needed to bring about this chemi¬ 
cal change. In other words, we have a conversion of 
kinetic energy (heat) into potential energy which 
is stored up in the products (dextrin and sugar) 
of this catalytic process. 

“On the other hand, if we convert starch into 
dextrins and sugar by the action of an amylolytic 
ferment latent heat becomes free or we have a 
conversion of potential energy into kinetic energy. 

“From the facts collected from the writings of 
various investigators and from my own experi¬ 
ments reported in the first part of this paper, it 
appears that our conception, heretofore univer¬ 
sally held, as to the dead unorganized nature of the 
enzymes cannot be sustained, unless we admit that 
those enzymes are bodies not bound as to their 
mode of action by the fundamental laws of physics 
and chemistry; more especially not bound by the 
laws of the conservation and correlation of energy. 
In the second part of my paper I have undertaken 
to furnish the experimental evidence that the 
enzymes malt diastase and ptyalin are made up 
of exceedingly minute round corpuscles multiply¬ 
ing under suitable conditions, not only in the grain 
of malt and in the alveolar secretory salivary cells, 
but also outside of their natural abode under suit¬ 
able conditions, and producing in the presence of 
starch as products of their metabolism, dextrins 
and maltose. 

“This experimental evidence was furnished by 
propagation experiments of such kind as we gen¬ 
erally employed in bacteriological researches. In 
all these experiments the microscopic proof of the 
presence of the small ferment corpuscles, the size 
of which is very much inferior to that of any 
known microorganisms—was relegated to a sec¬ 
ondary position, while the main evidence of the 
multiplication and propagation of these cells 
from generation to generation was furnished by 


204 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the chemical proof of the presence of the well- 
known fermentation products of diastatic action 
upon starch; i.e., dextrins and maltose. 

“I have somewhere above expressed my belief 
in the identical nature of the diastase and ptyalin 
ferment corpuscles, a belief which in view of their 
identical chemical products under similar condi¬ 
tions seem to me to be fully justified. There are, 
however, some slight differences as to the action 
of the two enzymes diastase and ptyalin. The main 
difference is in the optimum temperature of their 
action, and there are probably also some slight 
differences as to favorable and inimical influences 
of some chemical agents increasing or hindering 
by their presence ‘ceteris paribus,’ the ferment 
action of the enzymes named, upon starch. These 
differences, I do not doubt, must be attributed to a 
variation in type between the ptyalin and diastase 
corpuscles. In view of the extreme minuteness of 
the ferment corpuscles, one is, of course, unable to 
state wherein this difference lies. Whatever may 
be the case, I think we have a right to assume that 
the ptyalin and the diastase corpuscles have a 
common progenitor, and that the differentiation 
manifesting itself in some slight distinguishing 
characters has been brought about in the course of 
time by the same factors that are responsible for 
the differentiation and development in the entire 
realm of organic life. If such a differentiation has 
been accomplished it is in itself a proof that those 
corpuscles, extremely minute and simple as they 
are, possess individual variability as well as any 
higher organism. It seems to me important to lay 
great stress upon this point. 

“The above quotations demonstrate how keenly 
it has been felt that the cell could not be the ul¬ 
timate morphological or physiological unit and 
that there must be something very much simpler 
than a cell, something possessing the powers of 
assimilation, growth, development, and multipli¬ 
cation. 


Versed Opinions 


205 


“I am convinced, as stated before, that the ptya- 
lin and diastase ferment corpuscles are a true type 
of the elementary corpuscles looked for; and if it 
be true as Pasteur claimed years ago, that every 
vital process is one of fermentation, then it is to 
be assumed that each and every one of the differ¬ 
ent species of elementary corpuscles is a ferment 
cell like the diastase and ptyalin cells with very 
definite fermentation products as the consequence 
of its metabolism. Under this assumption and 
with our knowledge of the influence of the accumu¬ 
lation of the fermentation products upon the 
further development and propagation of ferment 
organisms and enzymes, many phenomena of cell 
life heretofore observed but not clearly understood 
would be brought nearer to our conception. 

“While the phenomena of heredity have forced 
such men as Darwin, Spencer, Naegeli, and others 
to assume the existence of minute corpuscles 
capable of multiplying in the cell, the demonstra¬ 
tion of the existence of the character of such cor¬ 
puscles as ferment corpuscles will bring many 
phenomena of heredity within the reach of a per¬ 
fect understanding. 

“I have already stated my belief that the ptyalin 
and diastase ferment granules possess individual 
variability and I have made some few experi¬ 
ments, not reported in this paper, which seem to 
indicate that the ptyalin ferment granules may be 
adapted to new optimum temperatures just as bac¬ 
teria can be adapted in this manner. If this can 
be demonstrated satisfactorily, then there cannot 
be any doubt that the ferment granules do possess 
individual variability which, in the struggle for 
existence under altered conditions, must bring 
about the survival of the fittest and the fixation of 
a variety more or less different from its ancestral 
progenitors. This being the case we can under¬ 
stand why the ferment granules of one being 
should be, and must, to a certain degree, be dif¬ 
ferent from the ferment granules of another being 


206 The Millennium and Medical Science 


of the same species, and as the germinal cells, 
respectively the ovum and the spermatozoa, derive 
their ferment granules from their parental organ¬ 
ism or organisms, the fact that the offspring in¬ 
herits the parental morphological and physiologi¬ 
cal properties even to the extent of characters of 
individual variability can be traced back to the 
difference in character of these ferment granules, 
acquired under varied conditions and fixed by the 
general laws of organic development. 

“The question may be asked right here whether 
the ovum and the spermatozoa do possess all the 
ferment granules of the parental organism. If the 
ovum is to mature outside of the maternal organ¬ 
ism such must be the case, lest the conditions of 
the existence of the embryo permit of the acquisi¬ 
tion of certain ferment cells, necessary to its full 
development by symbiotic additions from the out¬ 
side. If, however, the embryo matures in the ma¬ 
ternal body there is no absolute necessity why the 
ovum should possess all ferment cells necessary 
to the organism postpartum. The embryo develop¬ 
ing in the maternal organism may through the 
placental circulation be supplied with a number 
of species of ferment granules necessary to it in 
its after life, but not present in the ovum. 

“We know that certain infectious diseases, such 
as small-pox, in the human race, may be trans¬ 
mitted intra utero from the mother to the off¬ 
spring. And as Virchow has shown that all patho¬ 
logical processes have their physiological analoga, 
it is reasonable to assume that the intra uterine 
infection from mother to embryo, by a pathologi¬ 
cal ferment corpuscle, through the placental cir¬ 
culation, shows us what also occurs physiologically 
with reference to the ferment granules necessary 
to build up the complete mature embryo. As far 
as the ptyalin corpuscles are concerned there 
would be no difficulty in assuming this, since we 
know that a number of fluids of the animal body, 
among which is the blood of higher races, possess 


Versed Opinions 


207 


slight diastatic properties doubtless depending 
upon the presence of ptyalin granules.” 

All of the foregoing paragraphs, in this chapter, 
are expressions of opinions which may seem un¬ 
important, to some, relative to our subject, but 
when considered in the light of coming events, 
which will surely follow,—those inventions and 
discoveries of the future generations—they are in¬ 
deed important; they give to us the courage neces¬ 
sary, when delving into new fields of work whose 
virgin soils have been unmolested and undisturbed 
in their existence of seemingly quiet innocence and 
apparent defiance of investigation. 

In the above work (by Dr. Herzog) may be 
seen,—only a few pages being taken from the 
monograph; a research work on Endocrinology, 
begun about thirty years ago, by a seeker after 
truth who is now dead and apparently forgotten— 
the epic of a quiet and studious man, who by the 
vastness of his vision and tendency towards a 
creative genius, stood in his day among even the 
most brilliant of minds. 

The child is excellent raw material for the 
making of the scientist. First of all, he is curiosity 
incarnate; he does not confine his attentions to 
those matters which adults consider practical, but 
tries to learn all he can about an environment 
which he finds brimming with interest. Moreover, 
he is an experimentalist, and the days are too short 
for the experiments he wishes to perform upon 
everything at hand, from the bric-a-brac to the 
patience of his elders. He relies upon experiment 
rather than upon authority for learning the truth. 
Authoritative representations concerning the fra- 


208 The Millennium and Medical Science 

gile quality of glass, the taste of pepper or the 
temptations of a stove to him are but suggestions 
for experiments. Although his experimental tech¬ 
nique is simple, and his capacity for reasoning and 
theorizing undeveloped, he has made a splendid 
beginning towards a scientific career. At the age 
of seven he will ask: “Papa, who hangs the ‘moon’ 
out every night,” and, “Mamma, where did our new 
baby come from,” and—when seeing a cemetery 
and having been informed that the many tomb¬ 
stones signify that some one lies buried there— 
“Where do people go when they die?” In his 
further development, however, he meets with 
opposition at every turn. Many of his experiments 
earn punishment from his parents, who discourage 
his curiosity and even pervert the truth for their 
own ends. At school, book-learning is substituted 
for observation and experiment, and even when 
the topic is nature or science, it is often taught in 
a very didactic way by a teacher who,—though 
having taken many courses in pedagogy—may 
have but little appreciation of the spirit and 
method of science. At Sunday school he is likely 
to find a teacher who praises as religious virtue 
the docile acceptance of dogmatic authority and 
to whom the term “doubt” is one of opprobrium. 
The repressive progress, alas does not end here, 
for we in the university who next take him in hand 
delight in giving him the impression that the sub¬ 
ject has been thoroughly elucidated. We take 
little pains to help him to realize the existence of 
vast fields awaiting exploration. 


CONCLUSIONS 


THE SUMMARY 

OF 

CONVICTIONS FROM INFERENCE 

“It matters not how a man dies, but 
how he lives”—and—“As a man ad¬ 
vances in life, he gets what is better 
than admiration,—judgment, to esti¬ 
mate things at their true value.” 

— Dr. Johnson. 

I N the concise deductions which follow we will 
* find much evidence resembling a vast mass of 
foliage in a great forest supported by giant tree- 
trunks; this is the inevitable subsequent growth, 
in the actual triumphs and defeats of man in his 
study of medicine,—it does not represent, however, 
the thoughts, the voice, and the work of any one 
man, nor the teaching of the mugwump or bigot 
or other bias natures—it truly represents our only 
protection to man during his illness, which has the 
substantial characteristics of honest endeavor from 
a practical and scientific view, and is truly the 
result of the work of many men of many minds, 
and rests on the firm basis of several hundred 
years of study; first, the classical and literary or 
academic teachings; second, the practical experi¬ 
ence at the bedside in the home and hospital; third, 
209 


14 



210 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the technical and research work in the laboratory. 

In our every day walk of life, as we associate 
with our fellow men, we are impressed by the fact 
that no two individuals are just exactly alike. The 
more we travel over the face of mother earth, the 
more we come to realize the truth, that all men 
differ greatly in their make-up, including first, the 
face, stature, contour, and complexion; second, the 
predisposition and individual disposition to dis¬ 
ease, or in other words, hereditary or acquired 
immunities and susceptibilities in health and dis¬ 
ease during life; third, the qualifications possessed 
by every individual to a marked degree, known as, 
courage, or cowardice, violent temper or pensive 
calm, a worker and builder, or a sluggard and 
destroyer; fourth, those natural or acquired traits 
of the unfortunates who eventually become the 
common thief, the money counterfeiter, the forger 
and other types of so-called crooks; fifth, the per¬ 
sonalities or individualities of those who become 
great leaders of men, in times of peace, as well as 
in times of war, captains of industry and com¬ 
merce, artists and artisans such as, painters, sculp¬ 
tors, singers, actors, and expert mechanicians; 
also physicians and surgeons, attorneys, orators 
and others. 

It is impossible to say just what part the 
mental, physical and educational qualifications 
play in any of the above specified individuals. We 
know that many men who have been honored,— 
presidents of countries and others who have at¬ 
tained high positions in life,—have spent the 
greater part of their lives on the farm. Great 
singers and other artists have originally come from 


The Summary of Convictions From Inference 211 

among the peasant life or from poor families who 
lived in poverty, perhaps in the crowded quarters 
of a great city. We know the great Napoleon 
Bonaparte was handicapped in the beginning of 
life, he was poor in cash, with no property, real 
or personal, not of royal blood, nor of a great 
family; had little education, with no inclination to 
learn in youth, was not a giant of physical strength 
and yet according to history, no man has succeeded 
him (in accomplishment) up-to-date, inasmuch, 
that nowhere do we find a similar record equal to 
that of the little Corsican; where a man has ac¬ 
complished great tasks under extraordinary cir¬ 
cumstances and the existing conditions of the 
times. In this respect, it would be well to reflect 
upon the fact that many of the men who have been 
elected to the office of President of the great United 
States and commander-in-chief of the Army and 
Navy of an undefeated country, have been self- 
educated and self-made men. 

Surely there must be “something,” far beyond 
the recognition (by the mental capacity) of man, 
(it is quite possible that this “something” is con¬ 
tained in the so-called “regulators of mankind,” 
so-called by the scientific men of today) which 
controls the several characteristics of every in¬ 
dividual; for instance, why should one individual 
have bright red hair, another jet black hair, an¬ 
other, golden hair? The same question may be 
asked relative to the color of the eyes of the 
human; and, why have we five distinctly different 
races of man, with skins of different color? In 
every instance the “race” of the individual must be 
taken into consideration when we “think” in terms 


212 The Millennium and Medical Science 

of “social welfare,” or “act,” in way of purpose 
“physically,” relative to the “susceptibility” and 
“immunity” to disease; these qualitative virtues 
being possessed by the individual or absent, as the 
case may be, and in accordance with the nature 
and characteristics of the individual, as well as the 
“race.” It is true we have the “law of heredity” 
but, what great unseen power or empire was the 
original “appropriator by aggregation” which now 
“dominates” this law; by first, gathering together 
these several characteristics (of a father, a mother, 
or one of their relatives); and second, the arrange¬ 
ment of these characteristics in order, so that each 
may carry out its own instructions, without in¬ 
fringement on or interference with the others, in 
the performance of its function; third, the process 
of accumulation, of all these characteristics, in so 
minute a thing as possessed by a microscopic ani¬ 
malcule (in the spermatozoa, the ovum, or both), 
which eventually culminate in the production of 
the new-born. This power or empire of domina¬ 
tion must hold true in all nature’s handiwork 
throughout all organic life. 

It must be understood by the reader that in the 
few pages which follow, containing the conclu¬ 
sions, it was necessary that the several subjects 
involved be concisely treated and reasonably epi- 
tomical in character, as each subject truly repre¬ 
sents hundreds of years of study and thousands of 
written works, and therefore a difficult matter to 
clearly explain in just a few words. 


CHAPTER XIV 


CONCLUSIONS TO PART ONE 

“A child should not be discouraged 
from reading anything that he takes a 
liking to, from a notion that it is above 
his reach. If that be the case, the 
child will soon find it out, and desist.” 

— Dr. Johnson. 

Biological Physiology :— 

Of all our studies relative to the actual exist¬ 
ence of material things, together with their true 
nature and worth,—especially “man” and his con¬ 
temporaries, the necessary environments and con¬ 
stant associations—the subjects, Biology and Phys¬ 
iology, are perhaps of primary importance; their 
far reaching ramifications into allied subjects and 
the fact that they involve, in their ramose nature 
the fundamental essentials of life and function, 
each dependent upon the other and the knowledge 
which demonstrates the impossibility of one exist¬ 
ing without the other, give us reason to assign to 
them a place of great significance and much con¬ 
sequence. 

The biological term, “Biogenesis,” (being a 
combination from the Greek words, meaning life, 
generation, birth) is used to demonstrate the 
theory that, each living organism, no matter how 
simple or great, arises by a process of either bud¬ 
ding, fission, spore-formation or sexual reproduc¬ 
tion from a parent organism. There is no biologi- 
213 


214 The Millennium and Medical Science 

cal generalization which rests upon any wider 
series of observations, or has been subjected to a 
more critical scrutiny than that which proves that 
every living organism has come into existence 
from a living portion, portions or parts of a pre¬ 
existing organism. It is within common observa¬ 
tion that parent and offspring are (more or less, 
sometimes to a marked degree) much alike; the 
new organism resembling that from which it has 
come into existence, in some form or another; 
every organism taking origin from a parent or¬ 
ganism of the same kind. The normal life-cycle 
of both plants and animals exhibits what is known 
as alternation of generations, so that any indi¬ 
vidual in the chain may resemble its grand-parent 
and its grand-child, and at the same time, differ 
markedly from its parent and child. As a contrast 
to the above, it may be said, that there have been 
(from time to time) some observers who contend 
and maintain a belief in an opposite theory, to 
which the name “heterogenesis” has been given; 
according to the theory, the offspring of a given 
organism may be utterly different from itself so 
that a known animal may give rise to another 
known animal of a different race, species, genus, 
or even family, to a plant, or vice versa. No seri¬ 
ous observer, acquainted with the modern techni¬ 
cal methods, in microscopy and research work, 
has been able to confirm the explanation of these 
observations as given by the few believers in the 
“heterogenesis” theory. 

The biological sciences are those which deal 
with the phenomena manifested by living matters; 
and though it is customary and convenient to group 


Conclusions to Part One 


215 


apart such of these phenomena as are termed 
mental, and such of them as are exhibited by men 
in society, under the heads of psychology and 
sociology, yet it must be allowed that no natural 
boundary separates the subject matter of the 
latter sciences from that of biology. Psychology is 
inseparably linked with physiology; and the 
phases of social life exhibited by animals other 
than man, which sometimes curiously foreshadow 
human policy, fall strictly within the province of 
the biologist. 

It may therefore be seen that “life” is the ap¬ 
parent “activity peculiar to protoplasm,” this 
“activity” being known as “physiology” of the or¬ 
ganism, be it of the so-called unit or composite 
type. Physiology deals specifically with function, 
including its properties and processes; but the 
unknown “stimuli” which produce primarily 
either the “protoplasm” that takes on secondarily 
its “function,” or the unknown “stimuli” which 
produce primarily the “function” that creates 
secondarily the “protoplasm,” are the enigmatical 
phenomena, pertaining to the origin of “life.” 
Therefore, it is quite plain that we cannot discuss 
adequately the origin of “life” or the construction 
of living matter (its initial source of properties and 
processes) until the chemistry of the “protoplasm” 
and especially of the proteids is more advanced. 
A living organism usually displays an active me¬ 
tabolism of proteids (perhaps other properties and 
processes); this metabolism may slow down, at 
times actually cease, and yet reawaken; a dead 
organism is one in which the metabolism has 
ceased and cannot or does not reawaken. The 


216 The Millennium and Medical Science 

categories, “alive” and “dead” are not sufficiently 
distinct for us to add to our present conception of 
“life” by comparing them. The “laws of nature” 
which are not only imperative to the human 
understanding, but also essential to the physical 
well-being and which must, therefore, receive due 
recognition, are as follows: 

First, all living things, be they of the animal or 
vegetable kingdom, are by natural consequences 
victims of their environment, to a greater or lesser 
extent; it little matters should they live in the air 
above us, in the water or earth beneath us, or on 
the earth’s surface with us. All are governed by 
certain factors pertaining to its nature, the primary 
factor being “the survival of the fittest,” and all 
things that do not measure up to this requirement 
must either degenerate or become extinct. The 
next factor in order would seem to be the “con¬ 
formation to accommodation,” in which all living 
things have a tendency to acclimate themselves to 
any and all conditions. As a consequence of these 
two factors, a third factor, “the process of evolu¬ 
tion” plays its part, wherein are found the change 
of living things, in size, color, form and character. 

Second, all reproduction of life is the result of 
cell multiplication, through a process of cell- 
formation or cell-division; there being two 
methods, one known as mitosis, karyokinesis or 
indirect cell-division generally found in the 
human, the other being known as amomitosis or 
direct cell-division which is confined mostly to the 
lower animals. The important factors in cell- 
division consist of chromatin, chromosomes, poles, 
spindles, skeins and diasters, involved in their sev- 


Conclusions to Part One 


217 


eral stages, to-wit: the increase of chromatin to 
make chromosomes, followed by chromosome¬ 
splitting; then convolution and aggregation of 
poles, spindles and skeins, followed by cleavage 
and migration of the segments, terminating in the 
formation of double diasters, with the ultimate 
production of another cell. 

As a consequence of these “laws of nature,” 
and when we consider “biogenesis” (the doctrine 
that life is generated from living things or beings 
only) and then “bionomy” (the science of the laws 
of living functions), also “biology” (the study of 
life or living organisms), as compared with the 
“biochemical” and “physio-chemical” basis of 
physiological process, the question arises, are these 
so-called “granules” or “minute bodies” truly 
“alive,” or do they merely control the life produc¬ 
ing phenomena by a far-reaching and many¬ 
angled secret power of primary “amalgamation,” 
with a secondary “fission” and a tertiary “fusion?” 
It is now generally accepted as actual facts that: 
first, these “granules” (known as microsomes or 
chromatin), are really contained within all cell 
life; second, that cell life is essential to make up 
all organs; third, that many organs are necessary 
in the constitution of a normal human being. 

Bacteriology :— 

The conclusive evidence of the actual existence 
of bacterial life—disease producing and non-dis¬ 
ease producing forms—may be stated in these in¬ 
disputable terms which follow, being accepted as 
authentic, by all institutions of learning the world 
over. Up-to-date no contradictions or contentions 
of these facts have come to light. About the year 


218 The Millennium and Medical Science 

of 1865, Pasteur proved the inconsistency of the 
spontaneous generation theory; about the same 
time and later, other scientific men proved to the 
world and their own satisfaction that the spon¬ 
taneous generation theory was a myth, and the 
question was settled for all time; between the 
years of 1876 and 1882, Robert Koch added much 
to this study. 

While there are many reasons to believe that 
the theory of microorganisms existed in the mind 
of man, even before the year of our “Lord,” the 
science of “Bacteriology” did not make much 
progress until after the year of 1885; then it went 
forward in leaps and bounds. The all important 
point of this study is to show and prove beyond 
a doubt, how these bacteria cause disease and pro¬ 
duce pathological conditions. This has been done. 
Many men have contributed to this work, but to 
Pasteur and Robert Koch, whose fundamental 
work on the studies of pathogenic microorganisms 
in general and some disease producing types of 
bacteria in particular, the science owes much. To¬ 
day “Bacteriology” has assumed a place of great 
importance and receives much consideration in 
the general practice of medicine. 

In the question of the non-pathological, the 
pathological, and the normal or essential micro¬ 
organisms, under the study of bacteriology, there 
are many preliminary points to be mentioned. 
First, some form or other of bacteria are found, 
on land or in water, in all parts of the world; 
therefore we say, bacteria are ubiquitous which 
means everywhere because they are found in soil, 
water, air, and on plants and animals, alive or 


Conclusions to Part One 


219 


dead. (It may be truthfully said, wherever we 
find organic matter we find some form of bac¬ 
teria.) Second, there are now recognized three 
principal groups of bacteria; some of which are 
harmless and apparently non-essential; some of 
which are harmless and essential to life; and some 
of which are disease producing, therefore, detri¬ 
mental and non-essential to life. 

We do not know where or when the first ar¬ 
rivals of the bacterial family happened along, they 
do exist and they are here, that we know, there¬ 
fore, we must make the best of the situation and 
vie with their existence. Today we say, Bacteria 
are unicellular and asexual in nature. It is quite 
possible that the future in its scientific research 
may change this and revise both the terms, uni¬ 
cellular and asexual. In justice of entering this 
broad statement, let it be understood; in most all 
bacteria we find a large amount of microscopic 
‘‘granules” or “minute bodies,” which seem to play 
a part in the reproduction process, but just what 
are the functions of these “granules” or “minute 
bodies” we are at a loss to determine at the present 
day. It is quite possible that these “granules” may 
prove to be of some significance relative to the 
hormones, enzymes or ferments contained in the 
internal secretions of the ductless glands. In 
other words, science may bring forth in the future 
a new study, in which it will be found, first, that 
bacteria are reproduced by a process of absorp¬ 
tion or osmosis, the mode of procedure being 
something on the following order: a primary 
change produced in the “granules” of cell-life 
(microsomes or chromatins) in the different or- 


220 The Millennium and Medical Science 

gans of the human, by the antagonistic chemical 
substance contained in the “granules” of the in¬ 
vading bacteria (when any infection takes place), 
when these two primary factors or elements are 
brought in contact with each other, the “granules” 
of the cell being appropriated after this change 
takes place, by the bacteria; second, through some 
unknown process, yet to be discovered, the “gran¬ 
ules” produced in the different glands of the body 
and carried by the internal secretions in to the 
blood-stream, may be the supremely eminent 
power or predominant factor, in the bringing 
about of this primary change; a possible relation 
to the factors of “immunity and susceptibility.” 

We have said that bacteria are ubiquitous 
(found everywhere). A little study of the subject, 
Bacteriology, will perhaps remind us of an all- 
powerful and unavoidable means of meting out 
a just punishment for our several so-called sins 
or social misconduct. We may evade the law of 
man, but the law of nature never. It is quite 
possible that these insignificant microorganisms 
will play their part of domination in the life of 
man until the arrival of the time when all men 
will admit the superiority of bacteria and the in¬ 
feriority of man. Then all men as a unit will 
strive to conquer Bacteria. When civilization has 
reached that stage where it can devise the ways 
and means to eliminate or control these micro¬ 
organisms it will surely be the one great achieve¬ 
ment which will make for the amelioration of 
nearly all disease or pathology. In other words, 
there are those people who will “pooh-pooh” the 
idea that microorganisms are disease-producing- 


Conclusions to Part One 


221 


factors. In these cases the different types of micro¬ 
organisms are permitted to continue their destruc¬ 
tive processes, from the different angles, thereby 
getting the upper-hand. As a consequence, every 
now and then, we have practical demonstrations 
of man’s inferiority to cope with the army of in¬ 
vasion in its aggressive onslaught of humanity, 
manifesting the evident superiority of certain 
types of bacteria in the form of epidemics. When 
the human family, the world over, comes to know 
and will recognize the true significance of the part 
played by microorganisms in the production of 
disease, then, and only then, can we expect to 
make any efficient steps towards the conquering of 
man’s great enemy, disease. 

Pathology :— 

It must be understood at the beginning of our 
conclusion that, disease is not a thing of a spon¬ 
taneous or instantaneous nature, but a process 
which may be localized or general in the system 
of the human being and always resulting from 
various causes, many of which are known and 
some unknown to medical science. It is the con¬ 
sensus of opinion by most recognized authorities, 
on the subjects of physiology, bacteriology and 
pathology, that it is almost impossible to draw a 
hard and fast line between any of the three sub¬ 
jects, for instance, it is a difficult matter to say in 
any disease which is caused by an infection or 
other processes, just where the physical function 
ends and where the pathogenic or production of 
disease process begins. Hence, we have today, the 
much advocated “preventive medicine treatment” 


222 The Millennium and Medical Science 

which virtually means, to seek and find if possible, 
all disease in its infancy or at its very beginning 
and prevent its continuance or spreading, thereby 
avoiding the possibility of involving any entire 
organ or, perhaps, the whole human system of 
body, and incidentally this would aid materially 
in the checking of epidemics in their various forms 
and degrees. It would seem then, that a prerequi¬ 
site of the successful study of pathology (the 
science whicli treats of disease) would necessarily 
depend to a great extent, upon a comprehensive 
knowledge of normal anatomy and normal physi¬ 
ology, together with physiological chemistry and 
bacteriology, these studies would consequently 
take into consideration, “Endocrinology.” As 
medical science has conquered to a great extent 
such diseases as small-pox, lock-jaw, diphtheria 
and typhoid fever, so must it continue to combat 
all other ailments of the human family. 

The term “pathology,” by itself is usually ap¬ 
plied to humans, animals and plant-life; it is from 
the Greek word, suffering, and is accepted gener¬ 
ally as meaning, the science dealing with the 
theory of causation or nature of disease processes. 
Progress in the study of “pathology” has been 
greatly facilitated by the introduction, in recent 
years, of the many improved methods of tech¬ 
nique. The complexity and mystery of action, in¬ 
herent in living matter, have, probably, been ac¬ 
countable for much of the vague philosophy of dis¬ 
ease in the past, and have furnished one reason at 
least why “pathology” has been so long in assert¬ 
ing its independence as a science. The eloquence 
of fact appeals to the scientific mind of today 


Conclusions to Part One 


223 


much more than the mere assertion of the crude 
and unproven principles of yesterday. 

As a consequence of the admission, by all the 
leading institutions of learning in the world, that 
“pathology” is the science of disease in all its 
manifestations, whether structural or functional, 
progressive or regressive, local or general, bac¬ 
terial or chemical, we may add: since “pathology” 
is the science of disease, we are met at the very 
threshold by the question: What is disease? This 
may best be answered by defining what we under¬ 
stand by health. What do we mean when we talk 
of a healthy organism or an individual? Our 
ideas on the subject are purely arbitrary, and de¬ 
pend upon our everyday experience. Health is 
simply that condition of “structure and function” 
which, on examination of a sufficient number of 
examples, we find to be commonest. The term in 
fact, has the same significance as “the normal.” 
Disease we may define, accordingly, as “any de¬ 
parture” from the “normal standard” of “struc¬ 
ture or function” of a “tissue or organ” and con¬ 
sequently, the “individual.” 

In times past it has been the habit to look upon 
such subjects as, anatomy, physiology, bacteriology 
and pathology, as something tagged on to the 
“treatment” of human disease, but unworthy of 
being studied independently as branches of knowl¬ 
edge. Such a view can recommend itself to only 
the narrowest of minds. 

We now know that our forefathers, if one may 
venture to criticize their earnest endeavors, were 
indeed too impatient, and were greatly handi¬ 
capped by the lack of knowledge. Influenced as 


224 The Millennium and Medical Science 


they were by the prevailing philosophy of their 
day, they endeavored from time to time to 
interpret and reduce the study of disease to 
philosophical order when the very elements of 
philosophical order were wanting. Those who 
study the subject of pathology have come to realize 
that they must labor and await developments; it is 
largely to these measures and researches that we 
owe much, relative to our present knowledge. 

Immunity and Susceptibility:— 

Many years ago there appeared a powerful 
factor in the life of man. It became quite evident 
that man must use every effort to free himself of 
all disease and that his general physical condition 
be kept in a normal state of good health. This 
is necessary to his progress and success in every¬ 
day life. As man’s intelligence has evolved through 
years of experience and experiments, also have the 
methods in treatment of disease undergone a cor¬ 
responding evolution in the practice of medicine 
and surgery. In connection with this subject the 
author will venture a bold prediction, to-wit: all 
future study of “Immunity and Susceptibility” will 
eventually hinge, secondarily, upon the properties 
of the contents of the blood-stream, and, prima¬ 
rily, upon the component factors which produce 
these contents, containing therein the lack of or 
a goodly supply of the properties of either, a 
good “Immunity” against disease or a “Sus¬ 
ceptibility” to acquire any disease condition. 
This will hold true not only from a patho¬ 
logical standpoint, but includes all the actual re¬ 
lations of the characters in the offspring to the 


Conclusions to Part One 


225 


characters of the parents and ancestors. In this 
broad sense there is no character that is not trans¬ 
missible. These are being collected and grouped 
as follows: character of class, family, genus, 
species, race, and of the actual individual; in¬ 
corporated therein are found, in many instances, 
the transmitted anatomical or physiological char¬ 
acters down to the most minute detail, as well as 
such phenomena as diatheses (a congenital or ac¬ 
quired predisposition to any particular or special 
disease), gaucherie (awkwardness or clumsiness), 
and psychological (good, poor or depraved men¬ 
tality) ; also the teratological (abnormal growths, 
deformities, monstrosities), in minor cases of 
syndactylism (fused toes or fingers, so-called 
webbed fingers or webbed foot), and extreme 
cases of individual variations. 

The term, Heredity, its full meaning and wide 
scope, surely covers a vast field of contentions and 
complexities, involving the many pros and cons of 
argument. However, from the medical standpoint, 
heredity may be defined as the transmission of 
physical or mental qualities, including susceptibili¬ 
ties and immunities in health and disease, from 
parent to offspring, or the tendency manifested 
by any organism in the human body, in part or as 
a whole, on the part of any individual, to develop, 
in the likeness of a progenitor. Observation 
demonstrates—as a rule, in accordance with the 
several laws of mankind and his several stages of 
developmental progress morally, physically and 
mentally to-wit: the hereditary tendencies law, the 
survival of the fittest law, and the self-preservation 
law during “actual life” as well as the unknown 

15 


226 The Millennium and Medical Science 

law or power which produces the desire to repro¬ 
duce our kind, preserving life in its beginning even 
before “actual life” takes place as an individual, 
in our outer world of life; the natural organic 
“tendency law” of life or the preeminent “law of 
disposition” to preserve life in its predestination, 
—that there is very little blemish in nature, except 
as a result of ignorance on the part of man or 
from the perverted thinking of the abnormal 
mental capacity of the human mind. Therefore, 
it may be said, through the ages of the past, there 
has been handed down, unknowingly, from father 
to son, much disease due to ignorance and per¬ 
version. 

In the branch of bionomics, however, concerned 
with the laws of variation and heredity—the study 
known as thrematology—there has been consider¬ 
able progress. In the first place, the continued 
study of human population has thrown additional 
light on some of the questions involved, whilst the 
progress of microscopical research has given us a 
clear foundation as to the structural facts con¬ 
nected with the origin of the egg-cell (ovum) and 
the sperm-cell (spermatozoa) and the general 
fundamentals of fertilization and reproduction. 

As to the importance of the transmission of 
disease from parent to the offspring, it is known 
that at least three sets of factors may operate and 
should be taken into account as follows: first, a 
child may inherit the anatomical and physiologi¬ 
cal constitution of either parent, and with that a 
special liability of failure to resist the attacks of a 
wide spread disease; second, the actual funda¬ 
mentals of detrimental bacteria may be contained 


Conclusions to Part One 


227 


in the ovum or possibly in the spermatozoa, or the 
actual attack of certain microorganisms may have 
effected or affected these elements materially; 
third, any one of the several toxins as found in 
disease (in the parent) may have affected either 
the spermatozoa or the ovum in the first instance 
(before conception takes place), or in the second 
instance may affect the child, any time after con¬ 
ception, through the blood-stream of the mother. 

When we speak of the immunity from a disease, 
or the susceptibility to a disease, and the relation 
of the individual to any kind of an infectious 
disease, and then apply either of these prevailing 
conditions or peculiarities to the existing circum¬ 
stances or conditions, known as, the attenuation or 
virulency of an infection which prevails at all 
times among the different forms of bacteria, 
thereby bringing together the intimate relation of 
these terms or conditions and their practical 
worth, it can be best explained as follows: 

Mr. A. B. catches a “cold” and goes about his 
business as usual (it is a touch of pneumonia, but 
he does not know it) he being one of the indi¬ 
viduals who has a good immunity but is not aware 
of the fact, the infection (the attenuation not being 
extremely low nor the virulency exceedingly high) 
is one of the mediocre variety. A. B. feels badly 
for a few days but takes good care of himself, by 
doing as little work as possible, thereby resting 
himself physically and mentally and by eating 
very little, but of nourishing food, he also rests 
the internal viscera; this method of avoiding all 
mental, muscular and visceral fatigue is in his 
favor; about the fourth day he remains home and 


228 The Millennium and Medical Science 


calls a doctor who informs him he has a mild 
attack of pneumonia. In a few weeks A. B. is well 
again and a month later is himself again. 

Here we must mention an important factor 
which generally plays a part in this kind of cases. 
Mr. A. B. is, as a rule, of the following type; a 
medium sized man who always enjoys good health, 
yet to all appearances he is not a Hercules nor 
what one would call the picture of robust health; 
this type of individual and his ability to enjoy 
good health throughout life, is due no doubt to the 
fact that he has always had a good immunity 
(natural immunity) and to the additional fact that 
he has always used good judgment, taking care of 
his health by avoiding all excessive pleasures and 
with no tendency toward dissipation. It will be 
noticed that, as a rule, those individuals who have, 
what might be termed, a general good immunity, 
have also, as a rule, a general good physical and 
mental capacity which lends to the exercising of 
good judgment in the way of right thinking and 
living, therefore tends as a whole to maintain a 
general good health; all seem to run hand in hand, 
as a cycle within a cycle (this type of individual, 
should he take up “Christian Science,” makes the 
ideal convert). 

We now return to our explanation. While Mr. 
A. B. was ill or had his “cold” and went about his 
business the first few days, he unknowingly trans¬ 
mitted it to Mr. C. D. who happens to be of the 
same type, character and calibre as A. B., and 
C. D. goes through or has practically the same 
experience as A. B. has had. While C. D. is going 
about his business the first few days of his illness, 


Conclusions to Part One 


229 


he unknowingly transmits it to E. F. and E. F. 
happens to be of the same type and character as 
A. B. and G. D.; so E. F. has practically the same 
experience as A. B. and C. D. 

If the same physician had attended all three 
of these patients he would have noticed that A. B. 
was really a sick man during his illness and that 
C. D. was not quite so sick as A. B. and that E. F. 
was not so badly off as either A. B. or C. D. and 
at no time of his (E. F.) illness was he in any great 
danger. This is explained by the fact that each 
one (A. B., G. D. and E. F.) having had a good 
immunity and therefore good resisting powers to 
this particular disease has during his illness low¬ 
ered the virulency of the microorganisms (which 
caused the disease) and if any (one or more) indi¬ 
viduals had contracted the infection from E. F. the 
microorganisms, in this particular instance, were 
so attenuated that those individuals, who con¬ 
tracted the infection from E. F. complained only 
of a bad “cold,” and none were so bad that it be¬ 
came necessary to consult a physician or go to bed. 
So is it demonstrated, the relation of the attenua¬ 
tion of microorganisms plays an important part in 
the immunity or the resistance to disease, or any 
bacterial infection. 

Again we may say (in a demonstration, as 
viewed from another angle, on the same subject) 
Mrs. X. Y. who has, unknowingly, no immunity 
but on the contrary a susceptibility to this same 
disease (pneumonia) and after contracting this in¬ 
fection in the same manner, a bad “cold,” becomes 
very ill. While Mrs. X. Y. is sick with the “cold” 
a friend, Mrs. W. pays her a visit and contracts the 


230 The Millennium and Medical Science 


disease; Mrs. W., after going through the prelimi¬ 
nary stages becomes very ill and while ill, her 
friend, Mrs. J. T., calls on Mrs. W. and Mrs. J. T. 
contracts the disease and becomes very ill. In 
these cases all three may die or Mrs. X. Y. may 
recover, but Mrs. W. and Mrs. J. T. usually become 
seriously ill and extremely low, if they recover at 
all; as a rule both (Mrs. W. and Mrs. J. T.) die. 
In this kind of cases the poor resistance or the 
lack of immunity on the part of the individual, in¬ 
creases the virulency of the microorganism and 
after this microorganism has passed through three 
or four stages of this tendency to increase its 
virulence, all who contract this infection, at this 
time, either die or are hit very hard by the infec¬ 
tion, and only those survive who have either, in 
the first instance, a “natural immunity” or in the 
second instance, the faculty of responding to a 
treatment which will give immunity. This group 
of microorganisms will continue to do great harm 
and cause many deaths until it meets and passes 
through several stages of the attenuating process, 
by infecting several individuals with exceptionally 
strong resisting power or very good immunities; as 
shown in the above hypothetical cases of Mr. A. B. 
and G. D. and E. F. It must be understood that 
other idiosyncracies, as well as infections by 
microorganisms, play their own peculiar parts, in 
all states of immunity and susceptibility, of every 
individual, in all conditions of disease. Here we 
have, to a marked degree, the explanation of the 
cause of epidemics, endemics and pandemics of 
disease; that is to say, how they begin or get 
started, and to stem the tide of spread, good medi- 


Conclusions to Part One 


231 


cal attention is of importance, to the extent of aid¬ 
ing each individual in the building up of an im¬ 
munity. 

Metabolism :— 

For practical purposes, the food and nutrition 
of man in health and disease, may be defined as 
that which, when taken into the body, may be 
utilized for the formation and repair of body 
tissue, and the production of energy. More 
specifically, food meets the requirements of the 
body in several ways. It is used for the forma¬ 
tions of the tissues, the fluids of the body, and for 
the restoration of losses of substance due to bodily 
activity. The edible material is by no means a 
simple substance, but consists mainly of water, 
and some or all of the compounds variously 
designated as food-stuffs, containing nutritive in¬ 
gredients or nutrients, together with the approxi¬ 
mate principles of their preparation, all of which 
are classified as proteins, fats, carbohydrates and 
mineral-matters, and all having various functions 
in the nourishment of the body. 

All branches of science agree relative to the 
recognition of the following: in all living matter 
there is a constant cycle of chemical changes going 
on, a constant breaking down (catabolism), and 
a correspondingly constant building up (anabol¬ 
ism). Unless the former is covered by the latter, 
wasting and finally death must supervene. These 
two changes together make up the “metabolism,” 
and the study of this involves a study of the fate 
of the food absorbed both when it is used im¬ 
mediately and after it has been stored in the tis¬ 
sues of the body. 


232 The Millennium and Medical Science 

With a little knowledge of the so-called 
carbohydrates, proteids and fats, their actual 
necessity in the sustenance of life in the human, 
of the right kind in quality and in proper amounts, 
any one of sane mind does not necessarily have 
to stretch the imagination very much nor draw 
upon the natural intuition to the extent of the 
breaking point, to visualize an individual case 
wherein are found any of the following; a condi¬ 
tion of “perverted function” or evidence of the loss 
of the “physiologic equilibrium” or symptoms of 
“faulty metabolism;” all of which are more or less 
synonymous terms and mean “interference with” 
or “disorder of” the “constructive and destructive 
process,” as well as the “reconstructive and second¬ 
ary destructive mechanism,” and the consequent 
redistribution of nutritive substances and the 
elimination of waste materials, in the system of 
the human economy. 

Elimination of waste-products is no doubt one 
of the most important points in regard to good 
health, and when this in interfered with by disease 
of the kidneys, the life of the patient is rendered 
more or less uncertain and the health frequently 
seriously impaired; this is also true relative to all 
elimination channels such as the skin and alimen¬ 
tary canal. In any case of altered function or any 
disease process, the intake and output of all food 
has an important part, sometimes reducing the 
quantity of one kind of food to a minimum is 
beneficial or essential, sometimes the patient is 
kept on an entirely liquid diet. 

Akin to this subject may be mentioned the term 
generally used to include all conditions in which 


Conclusions to Part One 


233 


the normal temperature of the animal body is 
markedly exceeded for any length of time, the so- 
called fever. Every rise of temperature is due to 
a disturbance in the heat-regulating mechanism. 
When the temperature is sufficiently elevated (of 
a fever), the heat has itself an injurious action on 
the protoplasm, and tends to increase disintegra¬ 
tion just as when heat elimination is experimen¬ 
tally retarded. In any pathological condition, the 
heat-regulating mechanism may be disturbed in 
three different ways; first, by mechanical interfer¬ 
ence with the nervous system; second, by interfer¬ 
ence with heat elimination; third, by the action of 
various toxins or poisons, of a bacterial or chemi¬ 
cal nature. In the beginning of a fever the activity 
of the metabolism is not increased to any marked 
extent, and any increase is necessarily largely due 
to the greater activity of the muscles of the heart 
and respiratory mechanism, and to the muscular 
contractions which produce the initial rigors. Thus 
the excretion of carbon dioxide—the great meas¬ 
ure of the activity of metabolism—is not usually 
increased, and there is no evidence of an increased 
combustion. In the later stages the increased tem¬ 
perature may bring about a change. 

There are limits of both heat and cold that a 
warm-blooded animal can bear, and other far 
wider limits that a cold-blooded animal may en¬ 
dure and yet live. The effect of too extreme a 
cold is to lessen metabolism, and hence to lessen 
the production of heat. Both catabolic and ana¬ 
bolic changes share in the depression, and though 
less energy is used up, still less energy is generated. 
This diminished metabolism tells first in the 


234 The Millennium and Medical Science 


central nervous system, especially the brain and 
those parts concerned in consciousness. Both 
heart-beat and respiration become diminished in 
numbers, drowsiness supervenes, becoming stead¬ 
ily deeper until it passes into the sleep of death. 


CHAPTER XV 


CONCLUSIONS TO PART TWO 


“Every man has a physical right to 
think as he pleases, for it cannot be 
discovered how he thinks. But, sir, no 
member of a society has a right to 
teach any doctrine contrary to what 
the society holds to be true.” 


Dr. Johnson . 


The Gland Operation:— 

NE of the old Greek philosophers said, “The 



first moment which gives us birth, begins to 
take life from us.” There is much logical signifi¬ 
cance in these words. Science is demonstrating this 
as a matter of fact, more and more every day. 
From the day we are born there begins a slow but 
positive and never ending process of construction 
and destruction of individual organs of the human 
being, which continues with a more or less ac¬ 
celerated action, taking place at different periods 
of life, depending upon the ability of the indi¬ 
vidual, to stem the tide of action by good and right 
living, thereby reducing to a minimum, in many 
instances, this destructive action process, retaining 
good health and warding off disease and old age, 
living and enjoying life, until we are eighty or 
ninety years of age or older. When we cannot or 
do not conform to the above, but live fast, many 
years in one; we speed up the action of this de¬ 
structive process, resulting in loss of youth, invalid¬ 
ism or early death. It must be understood, that 


235 


236 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the above statement does not apparently hold true 
as a whole;—in other words, the average normal 
individual (after eliminating hereditary or actual 
active disease processes) does not have destructive 
changes take place in every organ in the body at 
one and the same time, from the moment he or 
she is born—but each of our organs takes its turn, 
while we grow, from infancy to youth, from youth 
to manhood or womanhood and on to old age, re¬ 
sulting in an atrophy, shrinking, or worn out con¬ 
dition, any of which may be termed a “destructive 
process,” until finally the entire structure gives 
way under the pressure of use and exertion of a 
life time. All of this may be responsible for the 
statement, “the starting of life is the beginning of 
death.” 

In the so-called “interstitial gland transplanta¬ 
tion operation,” there are a great many direct facts 
bearing on the subject, which we know to be cor¬ 
rect and true. These have been explained to the 
best of our knowledge. There is, however, a great 
deal more to be learned relative to the indirect or 
apparent facts bearing on the subject; these we 
do not know to be correct and true, but we do 
know from the anatomical and physiological re¬ 
lations of all these glands that these indirect or 
apparent facts, as well as the direct or known 
facts, must be at all times remembered and given 
full consideration from every angle and view¬ 
point. The direct facts come to us from those 
ductless glands (the endocrine group as a whole) 
some of which we now know to be actually in¬ 
volved in the process of internal secretions and 
containing therein the (“minute bodies” or “gran- 


Conclusions to Part Two 237 

ules”) so-called “Hormones.” The indirect facts are 
the apparent evidence (which at times manifest 
themselves) involving the possibilities of associa¬ 
tion, amalgamation and co-ordination of these in¬ 
terstitial glands (and their internal secretions con¬ 
taining its hormones) with one or several or all of 
the other glands as known (and those at present 
unknown) in the chain of ductless and possibly 
other glands, found in the human. The big ques¬ 
tion here is, what is the one important thing con¬ 
necting the interstitial glands or other products, 
with these other endocrine glands or—what are 
the many materially essential factors, necessary in 
these other endocrine glands which in all proba¬ 
bility have an influence, primarily, on the function 
of the interstitial glands or gonads, and secondar¬ 
ily on the “products” of these (gonads) glands? 
In other words, what are the set of laws relative 
to these reproductive glands (the gonads and their 
secretions) and what system of rules or regula¬ 
tions are recognized by these glands (or the other 
glands in this group) and applied in nature’s laws 
and how are we to define them;—it being under¬ 
stood that, late discoveries in recent medical re¬ 
search work has demonstrated the presence, in the 
gonads (as well as in other organs), of antagonistic 
principles or factors (to some of the other glands 
or at times, to the normal functions of the other 
endocrine glands; these antagonistic principles or 
factors being, the possible “negative phase” of the 
“minute bodies” or “granules” or “hormones,” the 
so-called “inhibitors” or the elements which may 
possibly cause a “contrary action” working in an 
opposite direction or in an opposing manner, to 


238 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the harmonizing substances, and known as the 
“inhibitory action”) as well as harmonizing sub¬ 
stances or principles or factors—all being gov¬ 
erned, apparently, by this unknown law or the 
chemo-physiologic process, within the laws of 
biology or nature. Herein, no doubt, will be found 
the solution to the “starting of life,” and “main¬ 
tenance of youth and vigor,” and the “beginning 
of the end, death.” 

Organ Transplantation :— 

As to the transplantation of any and all human 
organs or organisms (including the gland trans¬ 
plantation operation)—the ways and means of in¬ 
troducing into the living human body, any organ 
or organism from any other living body, no mat¬ 
ter from what source obtained, with the expecta¬ 
tion that it will function, unaltered and normal, in 
its new environment—that process is far beyond 
all the powers of man’s ingenuity of today and re¬ 
mains to be revealed unto man of the future 
through research and science. There is much bone 
implantation work being done and some muscle 
tissue being transplanted, in the human of today, 
but even in these cases, the methods are far from 
perfection and the results not always the best. 
Skin grafting or transplanting has proved to be 
our most successful operation. 

A weekly Journal, devoted to the Advancement 
of Science, publishing the official notices and pro¬ 
ceedings of the “American Association for the Ad¬ 
vancement of Science,” in the issue of January 12, 
1923, under the heading of “Interesting develop¬ 
ments in science during the past year have oc- 


Conclusions to Part Two 


239 


curred in various fields of organized knowledge,” 
had this much to say relative to gland operation. 
“The use of glands and their aid in rejuvenation 
was the subject of experiment and discussion.” 
This appeared under a sub-heading “medicine.” 
The few words in this short report are concise and 
non-committal but are significant in their mean¬ 
ing; it is therefore self-evident that nothing of a 
material nature has been accomplished in this 
field, at least to date. 

While it may not seem so, it is never-the-less 
a fact that we must consider the blood stream as 
the most important factor together with the blood 
vessels, because the blood vessels are necessary to 
carry the blood, arterial, venous and lymph, in 
which are contained the hormones of the internal 
secretions. This may not appeal to the average 
individual as correct, but suppose we take this 
view of the matter. When a man wants to build 
a house the first thing he will do is to go to an 
architect to tell him in a general way the kind and 
style of house he wants. Then the man will look 
for a place to build the house, if he has not already 
selected a location. When the plans are drawn 
and approved, the house is put up and finished 
and the man moves into the house to live, and that 
ends the whole affair. At no time, even from the 
beginning, did that man give—for one moment— 
any thought to the most important part of the 
building of that house. He never said to himself, 
where is the material coming from, to build this 
house. Circumstances are such, at the present 
time, that we do not have to pay any attention to 
this part of the matter, at the same time the mate- 


240 The Millennium and Medical Science 

rial still remains the most important thing, for the 
simple reason, that without the material there 
would be no house of wood, brick, stone or any 
other kind constructed, yet these things were given 
little or no consideration. We are not now speak¬ 
ing of the construction of the house, but of the 
value of the importance of specific material for 
specific purposes, which is paramount to all other 
consideration. So while most of us would not 
think so, the blood stream is of great importance, 
first, as a common carrier, and second, because we 
see in all the ductless glands the especially large 
blood supply (the so-called “gross vascularity”) 
and third, the intimate relation of all the glands is 
made possible by the avenue of the blood stream. 
Taking the above into consideration it will elimi¬ 
nate all possibilities of our success in all trans¬ 
plantation operations as done by the present day 
methods, because there will not be any anastimosis, 
meaning, a joining together end to end of arteries 
or veins in such a way that the blood will flow 
through them so the blood stream would come in 
contact with the parenchyma of the gland (the 
working part or functional properties of any organ 
or gland) not only to nourish the gland itself, but 
also to receive in return the benefit of its function, 
which would be our objective. We may therefore 
end the controversy and stop here—until the ways 
and means are devised; first, to keep the tissues 
of any organ alive, after removing it, and second, 
again connect it up with the blood stream (when 
transplantating it in time of need) so it will remain 
alive and function—so far as any operation for 
“organ transplantation” is concerned. 


Conclusions to Part Two 


241 


“If I have sometimes disturbed the 
calm of our academies by somewhat 
violent discussions, it was because I 
was passionately defending the truth.” 

—Louis Pasteur. 

Our Vital Glands :— 

One of the most important and very frequent 
causes of disarrangement of (our vital glands) 
these ductless glands, thereby altering the amount 
of the internal secretions, is any great mental 
shock, for instance, the death of a beloved one, 
or, having been in a railroad wreck, also, a severe 
injury, as a blow or fall on the head. This shock 
from any of these causes has in many instances 
terminated in insanity. It is very evident in all 
cases, that both the ductless glands and the men¬ 
tality suffered. This insanity in some cases has 
caused self-destruction, in others it was the cause 
of murder, sometimes the slaying of members of 
their own family. In many instances the indi¬ 
vidual became a temporary or permanent inmate 
of an insane asylum. Now the question is, did 
the shock affect the brain tissues primarily with 
a consequently secondary disarrangement of the 
ductless glands and their internal secretions, or 
did the shock affect the ductless glands at first, in 
some unknown manner, and the brain tissues in 
turn suffering from want of these internal secre¬ 
tions, cause the individual to become mentally de¬ 
ficient, or is it an unknown secondary complica¬ 
tion of a special nervous system between this group 
of glands, due primarily to the shock, terminating 
in a mentally unbalanced condition. In reference 
to the above we have, to a marked degree many 
16 


242 The Millennium and Medical Science 


living examples where practical demonstrations 
present themselves as follows : the individuals who 
have spasms of hysterical laughter, over which 
they have no control, even though they realize the 
situation, at times, is causing much embarrassment 
to their friends and they are making fools of 
themselves. Then we have the individual who 
harbors a grudge and in time, from constantly 
thinking and moodily brooding over the matter, 
this becomes a morbid hatred, in these cases un¬ 
less there is a change of environment with extenu¬ 
ating circumstances, the final termination is the 
committing of a wilful act, perhaps premeditated 
murder.—Here may be mentioned the so-called 
“green-eyed-monster,” jealousy; in this trait of 
humanity can be seen the connection involving 
first, ambition, and the fire of youth; second, love 
or individual affinity; third, hatred and desire of 
vengeance; all of which have to do (no doubt, 
more or less in every case) with the powers ex¬ 
erted on the individual by the action or function 
of the endocrine glands, especially so in cases 
where two individuals (man and wife who love 
each other) are intimately acquainted with each 
other, having enjoyed that one great happiness in 
life, the satisfying of the cravings of the “depths of 
the soul” and the acquisition of the knowledge 
which takes the individual soaring to the “heights 
of our only known earthly heaven.”—The nervous 
breakdown is the most common, being caused by 
continued worry and mental strain over financial 
affairs, or as a result of grieving over the loss of a 
beloved one. Any of these types of cases may, 
and often do, end in self-destruction. When this 


Conclusions to Part Two 


243 


happens we call it, in some instances, disappoint¬ 
ment in life, in others, disappointment in love; 
both are frequent in every-day life. Again we ask 
the question: is this spasmatic hysteria, moody 
brooding, continued worry, or mental strain, as we 
call them, brought about primarily by faulty func¬ 
tion of the internal secretions, permitting these 
conditions to prevail upon the individual, at differ¬ 
ent instances in life, as a secondary complication 
and in time bringing about a third stage, the so- 
called derangement of the mind in its several 
types or forms, wherein are conceived (and later 
committed) these different acts? 

There are times when one would think that 
this is truly a man’s world and the woman has 
more than her share of the worldly burden. We 
will now mention another important point which 
has a great deal of bearing on the question and 
involving a phase of the evolution of the woman. 
There comes a time in every woman’s life, provid¬ 
ing she lives long enough, be that woman a mother, 
wife, sister, daughter or sweetheart, it matters not, 
none can escape, that time of life when—with 
more or less apprehension—neurasthenia and in¬ 
sanity are to be feared. It arrives at about the age 
of forty and affects all females, more or less, re¬ 
gardless of race, color, or creed. Herein lies our 
ground for extensive study and much food for 
thought. We do know the gonads of the female 
are intimately connected with the “Endocrine sys¬ 
tem,” we also know the “mentality” of the female 
“suffers,” more or less, in every woman, at the 
time of “menopause,” or so-called “change of life,” 
(this “change of life” may also occur to a marked 


244 The Millennium and Medical Science 

degree, in some instances, in the male sex; no one 
has proven as yet, that it does not) and this aspect 
of things will indeed need much investigation, from 
its many angles. 

We find on record, especially of late years, 
many cases where organotherapy has been used to 
advantage and in some cases with what might be 
expressed as miraculous results. Cases of indi¬ 
viduals that would have undoubtedly been in 
every instance, a wasted and empty life, a physical 
and mental defective, a deformed pigmy or hope¬ 
less idiot, perhaps both, and a permanent invalid 
at home, or a subject for the insane asylum; in any 
case a care and a burden to his or her family and 
to society. To watch the improvement under treat¬ 
ment, of this helpless and anticipated blotch on 
humanity, this misshapen misanthrope, or this 
monstrosity of nature, transformed into a comely 
woman or a robust man; the anticipated life of 
isolation and deprivation rightfully cheated, and 
see this individual enjoy the comradeship of its 
kind and kindred, this is indeed worthy of endless 
effort. The wonderful improvement in these cases 
is no longer a coincident, as it was one time called, 
but is now a fact, a sterling reality worthy of note, 
that in most cases of this type there is a vast im¬ 
provement when once understood and properly 
treated. It has been accomplished many times in 
the past and will be again more frequently in the 
future as we grow to understand, more every day, 
the specific nature of these ductless glands and 
their internal secretions. It would be very wonder¬ 
ful, if in the near future we should be able to re¬ 
duce to more than one-half, the number of inmates 


Conclusions to Part Two 


245 


at the present time in our insane asylums, by a 
treatment now in the beginning of its making and 
known as, Organotherapy. 

Inferential Judgment:— 

So far as the interstitial gland transplantation 
operation is concerned, we may now draw our 
several conclusions. It being understood, of 
course, that no one should presume so far as to 
assume, that he were his brother’s keeper, and if 
any individual will insist that he or she must have 
a gland transplantation operation, that is any one’s 
own business and is strictly a personal affair, how¬ 
ever, it would seem that in such a case, there 
should be selected one or two, or more, of all the 
glands so closely related in this group, so as to be 
sure that the proper one is secured and if any 
individual feel so disposed, to carry around 
(stowed away in different parts of the anatomy) 
a few pounds of excess baggage in the form of 
glands, with the hope that, “in some future day” 
his “youthful days” of vim and vigor will return, 
that is again his own business. In this case one 
may take his choice—there are monkeys, goats, 
dogs, cats, pigs and jackrabbits to choose from; 
(any of which will be just as effective as glands 
of the anthropoid ape or the human) all are easily 
obtained and according to the view of some oper¬ 
ators the operation is quite harmless, provided, 
you are rich in cash and you are so disposed to 
spend plenty of it. On the other hand, this is, 
according to all evidence to date, positively a 
useless operation, which may prove very danger¬ 
ous to health and may terminate fatally. These 


246 The Millennium and Medical Science 

are the two ultimate views, according to present 
knowledge at hand on the subject and it is truly 
impossible to advise, at the present time, any 
operation of this nature, because it has not been 
proven that the interstitial gland is the particular 
gland which is needed in the first place, and also, 
because it is the secretions from the gland which 
are needed, the gland itself being useless unless it 
can function after the operation. 

Many eminent physicians and surgeons, recog¬ 
nized as up-to-date authorities on the subject, are 
now advocating that “other glands than the 
gonads” in the endocrine group, are apparently re¬ 
sponsible or play an important part in the loss of 
youth or vim and vigor, in middle life and the 
aged. 

It would be well for any individual who is 
anticipating a gland transportation operation, due 
to the fact that he or she has, seemingly, lost youth 
and ambition, to consult at once the family physi¬ 
cian as there are a great many factors involved in 
such cases. It may be shown upon or after a good 
physical examination that this case is something 
entirely foreign to what the individual thinks it 
is and your physician can advise you. Scientific 
investigation has shown, and some of our best 
authorities agree, that such disturbances as will 
affect the thyroid, pituitary and adrenal glands, 
separately or together, in many cases, will inter¬ 
fere with, or interrupt the function of the gonads, 
and in some cases entail a complete loss of sexual 
power, as surely as does the operation of castra¬ 
tion .—Incorporated within the terms “sexual 
power,” in this instance, are meant the several 


Conclusions to Part Two 247 

factors, such as, ambitious desire and physical 
ability on the part of the individual, as man or 
woman (as conscious thinking persons); normal 
control (mentally and physically), with tendencies 
to satisfy the inclinations in accordance with the 
natural or normal laws of human nature; the nor¬ 
mal functioning of all the essential organs within 
the human (the unconscious and continual per¬ 
forming cycle of our inner-selves), involving, se¬ 
cretion, excretion, production and reproduction.— 
This knowledge we have today, tomorrow we may 
learn other important facts. It is essential that the 
public should have some knowledge of the facts 
on this subject, but to convey these facts to the 
laity is not a simple matter. At the present time 
this is not, altogether, a simple subject and not 
quite plain even to the medical profession in gen¬ 
eral, to the extent of explaining the complications 
of the subject matter to the average individual. 
In other words, the general practitioner knows 
there is much to learn and many points of ob¬ 
scurity upon which much light must be thrown; 
therefore he does not pretend to know very much 
about the details on the subject, because it is not 
within the jurisdiction of his knowledge at the 
present time. 

It is admitted and advocated by many reliable 
investigators, that we may expect great things 
from this source of study, but up to date there is 
very little knowledge which may be called definite. 
Inasmuch, however, as this phase of our knowledge 
is still shrouded in considerable obscurity, the 
more salient conceptions and instances have been 
given and presented, in understandable terms, se- 


248 The Millennium and Medical Science 

lecting those which seemed most clear to explain 
the different phenomena as observed in each in¬ 
stance of a given case. Further comment is un¬ 
necessary. The facts speak for themselves, in the 
present day gland transplantation operation. As 
to the question of the hormones, there is no doubt 
of our attaining in the future, the knowledge of 
their consequential usefulness, in action and pur¬ 
pose, in health and disease, and their influence in 
life and death. 

Personality :— 

Finally, we may assume that “Life” is, on the 
part of all nature’s work as well as on the part of 
every normal individual, an inherited “tendency” 
to reproduce its kind; this “tendency” being the 
result of a cycle of several developmental periods, 
which involve it is said, seven stages; beginning 
with (1) the innocence of infancy, followed by (2) 
the joys of childhood, (3) the spirit of youth, (4) 
the manhood or womanhood in which is mani¬ 
fested the hidden potentialities of an incompre¬ 
hensible desire, leading to an act (participated in 
by male and female) governed by nature’s laws 
and over which these individuals have no control, 
culminating, sooner or later, in “conception” on 
the part of the female: (the term “no control” in 
this instance is intended to convey the following 
meaning: all those instances where two mutual 
affinities meet, especially, legal wedlock.) 

When in the sanctum of the rose scented 
boudoir, two beings in each other’s arms, 
(clasped so tight, and oh, so close) all 
the world is forgotten, while now is seen 


Conclusions to Part Two 


249 


a new light; kindled in these two souls 
a new “innocence of affinity” is born, 

(adorned only in nature’s simple dress) 
each adores the other, while revelations 
come; to these lovers (man and wife) 
there is no wrong, all is right, (children 
once again, in a new world of light) 
when in the stillness and the darkness 
of the night the great round silvery moon 
(oh, so bright) steals away that precious 
darkness (of no intrinsic worth); but, to 
these lovers there is no light (of nature) 
to mar their nuptial bliss, she (to him) 
appears as a Venus form, he is (to her) 
the Apollo of her dreams (it is love); the 
warmth of the blood, (it is life) at the 
mutual touch, fans this spark of love into 
passion’s flame. 

That secret inclination or compulsory 
force of animation, demands we obey 
the commands of nature’s laws; 

Love and affinity, with cheek to cheek, 
heart to heart, desire for desire, the 
ecstacies of love’s climax come; 

—this conception being the result of an amalgama¬ 
tion (of an incorporation within the individual 
male and female elements, the spermatozoa and 
ovum which necessarily contribute to this concep¬ 
tion in every instance, more or less), of the several 
characteristics of each of the parents—therefore, 
conception may truly be termed the “first stage” 
(being the primary period in the first stage, the 
innocence of infancy) of a “new life” the moral, 


250 The Millennium and Medical Science 

mental and physical qualifications of both parents 
being actually involved therein and must also be 
considered as essential factors in this primary 
period before actual earthly existence begins its 
first stage in life. After manhood or womanhood 
come (5) the parenthood or middle age, and then 
(6) old age, followed by (7) senility. 

When we use the terms “no control” it is 
understood that circumstances and conditions are 
the essential factors concerned here; we are taught 
to control, at all times, our emotions and passions, 
yet we may give vent to our sorrow and cry to our 
heart’s content (some people do, for days, weeks, 
and months) when death deprives us of a loved 
one; we may laugh ourselves sick in a theatre, 
while viewing a comedy (most everybody does if 
it is a good show), and we may go on our honey¬ 
moon and forget all else in the world; in our 
“letting down the gates” of the “earthly cravings 
of the soul” or of the “passions of love,” or to give 
vent to the “ardor of youth;” call it what you will, 
it has been expressed as, enjoying or seeing “a 
little bit of heaven,”—which (we sometimes think) 
terminates only too soon—whenever there are 
found two lovers of mutual affinity. All the above 
are permissible in society, under special circum¬ 
stances and conditions. It has also been noticed 
that, in times of war (when the passions are per¬ 
mitted to go on a rampage), special privilege is 
granted to plunder and destroy; when one human 
being seems to clamor for another human’s blood, 
and may kill his fellow-men with immunity. 

While we traverse these seven ages or during 
these seven periods, “there is or there is not’” a 


Conclusions to Part Two 


251 


development of “character” or “personality”—or 
the “personal equation,” is or is not, worked out, 
—in every individual’s life. The term “equation” 
(to equalize), is considered as an expression or 
statement of the equality of two quantities, in 
other words, an equation states an equality exist¬ 
ing between two classes of quantities, distinguished 
as known and unknown; these correspond to the 
data of a problem and the thing sought.—In this 
relation (to our present subject) we must seek the 
special laws of, first, law of “similars” (analogy 
and affinity); second, law of “contrasts;” third, 
law of “coadjacency” (cause and effect); fourth, 
law of “preference,” under the laws of “possibil¬ 
ity.”—When we wish to apply the term, “personal¬ 
ity,” in its “positive” or “negative” phase to any 
individual,—thereby assuming the attitude that we 
have accomplished the solution of the “personal 
equation” in that individual, denoting in a sense 
his or her individual assets or proficiency, on the 
one hand and the liabilities or inefficiency on the 
other, to cope with our so-called “success in life,” 
—it is indeed a greater task in truth, than the 
average individual can realize; yet we do make 
our deductions (it is a common everyday occur¬ 
rence) of other people in a kind of haphazard 
manner, when in reality we should indeed be more 
reserved in this matter. 

After considering all of the above, its important 
points and facts on the subject, before endeavor¬ 
ing to give a logical synopsis as to the “whys and 
wherefores,” or before attempting an explanation 
by mental effort, the entire subject resolves itself 
into this question; what is the cause or reason of 


252 The Millennium and Medical Science 

this particular partiality of bestowing of favors 
(by nature) on one individual at one time and the 
apparent prejudice or unfairness, or seemingly, an 
act of gross negligence (on the part of nature) of 
another individual at another time? There must 
be a “reason for or why” nature chooses to change 
the matrix, in every instance making every indi¬ 
vidual just a little different from the other, no two 
individuals being exactly alike. Herein, no doubt, 
lies the sequel to the secret. 

As a consequence of elimination, when all the 
wrong factors or bad features are taken away, 
there must remain only the wholesome, the true 
and the good, in every and all instances in life. 
If the so-called Millennium is to be attained, it 
would seem reasonably justifiable to encourage 
any effort whereby a system or method could be 
found or worked out which would eliminate the 
extreme types of this negative phase (of personal¬ 
ity or individuality) in all humanity. This would 
also seem a magnanimous and charitable action 
towards humanity, especially those who have a 
leaning or tendency toward the indolent or in¬ 
efficient, perversion or fetichism, and the many 
so-called moron types. We could then give to 
every individual, to some extent or to a marked 
degree, a goodly share of the positive phase, 
thereby bestowing upon him or her “some per¬ 
sonality'” and therefore “some success” and inci¬ 
dentally “the enjoyment of some of the fruits of 
life” and at least a small share of some of the 
things which make “life” worth while. 

It has been written “Man know thyself,” and 
“Go forth and multiply,”—these two messages to 


Conclusions to Part Two 


253 


man handed down to us by our comparatively re¬ 
cent ancestors—together with, “The sins of the 
father are visited unto his children, even unto the 
third and fourth generation” (regardless of any 
particular religious beliefs), are in stern reality 
the true fundamental and underlying priciples of 
all human existence. When we learn to interpret 
these three messages correctly, it will no doubt 
(as a whole or a trinity), express in understand¬ 
able terms, “the personality” or “the personal 
equation;” in other words, when we have learned 
these three lessons thoroughly, from every angle, 
we will then have passed the first milestone on the 
road of life pointing in the direction of the “Mil¬ 
lennium.” 


CHAPTER XVI 


CONCLUSIONS TO PART THREE 

“(Sir,) I have found you an argu¬ 
ment; but I am not obliged to find you 
an understanding,” and “A man al¬ 
ways makes himself greater as he in¬ 
creases his knowledge.” 

— Dr. Johnson. 

Endocrinology :— 

W HEN we consider the historical facts relative 
to Endocrinology together with those en¬ 
deavors of the ancient physicians to divorce both 
superstition and religion from the practice of 
medicine, it brings home today—to our imagina¬ 
tion—a vivid picture of the many hundreds of 
years wherein were fought a constant battle for 
supremacy, tending to place the practice of medi¬ 
cine and treatments of disease on a logical founda¬ 
tion. Those few men of long ago who could look 
far into the future no doubt knew that there must 
come a day when Endocrinology would play its 
part in the science of medicine. 

In the next few decades “Endocrinology” or 
“The Study of the Internal Secretions,” bids fair 
to proclaim the dawn of a new era for man in 
history of medicine (thereby adding much to the 
general betterment of all mankind), in his con¬ 
stant fight with all disease, its cause, its course, its 
conditions and sequela, also its treatment. 

It is not necessary to relate in detail the “posi- 
254 


Conclusions to Part Three 255 

tively every day evidence” as manifested in “the 
ki; wn cycle of the life” as found in every female, 
and her relative knowledge of the existing or so- 
called natural relation, which surely lies in the 
action or normal physiological symptoms at the 
different ages or stages of her life, between the 
gonads and the mammary glands. Two periods in 
any and almost every life of the female are strik¬ 
ing pictures; first, when at the age of about four¬ 
teen the monthly periods begin and the mammary 
glands show an increase in size; second, the signifi¬ 
cant physiological change when conception takes 
place and pregnancy begins, and the continual 
subsequent changes which must necessarily occur 
as a new life grows into existence until this new 
being is born, and even thereafter. These two 
features of every day evidence can and do, prove 
the intimacy of the complex relation between 
these two sets of glands and their associates in a 
much more satisfactory manner than any words 
in writing could explain. 

Only the test of time together with the test of 
man’s intellect and his labors of ingenuity, can 
say just what incredulous things of today will be 
brought forth as actual facts of material worth on 
the tomorrow. This is true of almost any science, 
but the small possibilities of yesterday, in the 
study of the Endocrine glands, have become 
great probabilities of today and a relative 
assurance of our tomorrow, in its great benefits 
to humanity. 

The physiology of nutrition involves the study 
of the way in which the tissues of the body, and 
more especially the great master tissues, muscles 


256 The Millennium and Medical Science 

and nerves, obtain the material for growth and 
repair and the energy for mechanical work and 
health production, and the mode in which they 
get rid of the waste products of their activity. The 
study is, therefore, very largely a study of the 
history of the food of the body, since it is in the 
food that the necessary matter and energy are sup¬ 
plied. The subject of dietetics bearing on the 
composition and special importance of various 
foods, and the laws which regulate the supply of 
food under different conditions of the body, can¬ 
not be taken up at this time. However, we must 
mention here that the mode of digestion, the utili¬ 
zation and the elimination of the end products of 
the three great constituents, proteins, carbohy¬ 
drates and fats, should be considered as being 
essential to our subject and involve, first, the 
chemistry of digestion; second, the mode of forma¬ 
tion of the digestive secretions; third, the mechan¬ 
ism by which the food is passed along the ali¬ 
mentary canal; fourth, the absorption of food; 
fifth, metabolism; sixth, excretion. 

The essential step which prepares the ordinary 
food for utilization in the body, for the change 
into living matter, is digestion, a process which 
the food undergoes under the influence of the fer¬ 
ments or enzymes present in the gastro-intestinal 
tract. By this process it is broken down into 
simpler substances, which can be utilized by the 
body tissues for conversion into protoplasm and 
as the supply of energy. That part which is un¬ 
suited for use in the body is either passed as 
feces or absorbed and excreted in the urine. 

The substances which bring about this change 


Conclusions to Part Three 257 

are known as ferments, enzymes or zymins. For¬ 
merly it was believed that there were two distinct 
classes of enzymes, those which were living or 
associated with living cells, and those which were 
non-living. In 1897, however, E. Buchner and M. 
Hahn showed that from living cells (yeast) a fer¬ 
ment could be obtained which acted quite as well 
extracellularly as when it was bound up within 
the cell. Subsequent work has shown that other 
organisms act by the enzymes they contain, so that 
it is now recognized that there is no essential dif¬ 
ference between the living or organized ferment 
and the non-living or unorganized ferment. All 
ferments probably act as catalysators or catalysts. 
Catalysis is the process by which reactions are 
either initiated or accelerated by the mere pres¬ 
ence of certain substances which remain un¬ 
changed during the process; to these substances 
the name of catalysators has been given. As an 
example of such catalytic action the acceleration 
of the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide into 
water and oxygen by the action of a colloidal solu¬ 
tion of platinum may be given. C. Oppenheimer 
defines an enzyme as -a substance produced by 
living cells, which acts by catalysis. E. Fischer 
has shown that the action of ferments is specific, 
that is, the ferment only exerts its action on defi¬ 
nite substances or substrates of definite structural 
arrangement. He has compared the relation of 
ferment to substrate to that of a key to its lock. 
Ferments which bring about the breakdown of 
proteins are without influence on fats and carbo¬ 
hydrates; those which decompose fats leave pro¬ 
teins and carbohydrates untouched, and so on. 


17 


258 The Millennium and Medical Science 

The first of the digestive secretion which food 
comes into contact with is the saliva. This is the 
mixed secretion from the various glands, salivary 
and other, the ducts of which open in the mouth. 
The saliva, which is for the most part produced 
by the three large salivary glands, the parotid, the 
sub-maxillary and the sub-lingual, is a colorless 
or a slightly turbid viscous fluid with a faintly 
alkaline reaction and of low specific gravity. It 
contains a very small proportion of solids, which 
vary somewhat in amount and character in the 
secretions of the different glands. Mucin and 
traces of other proteins are present. Small 
amounts of potassium sulphocyanide may nearly 
always be detected. The functions of the saliva 
are twofold. First, it has a mechanical action 
moistening the mouth and the food and thus aid¬ 
ing mastication and swallowing by securing the 
formation of a proper bolus of food; it also assists 
by binding the particles together, an action of 
special importance when the food is dry. Second, 
in man and in some of the lower animals the en¬ 
zyme ptyalin exerts an action in digestion on part 
of the carbohydrates of the diet. The starches or 
polysaccharids are broken down, first of all to the 
simple dextrins and then to the still more simple 
disaccharide, maltose, which is followed by the 
further breakdown of the maltose which does not 
exist at all or only in the merest traces in the 
buccal secretion. The action of ptyalin on starches 
is thus very similar to that of acids, except that it 
stops at the formation of maltose. Ptyalin acts 
best at a temperature of about 40°C. and in a 
neutral or faintly alkaline medium, its action 


Conclusions to Part Three 


259 


being inhibited by the presence of even very dilute 
solutions of the mineral acids. If the acid be in 
sufficient amount the enzyme is destroyed. For 
this reason the action ceases in the stomach when¬ 
ever the bolus is completely permeated by the 
gastric juice. As it takes time for the gastric juice 
thoroughly to permeate the food mass, which re¬ 
mains for a considerable period in the fundus of 
the stomach unmixed with the secretion, salivary 
digestion goes on for about half an hour after food 
is taken. 

There may be certain substances either present 
in the food or developed in the course of digestion, 
which directly stimulate the secretion originally 
started by a nervous reflex. E. Starling has 
drawn attention to this chemical mode of stimulat¬ 
ing different organs. To the substances known 
and unknown which evoke the action, he gives the 
name of hormones, and such “hormone” action 
he does not limit merely to the secretory organs 
but extends to all cases where one organ is stimu¬ 
lated by chemical products formed in the same 
or another organ. 

Most modern workers hold that the most effec¬ 
tive stimulus to the pancreatic flow is the chemical 
one—a hormone discovered by W. Bayliss and E. 
Starling, \tfho found that extracts of the duodenal 
mucous membrane made with dilute hydrochloric 
acid when injected into the blood caused a flow of 
pancreatic juice. The active substance present in 
this extract is known as “secretin,” and is sup¬ 
posed to be formed under natural conditions by 
the action of the acid chyme on a prosecretin. 
This secretin is not of the ordinary zymin (en- 


260 The Millennium and Medical Science 

zyme) nature, as it is not destroyed by boiling and 
is soluble in alcohol. The secretin when formed 
must be absorbed into the blood and then carried 
round the circulation to the pancreas before it can 
act. 

The mode of action of the stimuli which evoke 
this secretion has not yet been fully investigated. 
As has been stated, it is quite possible that very 
little ferment is secreted, and that ferment action 
mainly takes place within the cells after the vari¬ 
ous substances have been absorbed. How far the 
flow is controlled by nervous action, and how far 
by hormone action, is not known. 

The apparent importance of the ductless glands 
and their secretions, seems to be primarily, to 
protect and preserve life. And secondarily, the 
creating and granting the powers to the average 
individual to resist or neutralize the many differ¬ 
ent kinds of toxins which enter the human system 
in many ways; the numerous chemical poisons in 
solids, liquids and gases, the several drugs to 
which many individuals are hypersensitive and 
cannot tolerate; the various incompatible sub¬ 
stances found in fruits and other foods, causing 
an anaphylatic condition (a toxicemia which may 
be mild or severe) also the different forms of 
ptomain and leukomain poisoning; the bites and 
stings of insects, also those toxins of a parasitic or 
bacterial nature. The apparent declaration of 
non-tolerance (by the human body)—in accord¬ 
ance with all the laws of human nature—of the 
much advocated and so-called interstitial gland 
transplantation operation (as it is being done 
today in a positively promiscuous manner) with the 


Conclusions to Part Three 


261 


possibilities of its detrimental effects if continued 
as an every-day practice. 

From a scientific standpoint of study including 
anatomy, histology, physiology, pathology and 
treatment all authorities on the above subjects 
admit and recognize the following facts. All these 
glands are intimately related to each other in 
many ways, especially by way of the blood stream. 
Microscopically it can be demonstrated that in 
many instances the cells and structure of these 
glands resemble each other. The function of all 
are necessary to the human economy and the 
product of each gland is essential to the other. 
That when any of these glands are affected by 
disease to any great extent, there are radical 
changes in the health of the individual thus 
afflicted, which usually terminates fatally. When 
one or more of these glands are affected the treat¬ 
ment in many cases is that of organotherapy, 
which means, that in most instances a mixture of 
two or more extracts (in the dry or solution form) 
of these glands is given the patient. In some in¬ 
stances the extract of only one gland is used. 

The writer has endeavored to show, first, that 
it is an actual fact that the so-called Hormones, 
Enzymes, or Ferments, are contained in the inter¬ 
nal secretions; second, that the internal secretions 
are the product of the endocrine glands; third, 
that each gland is essential to the other; fourth, 
that these Hormones, Enzymes, or Ferments, are 
live minute bodies and can only be produced by 
these glands when these glands are alive and in 
good health; fifth, that the extract of these glands, 
in a solution or dry form will act as a stimulation 


262 The Millennium and Medical Science 

to these glands, when properly administered under 
necessary conditions and circumstances; sixth, 
that when these glands are transplanted in accord¬ 
ance with surgical methods of today they produce 
no results because their blood supply is cut off 
when removed and therefore they die. The gland 
then acts, when transplanted, as a foreign body 
and is surrounded by a connective tissue process 
thereby becoming a walled off object, and nature 
innocently destroys our intention and unknow¬ 
ingly robs us of our purpose. 

It is the contention of some, that any individual 
who will respond to a gland transplantation opera¬ 
tion (in the event that such operation could be 
successfully performed) will also respond to other 
methods of organotherapy; the large percentage 
of results (in organotherapy) prove it. The fail¬ 
ure in the gland transplantation operation is ap¬ 
parently partly due to the fact that only one type 
of gland is used, if two or more kinds of glands 
are used it may or may not produce better results; 
this is a question for future study. 

Hormones :— 

Now we come to the question: what are these 
minute bodies, the so-called Hormones, Enzymes, 
Ferments or granules? It would not be fair to the 
reader to pass this important question, or entirely 
omit saying something about these “minute 
bodies.” Also, it is necessary that we eliminate, 
as far as possible, all apparent “mystery and 
enigma” and give, in understandable terms, at 
least a substantial explanation which will be of 
some little material worth and much scientific im- 


Conclusions to Part Three 263 

portance, as well as a goodly knowledge of benefit 
in general, to the average individual. As in all 
studies of any consequence it is impossible, at the 
present time,—in this instance because of our 
meager knowledge on the subject as a whole and 
because of the apparent corresponding nature and 
the complex approximate relations of each to the 
other—to draw a hard and fast line between the 
different names by which these “minute bodies” 
are now known or between the “minute bodies” 
themselves, or their individual actions in every 
instance. Also it should be remembered, as it is 
not an easy task to separate a cow from its calf, 
also a difficult matter to part a mother from her 
infant, so is it almost impossible, at times, to con¬ 
sider these “minute bodies” separately, and as a 
subject set apart from the endocrine glands; the 
“minute bodies” being either the direct descend¬ 
ants, in a way, or the actual product of the en- 
docrines proper; or the resulting issue of an 
“amalgamation of function” of these glands, indi¬ 
vidually or collectively. 

Let it be understood at the beginning, that 
there has been nothing of an absolutely definite 
nature determined up to date, which would war¬ 
rant the application of any specific name to signify 
or designate these “minute bodies,” singly or col¬ 
lectively. We can only draw conclusions and make 
deductions from the experiments and experience 
of those scientific men, who have thus far, worked 
out what little knowledge we now possess, by 
many years of study. It may be correctly stated 
that while no one is absolutely certain as to just 
what the specific functions (in some instances) of 


264 The Millennium and Medical Science 


these minute bodies are, we do know that they 
surely exist. Their individual origin and ultimate 
termination is as yet a matter of conjecture. As the 
many different investigators have found that the 
different internal secretions, containing these min¬ 
ute bodies, have different reactions when subjected 
to the different tests, under different conditions, 
it is quite natural that we should find many names, 
each investigator appropriating a name most de¬ 
sirable and suitable in each case to meet the 
requirements and answer his purpose. In the 
literature we find such names as hormones, en¬ 
zymes, ferments, granules, gemmules, idiosomes, 
protomers and many more. It is of little conse¬ 
quence at present just what name we give these 
“minute bodies” and as all writers (apparently) 
have their own term for them, we will for a matter 
of convenience, also because it is the most popular 
name used today, call them hormones. 

Hormone, is from the Greek and has been 
translated, by different authors, into the meaning, 
“I arouse;” or, “to set in motion;” or “I excite.” 
The definition is given as: a chemic substance pro¬ 
duced in an organ which, being carried to an 
associated organ by the blood stream, excites in 
the latter organ a functional activity. 

As to the word itself and definition of the term 
“enzyme” (from the Greek, in, and leaven, mean¬ 
ing, leavened; or to cause to affect in character; 
or any influence that causes a general change); 
it no doubt was first suggested by Kuhne, being 
used to express an unorganized ferment, or a 
group of substances, found in the constitution of 
plants and animals, which decomposes or trans- 


Conclusions to Part Three 


265 


forms certain carbon or other compounds occur¬ 
ring in close approximation or in association with 
them. 

In viewing the history of medicine we find 
scattered and commingled (in some instances in 
a more or less haphazard manner), the term “fer¬ 
ment.” As an example: the “Zymotic” diseases 
(in this instance the term “zymotic” is from the 
Greek word, meaning, “ferment”), was a term 
used in medicine, being applied to the class of 
acute infectious maladies. As originally employed 
by Dr. W. Farr, of the British Registrar-General’s 
department, the term included the diseases which 
were “epidemic, endemic and contagious,” and 
were regarded as owing their origin to the presence 
of a morbific principle in the system, acting in a 
manner analogous to, although not identical with 
the process of fermentation. A large number of 
diseases were accordingly included under this 
designation. The term, however, came to be re¬ 
stricted in medical nomenclature to the chief 
fevers and contagious diseases such as, typhus and 
typhoid fevers, smallpox, scarlet fever, measles, 
erysipelas, cholera, whooping-cough, and diph¬ 
theria. In our modern literature the word “fer¬ 
ment” has given way to the more recently coined 
terms, “enzymes” and “hormones,” in the study of 
the internal secretions. However, today the term 
“ferment” may be defined as, to agitate; to stir 
with passion; to produce fermentation. Fermenta¬ 
tion (from the Latin, fevere, meaning, to boil) is 
considered generally as a chemical decomposition 
or reaction of an organic compound, induced by 
living organisms or by chemical agents. 


266 The Millennium and Medical Science 

The process of fermentation in the preparation 
of wine, vinegar, beer and bread was known and 
praticed in prehistoric times. The alchemists used 
the terms fermentation, digestion and putrefaction 
indiscriminately; any reaction in which chemical 
energy was displayed in some form or other— 
such, for instance, as the effervescence occasioned 
by the addition of an acid to an alkaline solution 
—was described as a fermentation and the idea of 
the “Philosopher’s Stone” setting up a fermenta¬ 
tion in the common metals and developing the 
essence or germ, which should transmute them 
into silver or gold, further complicated the con¬ 
ception of fermentation. As an outcome of this 
alchemical doctrine the process of fermentation 
was supposed to have a purifying and elevating 
effect on the bodies which had been submitted to 
its influence. Johann Becher, in 1669, first found 
that alcohol was formed during the fermentation 
of solutions of sugar; he distinguished also be¬ 
tween fermentation and putrefaction. In 1697 
George Stahl admitted that fermentation and pu¬ 
trefaction were analogous processes, but that the 
former was a particular case of the latter. 

The beginning of definite knowledge on the 
phenomenon of fermentation may be dated from 
the time of Antony Leeuwenhoek, who in 1680 de¬ 
signed a microscope sufficiently powerful to render 
yeast cells and bacteria visible; and a description 
of these organisms, accompanied by diagrams, was 
sent to the Royal Society of London. This investi¬ 
gator just missed a great discovery, for he did not 
consider the spherical forms to be living organ¬ 
isms but compared them with starch granules. It 


Conclusions to Part Three 


267 


was not until 1803, that L. J. Thenard stated that 
yeast was the cause of fermentation, and held it 
to be of an animal nature, since it contained nitro¬ 
gen and yielded ammonia on distillation, nor was 
it conclusively proved that the yeast cell was the 
originator of fermentation until the researches of 
C. Cagniard de la Tour, T. Schwann and F. Kutzing 
from 1836 to 1839 settled the point. These investi¬ 
gators regarded yeast as a plant, and Meyer gave 
to the germs the systematic name of “Saccha- 
romyces” (sugar fungus). In 1839-1840 J. von 
Liebig attached the doctrine that fermentation was 
caused by microorganisms, and enunciated his 
theory of mechanical decomposition. He held 
that every fermentation consisted of molecular 
motion which is transmitted from a substance in 
state of chemical motion—this is, of decomposi¬ 
tion—to other substances, the elements of which 
are loosely held together. It is clear from Liebig’s 
publications that he first regarded yeast as a life¬ 
less, albuminoid mass, but, although later he con¬ 
sidered they were living cells, he would never 
admit that fermentation was a physiological 
process, the chemical aspect being paramount in 
the mind of this distinguished investigator. 

In 1857 Pasteur decisively proved that fermen¬ 
tation was a physiological process, for he showed 
that the yeast which produced fermentation was 
no dead mass, as assumed by Liebig, but consisted 
of living organisms capable of growth and multi¬ 
plication. His own words are: “The chemical 
action of fermentation is essentially a correlative 
phenomenon of a vital act, beginning and ending 
with it. I think that there is never an alcoholic 


268 The Millennium and Medical Science 


fermentation without there being at the same time 
organization, development and multiplication of 
globules, or the continued consecutive life of 
globules already formed.” Fermentation, accord¬ 
ing to Pasteur, was caused by the growth and 
multiplication of unicellular organisms out of 
contact with free oxygen, under which circum¬ 
stances they acquire the power of taking oxygen 
from chemical compounds in the medium in 
which they are growing. In other words “fer¬ 
mentation is life without air, or life without oxy¬ 
gen.” This theory of fermentation was materially 
modified in 1892 and 1894 by A. J. Brown, who 
described experiments which were in disagree¬ 
ment with Pasteur’s dictum. A. J. Brown writes: 
“If for the theory ‘life without air’ is substituted 
the consideration that yeast cells can use oxygen 
in the manner of ordinary aerobic fungi, and prob¬ 
ably do require it for the full completion of their 
life-history, but that the exhibition of their fer¬ 
mentative functions is independent of their en¬ 
vironment with regard to free oxygen, it will be 
found that there is nothing contradictory in Pas¬ 
teur’s experiments to such a hypothesis.” Liebig 
and Pasteur were in agreement on the point that 
fermentation is intimately connected with the 
presence of yeast in the fermenting liquid, but 
their explanations concerning the mechanism of 
fermentation were quite opposed. According to 
M. Traube (1858), the active cause of fermentation 
is due to the action of different enzymes contained 
in yeast and not to the yeast cell itself. 

Fermentation now includes all changes in or¬ 
ganic compounds brought about by ferments 


Conclusions to Part Three 


269 


elaborated in the living animal or vegetable cell. 
There are two distinct types of fermentation; first, 
those brought about by living organisms (or¬ 
ganized ferments), and second, those brought 
about by non-living or unorganized ferments 
(enzymes). The first class include such changes 
as the alcoholic fermentation of sugar solutions, 
the acetic acid fermentation of alcohol, the lactic 
acid fermentation of milk sugar, and the putrefac¬ 
tion of animal and vegetable nitrogenous matter. 
The second class includes all changes brought 
about by the agency of enzymes, such as the action 
of diastase on starch, invertase on cane sugar, 
glucase on maltose. The actions are essentially 
hydrolytic. The Saccharomycetes belong to that 
division of the Thallophyta called the Hyphomy- 
cetes or Fungi. With certain rare exceptions the 
Saccharomycetes have three methods of asexual 
reproduction; first, the most common form is the 
formation of “buds” which separate to form new 
cells. A portion of the nucleus of the parent cell 
makes it way through the extremely narrow neck 
into the daughter cell. This method obtains when 
yeast is vigorously fermenting a saccharine solu¬ 
tion; second, a division by “fission” followed by 
Endogenous spore formation, characteristic of the 
Schizoasccharomycetes. Some species show fer¬ 
mentative power; third, the “endospore” forma¬ 
tion, the conditions for which are suitable tem¬ 
perature, presence of air, presence of moisture, 
young and vigorous cells; a good food supply in 
the case of one species at least is necessary, and 
is in no case prejudicial. In some cases a sexual 
act would appear to precede spore formation. In 


270 The Millennium and Medical Science 

most cases four spores are formed within the cell 
by free formation. These may readily be seen 
after appropriate staining. 

Different workers have endeavored to show the 
several angles and demonstrate the many-sided 
actions of ferments. Some view them from one 
angle only while others hold they must be con¬ 
sidered from many view-points; as a consequence 
we find the “chemical” or inorganic view-point; 
the “physiological” or functional view; the “live” 
or organic version. 

In regard to catalysis in heterogeneous systems, 
especially the hastening of gas-reactions by plati¬ 
num, it is very probable that it is closely connected 
with the solution or absorption of the gases on the 
part of the metal. From the experiments of G. 
Bredig it seems that colloidal solutions of a metal 
act like the metal itself. The action of a colloidal- 
platinum solution on the decomposition of hydro¬ 
gen peroxide is still sensible even at a dilution of 
1/70,000,000 grm.-mol. per litre; indeed the activ¬ 
ity of this colloidal-platinum solution calls to mind 
in many ways that of organic ferments, hence 
Bredig has called it an “inorganic ferment.” This 
analogy is especially striking in the change of their 
activity with time and temperature, and in the 
possibility, by means of bodies like sulphuretted 
hydrogen, hydrocyanic acid, which act as strong 
poisons upon the latter, of “poisoning” the former 
also, that is, of rendering it inactive. In the case 
of the catalytic action of water-vapor upon many 
processes of combustion already mentioned, a part 
of the effect is probably due to the circumstance, 
disclosed by numerous experiments, that the union 


Conclusions to Part Three 271 

of hydrogen and oxygen proceeds, between certain 
temperature limits at least, after the equation 
H 2 +0 2 =H 2 0 2 , that is with the preliminary forma¬ 
tion of hydrogen peroxide, which then breaks 
down into water and oxygen, and further, above 
all, to the fact that this substance results from 
oxygen and water at high temperatures with great 
velocity, though indeed only in small quantities. 

Circulating in the fluid of the arteries and veins 
of animals, in addition to the many substances 
found in the blood-stream, three ferments are also 
described as being present; first, the glycolytic fer¬ 
ments which exert an action on the sugars found 
in the vegetable kingdom and other foods; second, 
the lipase or fat-splitting ferments; third, the dia¬ 
stase or starch-splitting ferments which are capable 
of converting starches into sugar; all of which play 
their part in the metabolism of the human. 

Versed Opinions :— 

Pasteur’s important researches mark an epoch 
in the technical aspect of fermentation. His in¬ 
vestigation on vinegar-making revolutionized that 
industry, and he showed how, instead of waiting 
two or three months for the elaboration of the 
process, the vinegar could be made in eight or ten 
days by exposing the vats containing the mixture 
of wine and vinegar to a temperature of 20° to 
25° C., and sowing with a small quantity of the 
acetic organism. To the study of the life-history 
of the butyric and acetic organisms we owe the 
terms “anaerobic” and “aerobic.” His researches 
from 1860 and onwards on the then vexed question 
of spontaneous generation proved that, in all cases 


272 The Millennium and Medical Science 

where spontaneous generation appeared to have 
taken place, some defect or other was in the ex¬ 
periment. Although the direct object of Pasteur 
was to prove a negative, yet it was on these experi¬ 
ments that sterilization as known to us was de¬ 
veloped. It is only necessary to bear in mind the 
great part played by sterilization in the laboratory, 
and pasteurization on the fermentation industries 
and in the preservation of food materials. Pasteur 
first formulated the idea that bacteria are respon¬ 
sible for the diseases of fermented liquids; the 
corollary of this was a demand for pure yeast. He 
recommended that yeast should be purified by 
cultivating it in a solution of sugar containing tar¬ 
taric acid, or, in wort containing a small quantity 
of phenol. It was not recognized that many of the 
diseases of fermented liquids are occasioned by 
foreign yeasts; moreover, this process, as was 
shown later by Hansen, favors the development of 
foreign yeasts at the expense of the good yeast. 

About this time Hansen, who had long been 
engaged in the researches of the biology of the 
fungi of fermentation, demonstrated that yeast 
free from bacteria could nevertheless occasion 
diseases in beer. This discovery was of great im¬ 
portance to the zymo-technical industries, for it 
showed that bacteria are not the only undesirable 
organisms which may occur in yeast. Hansen set 
himself the task of studying the properties of the 
varieties of yeast, and to do this he had to cultivate 
each variety in a pure state. Having found that 
some of the commonest diseases of beer, such as 
yeast turbidity and the objectionable changes in 
flavor, were caused not by bacteria but by certain 


Conclusions to Part Three 273 

species of yeast, and, further, that different species 
of good brewery yeast would produce beers of 
different character, Hansen argued that the pitch¬ 
ing yeast should consist only of a single species— 
namely, that best suited to the brewery in question. 
These views met with considerable opposition, but 
in 1890 Professor E. Duclaux stated that the yeast 
question as regards low fermentation has been 
solved by Hansen’s investigations. He emphasized 
the opinion that yeast derived from one cell was 
of no use for top fermentation, and advocated Pas¬ 
teur’s method of purification. But in the course 
of time, notwithstanding many criticisms and ob¬ 
jections, the reform spread from bottom fermenta¬ 
tion to top fermentation breweries on the continent 
and in America. In the United Kingdom the em¬ 
ployment of brewery yeasts selected from a single 
cell has not come into general use; it may prob¬ 
ably be accounted for in a great measure by con¬ 
servation and the wrong application of Hansen’s 
theories. 

In 1879 C. Nageli formulated his well-known 
molecular-physical theory, which supported Lie¬ 
big’s chemical theory on the one hand and Pas¬ 
teur’s physiological hypothesis on the other; 
“Fermentation is the transference of the condition 
of motion of the molecules, atomic groups and 
atoms of the various compounds constituting the 
living plasma, to the fermenting material, in con¬ 
sequence of which equilibrium in the molecules of 
the latter is destroyed, the result being their dis¬ 
integration.” He agreed with Pasteur that the 
presence of living cells is essential to the trans¬ 
formation of sugar into alcohol, but dissented 


18 


274 The Millennium and Medical Science 

from the view that the process occurs within the 
cell. This investigator held that the decomposi¬ 
tion of the sugar molecules takes place outside the 
cell wall. 

In 1894 and 1895 Emil Fischer, a German chem¬ 
ist, in a remarkable series of papers on the influ¬ 
ence of molecular structure upon the action of the 
enzyme, showed that various species of yeast be¬ 
have very differently towards solutions of sugars. 
For example, some species hydrolyze cane sugar 
and maltose, and then carry on fermentation at 
the expense of the simple sugars so formed. 
Fischer next suggested that enzymes can only 
hydrolyze those sugars which possess a molecular 
structure in harmony with their own, or to use 
his ingenious analogy, “the one may be said to fit 
into the other as a key fits into a lock.” The 
preference exhibited by yeast cells for sugar mole¬ 
cules is shared by mould fungi and soluble en¬ 
zymes in their fermentative actions. Fischer de¬ 
voted himself entirely to organic chemistry, and 
his investigations are characterized by an original¬ 
ity of idea and readiness of resource which make 
him the master of this branch of experimental 
chemistry. In his hands no substance seemed too 
complex to admit of analysis or of synthesis; and 
the more intricate and involved the subjects of his 
investigations the more strongly shown is the con¬ 
spicuous skill in pulling, as it were, atom from 
atom, until the molecule stood revealed, and, this 
accomplished, the same skill combined atom with 
atom until the molecule was regenerated. His forte 
was to enter fields where others had done little 
except break the ground; and his researches in 


Conclusions to Part Three 275 

many cases completely elucidated the problem in 
hand, and where the solution was not entire, his 
methods and results almost always contained the 
key to the situation. 

Emil Fischer may be regarded as the prime 
investigator in the field of what is known as the 
sugar group. His researches may be taken as com¬ 
mencing in 1883; and the results are unparalleled 
in importance in the history of organic chemistry. 
The chemical complexity of these carbohydrates, 
and the difficulty with which they could be got 
into a manageable form—they generally appeared 
as syrups—occasioned much experimental diffi¬ 
culty; but these troubles were little in comparison 
with the complication due to stereochemical rela¬ 
tions. However, Fischer synthesized fructose, glu¬ 
cose and a great number of other sugars, and 
having showed how to deduce, for instance, the 
formulae of the 16 stereoisomeric glucoses, he pre¬ 
pared several stereoisomerides, thereby complet¬ 
ing a most brilliant experimental research, and 
simultaneously confirming the Van’t Hoff theory 
of the asymmetric carbon atom. The study of the 
sugars brought in its train the necessity for ex¬ 
amining the nature, properties and reactions of 
substances which bring about the decomposition 
known as fermentation. Fischer attacked the 
problem presented by ferments and enzymes, and 
although we as yet know little of this complex 
subject, to Fischer is due at least one very im¬ 
portant discovery, viz., that there exists some rela¬ 
tion between the chemical constitution of a sugar 
and the ferment and enzymes which break it 
down. 


276 The Millennium and Medical Science 
Final Deductions:— 

Why is youth, boys and girls of today at the 
sweet and tender age of sixteen, if not younger, on 
a continual rampage of pleasure? At times there 
is apparently, no visible means, ethical or physi¬ 
cal, to control them in some instances until it is 
too late. Youth must have its fling and if they are 
lucky they will escape the many pitfalls in life 
before they attain the age when old enough to 
have good sense. There are many reasons for this 
existent condition in society. Society is the great 
foster-mother of us all, she controls the customs 
and practices, the fads and fancies, the pleasures 
and punishments, rules, regulations and teachings 
of the community in which we live and with her 
far reaching influence is to a great extent responsi¬ 
ble for what we are and what we will be in child¬ 
hood, youth, manhood and womanhood. 

Our fore-fathers participated in the molding 
and the making of the moral, social and economi¬ 
cal regime which has been handed down to us. It 
served them well during their lives. This code of 
ethics comprising the customs, laws, rules and 
regulations which acted as a guide in their eco¬ 
nomic, moral, religious and social life we have 
accepted. However, there were many of our an¬ 
cestors who never saw a towering sky-scraper, 
aeroplane, submarine, automobile, ocean grey¬ 
hound, electric street car, electric light, the tele¬ 
phone, telegraph, phonograph, and many more 
modern inventions. These things were mere sup¬ 
positions, if anything, in their days. Today we 
see and use these many conveniences in every day 
life, they are the practical stern realities of neces- 


Conclusions to Part Three 


277 


sary contention and convention especially in cities 
of three or four millions of people with its cease¬ 
less, merciless and competitive rush of life. 

For the man who is strong, unafraid, ambitious 
and daring all these things have a strange posses¬ 
sion of fascination and are the essentials of the 
“composite success” in modern times. Should we 
add to the above, the event of the moving picture 
and radio, the modern restaurant, dance-hall, pool- 
room and department store, and last but not least, 
the modern drug store where can be obtained any 
and all kinds of divers articles, including the much 
advertised remedies and cure-alls, the sole merit 
of which, in most instances, lies chiefly in the clev¬ 
erly written and law-evading properties of a gaudy 
and alluring display of “inducements to buy” these 
products; and if we again add the events of 
“Dowie of Zion City” in the state of Illinois, the 
“House of David” in the state of Michigan, Christ¬ 
ian Science Healing and the many other institu¬ 
tions and individuals of like cults, in its effect 
upon society, it is not a difficult matter to under¬ 
stand why, youth of today is ungracious and seem¬ 
ingly uncontrollable. All of this perplexing con¬ 
glomeration of confusion, lends a complexion of a 
dubious nature to the mental and physical powers 
of youth today, terminating in the indiscretion of 
thought and the indefinite mode of action. On 
every side of life there are held out to youth induce¬ 
ments and indorsements pertaining to the mental 
and physical pleasures which constitute the joys 
and happiness of life, while youth is left to its 
fate, in this mental jungle of bewilderment as to 
what is righteous and good, and as to just what is 


278 The Millennium and Medical Science 

immoral and bad from a physical point of view, 
while floundering about in the sea of society. 

In the years that have gone before there were 
two important factors responsible for the general 
good conduct, morally and physically, of the indi¬ 
vidual and society in general, especially youth. 
First, the practise of chastisement of the child at 
home and at the schoolroom. In its day this 
method did bring results, as in the training of 
dumb animals, but this method has seen its day. 
We now realize its significance of inconsistency, it 
is the method of the animal-trainer who by brute 
punishment would subdue the dumb beast. Man 
is only the higher animal it is true, but he has 
audible and understandable speech and proposes 
to have an intellect, wherefore he should not be 
introduced at an early age in childhood to cruelty 
or any other barbarian method as a means of 
inculcation of good breeding and civilization. 
Therefore, this old-fashioned method together with 
the old saying “Spare the rod and spoil the child” 
has been cast out of our regime as unfit, but what 
has taken its place as a persuading measure to 
teach the child and make it see and feel the differ¬ 
ence between those things which are right and 
proper physically, and that which is good or bad 
morally; also the training of the understanding 
relative to the “essential need” of this instruction 
as being beneficial in life? It is safe to say that 
nothing up to date has taken the place of the rod 
of persuasion, unless it be, education. 

The other important factor in the schooling of 
the child of yesterday which commanded obedi¬ 
ence and good deportment in general was the in- 


Conclusions to Part Three 


279 


fluence of the church and the instruction of the 
Sunday-school. The days of our grand-parents 
and great-grand-parents brought to them much 
consolation because they were taught that system 
of religion which said, “Be thou a God fearing man 
and a law-abiding citizen of the community and 
thy days shall be long and fruitful; honor and obey 
thy father and thy mother and teach thy children 
to do likewise,” or words to that effect. This sys¬ 
tem did they believe in and did they follow at any 
cost, even to the extent of brutal punishment. This 
system in conjunction with its methods will no 
longer maintain its influence nor substantiate its 
claims in the face of the advancement of the pres¬ 
ent system of education. 

In the short time of a few decades, this system 
of “brutal punishment” and “strict religious” is¬ 
sues, has undergone alteration to a marked degree. 
The progressive changes in the several branches of 
our social system have played their part in the 
bringing about of this departure from the old sys¬ 
tem. We find it a rather difficult matter today 
when attempting to explain to youth, even to a 
slight degree of satisfaction, the customary story 
of the coming of the new baby and its source of 
relation to the ever present and kindly stork. This 
is all very well in the nursery and the kinder¬ 
garten, where the rhymes and fables of “Mother 
Goose” play their part, but when youth of today 
has arrived at the age of puberty an explanation 
with a basis more substantial is necessary. Again 
we have the Biblical legends of tradition to con¬ 
tend with; the war in heaven, how Satan was dis¬ 
possessed, the inconceivable and inconsistent 


280 The Millennium and Medical Science 

mythical story of how for nine days he and his cast 
out brood fell continually, headlong through space, 
eventually landing in his supposedly present place 
of abode, Hades. It is also beyond the conception 
of youth of today to even partially understand, in 
its broadest sense, just how, when Adam was 
asleep in the garden of Eden, Eve was created 
from a rib, removed from Adam. The utility of 
the legendary issues of yesterday, used as utensils 
of knowledge, will by no means hold water in our 
world of knowledge of today; the bottom has 
fallen out of them, so to speak. They have lost all 
the force of conviction when brought in contrast 
with our current literature and the present day 
schools of education. Today we must to a great 
extent confine ourselves to facts and get down to 
the stern realities of life in its making and living. 
The Mythology of Greece and Rome, and Biblical 
legends should be considered in a class by them¬ 
selves as such. The inconsistency of these riddles 
(and many more) are the things which make 
youth of today doubt their authenticity. The old 
time system of introducing into society a standard 
of morality based upon a threat of eternal fire and 
brimstone in the hereafter and the holding over 
the head of every individual the religious club of 
everlasting condemnation to Sheol, is surely a fail¬ 
ure. It has had its day and has been gradually 
failing for years. The most unfortunate and 
lamentable part of the whole matter is this: while 
this sorry state of affairs has been going on for 
years, no code of moral ethics of any consequence 
has been brought to the fore to take the place of 
our once revered good old fashioned religion. 


Conclusions to Part Three 


281 


It may be stated in all sincerity that our Theo¬ 
logians should be highly commended for their 
brave efforts and good work in holding together 
these many years their ship of state, which is fast 
going to pieces on the cruel and penetrating rocks 
of science. The seeker of truth in the different 
studies of scientific interest with the many modern 
inventions, and numerous discoveries as a result 
of research, has done much to bring about the 
astonishing revelations of recent years. Youth of 
today at the age of sixteen sees and learns all of 
these things; as a result of this up to date experi¬ 
ence and information all restraint, from a moral 
and physical view, is apparently lost. 

The sum and substance of our present regime 
is this. Youth of today is thrown into a maelstrom 
of conflicting and confusing ideas, consisting of 
many religions, many cults, many schools of medi¬ 
cine, many laws, political machinations beyond 
numbers, and graft running riot in every walk of 
life, the greed for gold ever prevalent, worship 
of the almighty dollar practically unanimous. Add 
to the above our new inventions and customs, leav¬ 
ing in its wake new inducements and temptations 
playing their overtures in many tunes of solicita¬ 
tion, preying upon the susceptibilities of human 
nature. When we consider all these vital angles 
pertaining to life, it can readily be seen that youth 
is in a quandary of indecision, and a maze of 
uncertainty, not knowing which road to choose. Is 
it any wonder that life, in many instances, ends in 
a tragedy? 

It is quite evident there will come a time when 
the ways and means will be found to incorporate 


282 The Millennium and Medical Science 

in our system of education the studies of biology, 
physiology, anatomy, microscopy, bacteriology, 
pathology and hygiene. Only the fundamentals of 
these subjects will be necessary. The important 
subject of hygiene should be given consideration 
from a mental, physical, and to a degree sexual 
standpoint. Youth will then comprehend and will 
see the folly of “that which is wrong” and choose 
“that which is right.” Let it be demonstrated to 
the student, by the proper methods, the cause and 
effect and the dire consequences of disease. Teach 
youth something about themselves and their future 
functions in life, relative to whence they came and 
why, how they should live, and how they should 
die. False pride and ignorant modesty beget, in 
every sense of the word, degradation; this is the 
lesson being apparently taught society by our pres¬ 
ent adherence to the old standards of morality. 
The advancement of learning and late changes 
in our social system have caused to change and 
make incompatible, for the large majority of hu¬ 
manity, our old moral standards, in the face of 
progressive civilization. 

By educational means and in a logical manner 
we can bring forth the strongest kind of argument 
as to the whys and wherefores of guarding our 
health and living a clean, honorable and righteous 
life, from a moral, physical and social point of 
view. Remove the obsolete shade of obscurity 
where we find much of the needless so-called 
chastity, wrapped about in concealment with its 
cloak of ignorance. Exposure to the rays of en¬ 
lightenment is the primary and essential factor. It 
is of course beneficial to the health, also well and 


Conclusions to Part Three 


283 


good for conventional reasons that we clothe our 
nudity of body and purity of soul with modesty, 
but why not inaugurate the magnanimous and 
magnificent mantle, “knowledge,” of proper pro¬ 
portions and necessary fundamentals, in place of 
the remnants of rags and tags of the cloak of 
yesterday, which was once upon a time, well fitted 
and quite comfortable, but has served its day of 
usefulness. The crazy-quilt patch-work which has 
been done to save its reputation, now identify it 
as a fabric of shoddy, having deteriorated into 
gaudy pretentions, slovenly habits, elusive acts, 
equivocation, imitation, substitution, lewdness and 
vice in its many forms. A strong remonstrance 
with youth relative to the ravages of disease will 
surely carry forceful convictions, if we would cope 
with the extravagant drama of grotesqueness, por¬ 
traying as it does in the every day walk of life of 
the present era, the capability of human extremes 
and exorbitance now rampant in society, claiming 
its victims of sacrifice one by one on its altars of 
repentance, day after day. No doubt these cir¬ 
cumstances endure as a result of the signs of the 
times or perhaps, the irony of fate, which may be 
termed as, “a series of reactions,” necessary in the 
cycle of life; ultimately terminating in the long 
sought Millennium. 

Neither, the incessant wail, of the low 
bleak winds, from the great waste, and 
desolate regions, in the frozen North. 

Nor the stolid stillness, of the cold¬ 
ness, and chill, from the vast fields of 
ice and snow in the frigid Antarctic. 


284 The Millennium and Medical Science 


Nor the parch drought, of the sandy 
desert lands, wrought by the yearly 
constant scorching, of the Sun’s rays. 

Nor the earth’s quaking, with its great 
temblors and terremotos, causing chaos, 
havoc and destruction in its wake. 

Nor the wroth and fury, of typhoons and 
hurricanes, with their raging torrents 
of water and threatening heavy gale. 

Nor stalking death, from a dreadful 
famine and the coming of pestilence, 
in times of want and dire distress. 

Nor the mired swale of ignorance and 
ignominy, in its low state, with its 
loud railing, for undue recognition. 

Nor claptrap quackery, of charlatanism, 
in its several forms of deception and 
veneer pretensions of artificial work. 

None Can nor Will, destroy the 
outgrowth of Truth and Fact, in any 
field of scientific research Work. 

Which will Endure, for all time, 
during the life of man, an essential 
Need and Aid to All Humanity. 


ADDENDUM 


THE BEGINNING 
AND 

ENDING OF LIFE 


The Author’s Theory 




CHAPTER XVII 

PRELUDE TO THEORY 


“E pluribus unnum; conjunctis viribus” 

(Out of many one; with united powers.) 

P HILOSOPHY, from the Greek, “fond of” and 
“wisdom,” is a general term, whose meaning 
and scope have varied very considerably accord¬ 
ing to the usage of different authors and different 
ages. The earliest “philosophers” or “physiolo- 
gers,” had occupied themselves chiefly with what 
we may call cosmology; the one question which 
covers everything for them is that of the under¬ 
lying substance of the world around them, and 
they essay to answer this question, so to speak, by 
simple inspection. Plato, in a happy moment, 
styled the philosopher as, the man who takes a 
“synoptic” or comprehensive view of the universe 
as a whole. The aim of philosophy (whether 
fully attainable or not) is to exhibit the universe 
as a rational system in the harmony of all its 
parts; and accordingly the philosopher refuses to 
consider the parts out of their relation to the 
whole whose parts they are. 

It has been said, the world is not a collection 
of individual facts existing side by side and capa¬ 
ble of being known separately. A fact is nothing 
except in relation to other facts; and as these 
relations are multiplied in the progress of knowl¬ 
edge the nature of the so-called fact is indefinitely 
modified. Moreover, every statement of fact in¬ 
volves certain general notions and theories, so that 
286 


Prelude to Theory 


287 


the “facts” of the separate science cannot be stated 
except in terms of the conceptions or hypotheses 
which are assumed by the particular science. Thus 
mathematics assumes space as an existent infinite, 
without investigating in what sense the existence 
or the infinity of this “Unding,” as Kant called it, 
can be asserted. In the same way physics may be 
said to assume the notion of material atoms and 
forces. These and similar assumptions are ulti¬ 
mate presuppositions or working hypotheses for 
the sciences themselves. But it is the office of 
philosophy, as a theory of knowledge, to submit 
such conceptions to a critical analysis, with a view 
to discover how far they can be “thought out,” or 
how far, when this is done, they refute themselves, 
and call for a different form of statement, if they 
are to be taken as a statement of the ultimate 
nature of the real. 

The sciences, one and all, deal with a world of 
objects, but the ultimate fact, as we know it, is 
the existence of an object for a subject. Subject- 
object, knowledge, or, more widely, self-conscious¬ 
ness with its implicates; this unity in duality is the 
ultimate aspect which reality presents. It has gen¬ 
erally been considered, therefore, as constituting 
in a special sense the problem of philosophy. 
Philosophy may be said to be the explication of 
what is involved in this relation, or, in Kantian 
phraseology, a theory of its possibility. We may 
view knowledge as mere subjective function, but 
it has its full meaning only as it is taken to repre¬ 
sent what we may call objective fact, or is such 
as is named (in different circumstances) real, 
valid, true. 


288 The Millennium and Medical Science 


It has been written, “Woman shall bear her 
child into the world in pain and sorrow,” and so 
it was in the beginning, and so it has been, to the 
present day; as we understand it, this offspring 
thus begotten, is “the beginning of life.” Also, we 
find written, “Remember, man, thou art but dust 
and into dust thou shalt return,” and so it was in 
the beginning, and so it has been, from time un¬ 
known to the present day; this has been accepted 
as the end of man, and as we understand it, is the 
“ending of life.” No one has ever come forward 
to prove that “the beginning” or “the ending” of 
life is otherwise; that it is true or that it is untrue; 
we therefore accept that which has been written, 
as the truth, so far as our present day knowledge 
is concerned. 

Of late years we have learned many things 
about our material world and its environment. In 
recent years the following question has been asked 
many times. “Are we, or, are we not, in a better 
position in life, menially, physically, morally and 
socially, than were our ancestors of the stone age 
period?” This question has caused much con¬ 
fusion and controversy, and so far as we know, is 
still a bone of contention. 

In the stone age, men did live and die, and the 
worms did eat them while they rotted in their 
graves;—in some instances the insects, birds, or 
lower animals did consume the flesh of the dead 
body—so it was from the beginning and so it has 
been to the present day; provided, however, that 
our men of today be not rotten—primarily, rotten 
morally and socially and secondarily, as a con¬ 
sequence of an egregious nature, mentally and 


Prelade to Theory 


289 


physically—before they die, and just half live or 
exist, crawling about, in a body which is in reality 
only a shell, until the end comes. 

While it is necessary—even with our vast 
amount of present day knowledge—to set aside as 
unknowable any true or accurate definition of 
“life” or, “death” or, in other words, to come out 
in the open and admit the truth of man’s ignor¬ 
ance, relative to the questions, what is “life” and 
what is “death” or what is “the beginning and 
ending of life,” and, whence came this combined 
power to man while he lives;—to hear, to see, to 
smell, to taste, to feel, to reason, to love, to live, 
and to die;—he has (at birth) invested himself 
(presumably by a process of evolution) with a 
mighty aegis, that with which, no other thing on 
earth can compare, and, whence goes, this com¬ 
bination of powers, when he dies? (It being taken 
for granted that to die is indeed a power; if we 
did not die but continued to grow old, what hor¬ 
rible things, misshapen and decrepit, might we 
ultimately become!) 

It is within the realm of reason to assume that 
man upon earth will, some day in the near or 
far future, discover this fundamental principle, in 
“its beginning” and “its ending,” at least, to the 
extent of learning those things relative to the 
“methods and means” of the underlying principles, 
sufficiently well enough to teach the generations 
of the future how to “begin” a life, how to “live” 
a life, and how “not” to “end” a life; all of which 
should be intelligent and righteous in all its re¬ 
quirements of original conception; healthy and 
beautiful in its beginning upon earth; good, true 


19 


290 The Millennium and Medical Science 

and happy during its existence; contented at its 
coming end, eagerly looking forward with a gen¬ 
eral satisfaction to go. 

“O, may I join the choir invisible 
Of those immortal dead who live again 
In minds made better by their presence; live 
In pulses stirred to generosity, 

In deeds of daring rectitude, in scorn 
For miserable aims that end with self, 

In thoughts sublime that pierce the night 
like stars, 

And with their mild persistence urge 
man’s search 
To vaster issues.” 

—George Eliot. 

Having come our earthly way, performed the 
duties and fulfilled the missions pertaining to the 
several mandatory functions, the future genera¬ 
tions will pass on (as we will do and as did our 
ancestors); but their lives shall surely be more 
wholesome. 

This strictly theoretical version, of that sub¬ 
ject matter which is termed unknowable in the 
language of today, may prove to be a recognized 
study in the world of science of the tomorrow. 
For those who are interested and now groping in 
the dark, seeking some light in this direction, this 
theory will indeed be some food for thought. 
There are several points worthy of consideration, 
because it is always from one of these purely 
visionary sayings or writings that the truly original 
conception of any knowledge or science is born; 
call it initiative conception, inventive genius, crea¬ 
tive mental capacity or call it what you will. 


Prelude to Theory 


291 


Whenever there is advanced any new theory, 
it is received, as a rule, by the people in general, 
as a launched avalanche of hocus-pocus and hoity- 
toity; there is little surprise but much public gos¬ 
sip and apparently it is the signal for all manner 
of timely jest. In this respect we of today have 
not changed much from the days of long ago; 
but it is easy to ridicule any apparently quixotic 
theory. After much bantering and battering, dur¬ 
ing the game of battledore and shuttlecock, which 
is sure to follow, there usually is left but very 
little of the original theory and the remaining 
shreds, which may justly be called “the remains,” 
are buried deep by the group of opposition. The 
dogmatism of the old schools, on any subject— 
wherever this power is still in control—are ready 
and willing at all times, to persecute and prosecute 
any and all originators, as well as their ideas; 
this happens in the every day walk of life, even 
in our own modern industries and commercial 
world. 

In the practice of medicine, every now and 
then, some new theory of apparent worth and im¬ 
port is advocated; the vast majority of people in 
these instances seem to overlook two essential 
factors. First, has the theory been advanced by a 
recognized authority on the subject and do other 
learned men, on the same subject, share these 
views? Second, what is the nature and ultimate 
object of the new theory? When the first factor 
is gone over and proven to be in the affirmative, 
those who are arrogant in purpose or ignorant as 
to the subject matter, would do well to hold their 
peace. When the second factor is looked into and 


292 The Millennium and Medical Science 

found to contain points which are for the good 
and betterment of the human family then, why in 
the name of common sense, hamper and hinder its 
progress? It is of course understood, that in many 
instances, the first factor in question is a self- 
appointed prognosticator who is in reality nothing 
more or less than a quack or nature faker and the 
second factor in these types of cases is plainly 
evident as being, purely of mercenary purpose. 
These cases should be investigated and if physi¬ 
cally possible, they should be exposed in their 
true light. 

The author of this work first met Dr. Maxi¬ 
milian J. Herzog in the year of 1913. A short time 
thereafter the writer was appointed as one of the 
many assistants to Dr. Herzog, beginning at the 
bottom of the ladder in the laboratory; washing 
test-tubes, making culture media and doing the 
many chores such as are necessary in and about 
every laboratory where practical and scientific 
work is carried on pertaining to the study of Bac¬ 
teriology and Pathology, in all its branches. By 
degrees the writer was promoted until the year 
1917 when he became the personal assistant to Dr. 
Herzog, who at the time of his death, on August 9, 
1918, was working on the so-called Enzymes, the 
writer being close by him until the last hour. 

The initial notes were made, or the preliminary 
foundation of this work was begun about the 
beginning of the year 1918 when the writer had 
learned enough about the study of medicine and 
surgery, also research work, to notice the lack of 
knowledge or the want of knowledge in the field 
of “transplantation of organs.” About the same 


Prelude to Theory 


293 


time, or soon thereafter, the writer became inter¬ 
ested in the study of the “internal secretions,” 
or the products of the “Endocrine” glands. These 
thoughts were the starting points, leading to clini¬ 
cal and research work in these fields of endeavor, 
including reading, writing, observation, experi¬ 
ments and experience of earnest exertion and ex¬ 
tensive study. It may therefore be seen that the 
time consumed in preparation of this book has 
covered a period of about five years. 

This association and study is largely responsi¬ 
ble for the advancing of this theory. In so doing, 
however, it should be understood, that this theory 
is only intended as an idea of speculative value 
for the future, or an assumed hypothesis for future 
investigation, it being only partially based upon 
modern discovery, practical demonstration, con¬ 
clusive evidence and late proven facts, in the field 
of clinical medicine with its allied subjects, includ¬ 
ing laboratory and scientific research work. 

The theory involves many subjects and in¬ 
cludes the many angles to these subjects. First, 
the life of vegetation, its apparent origin, vital 
constitution and general make-up; its function, re¬ 
production and use, relative to the life of the 
human. Second, the chemical elements and its 
many combinations of composition; their essential 
need in the sustaining of the life of all humanity. 
Third, cell life, in the human being and in other 
forms or manifestations of life; cell production or 
proliferation and the cell function in different or¬ 
gans in the human body; the need of cell life in 
the human being and its necessity to the reproduc¬ 
tion and development in the life of the human. 


294 The Millennium and Medical Science 


Fourth, the many forms of bacterial life (their 
apparent origin and the important factors in¬ 
volved in their reproduction), their useful and 
practical value in some instances and their detri¬ 
mental effects,—in other instances,—to the human 
family. Fifth, the apparent essential primary 
factors or the elementary substance (the so-called 
“granules” or “minute bodies” involved) in the 
reproduction or propagation of the human race. 
The origin of these factors and their apparent 
intrinsic value of their seeming importance are an 
absolute requisite in the primary contribution 
towards the promotion and developing of the ori¬ 
gin or the “beginning of the human life,” with its 
apparently prearranged affiliations of a clandes¬ 
tine nature; when viewed from another angle, 
this apparently deep laid plot of intrigue, with its 
defiance of detection (by the human intelligence), 
is without doubt, really and truly, the simple law 
of all nature, to-wit: the natural inclination of 
the positive for the negative; or the powerful force 
of affinity, or that known and admitted attraction 
which draws all positives and negatives together. 
Many times this occurs against the will of the posi¬ 
tive or the negative or both, and in the nature of 
the human it often occurs; when they sometimes 
commit an act, knowing full well it is contrary to 
their better judgment and one or both of the parti¬ 
cipants would gladly fore-go this common act—an 
act which may prove to be an ordeal of serious 
consequences, socially or physically or both—and 
they will therefore attempt to fight off the act 
itself, but there are times when efforts to do so 
are of no avail. This is the call of attraction, or 


Prelude to Theory 


295 


the hidden force of affinity, or the natural inclina¬ 
tion of “Absolute” or “Infinite” or “Ever Existing” 
law, namely, the force of attraction which draws 
the “positive and negative” together. The human 
mind, or will, or body has no power to control, or 
means to combat, or knowledge to defeat this law; 
it could not be otherwise; if it were, the world 
would have been depopulated long ago. 

The term “Empire” is defined, as a state or 
union of states, governed by an emperor; or it 
may be designated as any wide and supreme do¬ 
minion. It is from the Latin “Imperium” or “do¬ 
minion,” meaning rule or power. In the Latin we 
find written “imperium in imperis” and when we 
translate it, it reads, “empire within empire.” 
Could there be a more concise definition,—pro¬ 
nounced by the word of mouth or written by 
human hand—to express those apparent constitu¬ 
ents and conditions consisting of the thousand-fold 
cell-life, in its numerous variety of forms and 
activity, now existing within the different organs, 
contained within the human body, of every indi¬ 
vidual. 

There must, indeed, be a strange clandestine 
dominion,—being continually carried on, among 
these wonderful “minute bodies,” in the bio- 
physio-chemo-metabolic process and its endless 
chain of domination by intimate intercourse, by 
the way of the blood stream—amounting to a mar¬ 
velous method of construction and a far-reaching 
ruling power, contained within the empire of this 
group of ductless or so-called endocrine glands 
(within the human) and again contained within 
this physical endocrine empire of these glands, an 


296 The Millennium and Medical Science 

empire of these “minute bodies” (factors) or so- 
called hormones. 

The apparent function of these “minute bodies” 
(factors in the cycle of human life) are first, to 
procreate themselves; second, to generate cell life; 
and third, to bring into existence a human “being;” 
this may justly be termed “the beginning of human 
life;” then to protect and preserve the life of the 
“being” and at the same time to give (by a secret 
system of previous preparation of the “being,” 
which is known only to these factors) to the 
“being” at the proper time (at the age of puberty) 
the powers of reproduction. In many instances 
when these factors disappear in large numbers, 
from any organ, or from the human body as a 
whole,—the reasons or causes being many—it ap¬ 
parently spells the doom of the organ, also per¬ 
haps, the doom of the individual possessing such 
organs, and may be justly termed, “the ending of 
the human life.” For the present and for the want 
of a more appropriate name, we may term these 
ideas “The Gengemmule Theory.” 


CHAPTER XVIII 


BASIS FOR THEORY 

“Ex nihilo nihil fit” 

(Out of nothing nothing is made) 

I N the advancing or advocation of any theory, it 
is necessary that there be, at the very beginning, 
a resonable foundation to support its arguments 
and claims, or, at least a basis of contention 
wherein there is contained an ingredient of tangi¬ 
bility, perceptible (to the average individual) by 
touch or by the senses. The writer will therefore 
attempt to launch his theory, resting upon known 
facts of an indisputable character and of an ap¬ 
parently true nature; embodying these funda¬ 
mental principles and underlying facts (principles 
and facts as recognized by the leading institutions, 
the world over, in the legitimate practice known 
as, the “science of medicine”), there will be found 
as a basis, what proposes to be in the near future, 
a new science “Endocrinology.” At the present 
time this study or new science is finding much 
favor and deserving promotion in the medical 
world, because of recent discoveries and revela¬ 
tions as a result of much study and investigation 
in the field of scientific research. 

The “science of medicine,” as we understand 
it, has for its province the treatment of disease. 
The term “medicine” (from the Latin, medicina; 
the art of healing, from mederi, to heal), may be 
used very widely,—especially so when we include 
“pathology” (the science of the cause and effect 
297 


298 The Millennium and Medical Science 

of disease, especially in the human) with its many 
allied and far reaching subjects essentially in¬ 
volved therein—or very narrowly, to mean only 
the drug or form of remedy prescribed by the 
physician (this being, properly speaking, a lone 
subject, therapeutics or pharmacology and is con¬ 
sidered the important thing by most one-sided 
systems of treatment), but it is very necessary that 
we keep the wider and more comprehensive mean¬ 
ing in view. 

Disease (pathology) is the correlative of health, 
and the word is not capable of a more penetrating 
definition. From the time of Galen, however, it 
has been usual to speak of the life of the body 
either as proceeding in accordance with nature or 
as overstepping the bounds of nature. Taking dis¬ 
ease to be a deflexion from the line of health, the 
first requisite of medicine is an extensive and inti¬ 
mate acquaintance with the norm of the body. The 
structure and functions of the body form the sub¬ 
ject of Anatomy and Physiology. 

The medical art divides itself into departments 
and sub-departments. The most fundamental 
division is into internal and external medicine, or 
into medicine proper and surgery. The treatment 
of wounds, injuries and deformities, with opera¬ 
tive interference in general, is the special depart¬ 
ment of surgical practice (the corresponding parts 
of pathology, including inflammation, repair, and 
removable tumors, are sometimes grouped to¬ 
gether as surgical pathology); and where the work 
of the profession is highly subdivided, surgery be¬ 
comes the exclusive province of the surgeon, while 
internal medicine remains to the physician. 


Basis for Theory 


299 


In the state of society pictured by Homer it is 
clear that medicine has already had a history. We 
find a distinct and organized profession; we find 
a system of treatment, especially in regard to in¬ 
juries, which it must have been the work of long 
experience to frame; we meet with a nomenclature 
of parts of the body substantially the same (ac¬ 
cording to Daremberg) as that employed long 
afterwards in the writings of Hippocrates; in 
short, we find a science and an organization which, 
however imperfect as compared with those of later 
times, are yet very far from being in their 
beginning. 

It is only from non-medical writers that any¬ 
thing is known of the development of medicine in 
Greece before the age of Hippocrates. The elabo¬ 
rate collections made by Daremberg of medical 
notices in the poets and historians illustrate the 
relations of the professions to society, but do little 
to prepare for the Hippocratic period. Nor is 
much importance to be attached to the influence 
of the philosophical sects on medicine except as 
regards the school of Pythagoras. That philoso¬ 
pher and several of his successors were physi¬ 
cians, but we do not know in what relation they 
stood to later medical schools. We must therefore 
hasten onward to the age of Pericles, in which 
Hippocrates, already called “the Great,” was in 
medicine as complete a representative of the high¬ 
est efforts of the Greek intellect as were his con¬ 
temporaries the great philosophers, orators, and 
tragedians. The medical art as we now practice 
it, the character of the physician as we now 
understand it, both date for us from Hippocrates. 


300 The Millennium and Medical Science 


The justification of this statement is found in the 
literary collection of writings known by his name. 

The first grand characteristic of Hippocratic 
medicine is the high conception of the duties and 
status of the physician, shown in the celebrated 
“Oath of Hippocrates” and elsewhere—equally free 
from the mysticism of a priesthood and the vulgar 
pretensions of mercenary craft. So matured a pro¬ 
fessional sentiment may perhaps have been more 
the growth of time and organization than the work 
of an individual genius, but certainly corresponds 
with the character universally attributed to Hip¬ 
pocrates himself. The second great quality is 
singular artistic skill and balance with which the 
Hippocratic physician used such materials and 
tools as he possessed. The actual science of the 
Hippocratic school was of course very limited. In 
anatomy and physiology little advance had been 
made, and so of pathology in the sense of an ex¬ 
planation of morbid processes or knowledge of 
diseased structures there could be very little. The 
most valuable intellectual possession was a large 
mass of recorded observations in individual cases 
and epidemics of disease. Whether these observa¬ 
tions were systematic or individual, and how they 
were recorded, are points of which we are quite 
ignorant, as the theory that the votive tablets in 
the temples supplied such materials must be 
abandoned. 

After Hippocrates the progress of medicine in 
Greece does not call for any special remark at this 
time, but mention must be made of one great 
name. Though none of Aristotle’s writings are 
strictly medical, he has by his researches in 


Basis for Theory 


301 


anatomy and physiology contributed greatly to the 
progress of medicine. The century after the death 
of Hippocrates is a time almost blank in medical 
annals. It is probable that the science, like others, 
shared in the general intellectual decline of Greece 
after the Macedonian supremacy; but the works of 
physicians of the period are almost entirely lost, 
and were so, even in the time of Galen. Galen 
classes them all as the dogmatic school; but, what¬ 
ever may have been their characteristics, they are 
of no importance in the history of the science. 

The dispersion of the Greek science and intel¬ 
lectual activity through the world by the conquests 
of Alexander and his successors led to the forma¬ 
tion of more than one learned center, in which 
medicine among other sciences was represented. 
Pergamum was early distinguished for its medical 
school; but in this as in other respects its reputa¬ 
tion was ultimately effaced by the more brilliant 
fame of Alexandria. It is here that the real con¬ 
tinuation and development of Hippocratic medi¬ 
cine can be traced. In one department the Alex¬ 
andrian school rapidly surpassed its Greek original 
—namely, in the study of anatomy. The dissection 
of the human body, of which some doubtful traces 
of hints only are found in Greek times, was assidu¬ 
ously carried out, being favored or even suggested 
perhaps by the Egyptian custom of disemboweling 
and embalming the bodies of the dead. There is 
no doubt that the organs were also examined by 
opening the bodies of living persons—criminals 
condemned to death being given over to the anato¬ 
mists for this purpose. 

If we look at the work of the Alexandrian 


302 The Millennium and Medical Science 

schools in medicine as a whole, we must admit 
that the progress made was great and permanent. 
The greatest service rendered to medicine was un¬ 
doubtedly the systematic study of anatomy. It 
is clear that the knowledge of function (physi¬ 
ology) did not by any means keep pace with the 
knowledge of structure, and this was probably the 
reason why the important sect of the empirics 
were able entirely to dispense with anatomical 
knowledge. The doctrines of Hippocrates, though 
lightly thought of by the Erasistrateans, still were 
no doubt very widely accepted, but the practice of 
the Hippocratic school had been greatly improved 
in almost every department—surgery and obstet¬ 
rics being probably those in which the Alexandrian 
practitioners could compare most favorably with 
those of modern times. We have now to trace the 
fortunes of this body of medical doctrine and 
practice when transplanted to Rome, and ulti¬ 
mately to the whole Roman world. The Romans 
cannot be said to have at any time originated or 
possessed an independent school of medicine. 
They had from early times a very complicated sys¬ 
tem of superstitious medicine, or religion, related 
to disease and the cure of disease, borrowed, as 
in thought, from the Etruscans; and, though the 
saying of Pliny that the Roman people got on for 
six hundred years without doctors was doubtless 
an exaggeration, and not, literally speaking, exact, 
it must be accepted for the broad truth which it 
contains. When a medical profession appears, it is, 
so far as we are able to trace it, as an importation 
from Greece. 

We now come to the writer who, above all 


Basis for Theory 


303 


others, gathered up into himself the divergent and 
scattered threads of ancient medicine, and out of 
whom again the greater part of modern European 
medicine has flowed. Galen was a man furnished 
with all the anatomical, medical and philosophical 
knowledge of his time; he had studied all kinds of 
natural curiosities, and had stood in near relation 
to important political events; he possessed enor¬ 
mous industry, great practical sagacity and un¬ 
bounded literary fluency. He had, in fact, every 
quality necessary for an encyclopedic writer or 
even for a literary and professional autocrat. He 
found the medical profession of his time split up 
into a number of sects, medical science confounded 
under a multitude of dogmatic systems, the social 
status and normal integrity of physicians degraded. 
He appears to have made it his object to reform 
these evils, to reconcile scientific acquirements and 
practical skill, to bring back the unity of medicine 
as it had been understood by Hippocrates, at the 
same time to raise the dignity of medical prac¬ 
titioners. 

The rise of the Mahommedan Empire which 
influenced Europe so deeply both politically and 
intellectually, made its mark also in the history 
of medicine. In medical as in civil history there 
is no real break. A continuous thread of learning 
and practice must have connected the last period 
of Roman medicine already mentioned with the 
dawn of science in the middle ages. But the intel¬ 
lectual thread is naturally traced with greater 
difficulty than that which is the theme of civil 
history; and in periods such as that from the 5th 
to the 10th century in Europe it is almost lost. 


304 The Millennium and Medical Science 

About the middle of the 11th century the Arabian 
medical writers began to be known by Latin trans¬ 
lations in the Western world. The impulse which 
all departments of intellectual activity received 
from the revival of Greek literature in Europe was 
felt by medicine among the rest. Not that the 
spirit of the science, or of its corresponding prac¬ 
tice, was at once changed. The basis of medicine 
through the middle ages had been literary and 
dogmatic, and it was literary and dogmatic still; 
but the medical literature now brought to light— 
including as it did the more important works of 
Hippocrates and Galen, many of them hitherto un¬ 
known, and in addition, the forgotten element of 
Latin medicine, especially the work of Celsus— 
was in itself far superior to the second-hand com¬ 
pilations and incorrect versions which had form¬ 
erly been accepted as standards. The classical 
works, though still regarded with unreasoning 
reverence, were found to have a germinative and 
vivifying power that carried the mind out of the 
region of dogma, and prepared the way for the 
scientific movement which has been growing in 
strength up to our own day. 

The arrival of Galenic and Hippocratic medi¬ 
cine, though ultimately it conferred the greatest 
benefits on medical sciences, did not immediately 
produce any important salutary reform in practi¬ 
cal medicine. The standard of excellence in the 
ancient writers was indeed far above the level of 
the 16th century; but the fatal habit of taking at 
second hand what should have been acquired by 
direct observation retarded progress more than 
the possession of better models assisted it, so that 


Basis for Theory 


305 


the fundamental faults of mediaeval science re¬ 
mained uncorrected. Nevertheless some progress 
has to be recorded, even if not due directly to the 
study of the ancient medicine. In the first place 
the 15th and 16th centuries were notable for the 
outbreak of certain epidemic diseases which were 
unknown to the old physicians. The spread of 
syphilis, a disease equally unknown to the ancients, 
and the failure of Galen’s remedies to cure it, had 
a similar effect. In another direction the founda¬ 
tions of modern medicine were being laid during 
the 16th century—namely, by the introduction of 
clinical instruction in hospitals. Inspections of 
the dead, to ascertain the nature of the disease, 
were made, though not without difficulty, and thus 
the modern period of the science of morbid 
anatomy was ushered in. At the same time the 
discovery of new diseases, unknown to the 
ancients, and the keener attention which the great 
epidemics of plague caused to be paid to those 
already known, led to more minute study of the 
natural history of disease. The medicine of the 
early 17th century presents no features to dis¬ 
tinguish it from that of the preceding century. 

In looking back on the repeated attempts in the 
18th century to construct a universal system of 
medicine, it is impossible not to regret the waste 
of brilliant gifts and profound acquirements which 
they involved. It was fortunate, however, that 
the accumulation of positive knowledge in medi¬ 
cine did not cease. While Germany and Scotland, 
as the chief homes of abstract speculation, gave 
birth to most of the theories, progress in objective 
science was most marked in other countries—in 


20 


306 The Millennium and Medical Science 


Italy first, and afterwards in England and France. 
The reform of medicine in France must be dated 
from the great intellectual awakening caused by 
the Revolution, but more definitely starts with the 
researches in anatomy and physiology. The 
progress of medicine in England during this period 
displays the same characteristics as at other times, 
viz., a gradual and uninterrupted development 
without startling changes such as are caused by 
the sudden rise or fall of a new school. Darwin’s 
work shows, however, the tendency to connect 
medicine with physical science, which was an im¬ 
mediate consequence of the scientific discoveries 
of the end of the 18th century, when Priestley and 
Cavendish in England exercised the same influence 
as Lavoisier in France. The English school of 
medicine also was profoundly stirred by the teach¬ 
ings of the two brothers William and John Hunter, 
especially the latter—who must therefore be briefly 
mentioned, though their own researches were 
chiefly concerned with subjects lying a little out¬ 
side the limits of this sketch. William Hunter 
(1718-1783) was known in London as a brilliant 
teacher of anatomy and successful obstetric physi¬ 
cian; his younger brother and pupil, John Hunter 
(1728-1793), was also a teacher of anatomy, and 
practised as a surgeon. His immense contribu¬ 
tions to anatomy and pathology cannot be esti¬ 
mated here, but his services in stimulating re¬ 
search and training investigators belong to the 
history of general medicine. They are sufficiently 
evidenced by the fact that Edward Jenner and 
Matthew Raillie were his pupils. The same scien¬ 
tific bent is seen in the greater attention paid to 


Basis for Theory 


307 


morbid anatomy (which dates from Baillie) and 
the more scientific method of studying diseases. 
Of the other countries of Europe, it is now only 
necessary to mention Germany. Here the chief 
home of positive medicine was still for a long time 
Vienna, where the “new Vienna school” con¬ 
tinued and surpassed the glory of the old. In 
recent times the positive bent of modern knowl¬ 
edge and methods in other spheres of science and 
thought, and especially in biology, has influenced 
medicine profoundly. Minuter accuracy of obser¬ 
vation was inculcated by the labors and teaching 
of the great anatomists of the 17th century; and, 
for modern times, experimental physiology was 
instituted by Harvey, anatomy having done little 
to interpret life in its dynamic aspects. 

The character of modern medicine cannot be 
summed up in a word, as, with more or less apt¬ 
ness, that of some previous periods may be. Modern 
medicine, like modern science, is as boldly specu¬ 
lative as it has been in any age, and yet it is as 
observant as in any naturalistic period; its success 
lies in the addition to those qualities of the method 
of verification; the fault of previous times being 
not the activity of the speculative faculty, without 
which no science can be fertile, but the lack of 
methodical reference of all and sundry proposi¬ 
tions, and parts of propositions, to the test 
of experiment. In no department is the ex¬ 
perimental method more continually justified 
than in that of the natural history of disease, 
which at first sight would seem to have a cer¬ 
tain independence of it and a somewhat exclu¬ 
sive value of its own. Hippocrates had no oppor- 


308 The Millennium and Medical Science 

tunity of verification by necropsy, and Sydenham 
ignored pathology; yet the clinical features of 
many but recently described diseases, such, for 
example, as that named after Graves, and myxoe- 
dema, both associated with perversions of the thy¬ 
roid gland, lay as open to the eye of physicians in 
the past as to our own. Thus it was, partly because 
the habit of acceptance of authority, waning but 
far from extirpated, dictated to the clinical ob¬ 
server what he should see; partly because the eye 
of the clinical observer lacked that special train¬ 
ing which the habit and influence of experimental 
verification alone can give, that physicians, even 
acute and practiced physicians, failed to see many 
and many symptomatic series which went through 
its evolutions conspicuously enough, and needed 
for its appreciation no unknown aids or methods 
of research, nor any further advances of pathology. 
We see now that the practice of the experimental 
method endows with a new vision both the experi¬ 
menter himself and, through his influence, those 
who are associated with him in medical science, 
even if these be not themselves actually engaged 
in experiment; a new discipline is imposed upon 
old faculties, as is seen as well in other sciences 
as in those on which medicine more directly de¬ 
pends. And it is not only the perceptons of eye or 
ear which tell, but also the association of con¬ 
cepts behind these adits of the mind. It was the 
concepts derived from the many experimental 
methods of earnest investigators which brought 
about new facilities for necropsies, also discoveries 
in morbid anatomy and histology began to pile 
upon us, thereby creating an awakening of new 


Basis for Theory 


309 


thought. If at first in the 18th century, and earlier 
19th, the discoveries in this branch of medical 
knowledge had a certain isolation, due perhaps to 
the prepossessions of the school of Sydenham, 
they soon became the property of the physician, 
and were brought into coordination with the 
clinical phenomena of disease. The great Mor¬ 
gagni, the founder of morbid anatomy, himself set 
the example of carrying on this study parallel with 
clinical observation; and always insisted that the 
clinical story of the case should be brought side by 
side with the revelations of the necropsy. In 
pathology, indeed, Virchow’s (1821-1902) influence 
in the transfiguration of this branch of science 
may almost be compared to that of Darwin and 
Pasteur in their respective domains. In the last 
quarter of the 19th century the conception grew 
clearer that morbid anatomy for the most part 
demonstrates disease in its static aspects only, and 
also for the most part in the particular aspect 
of final demolition; and it became manifest as 
pathology and clinical medicine became more and 
more thoroughly integrated, that the processes 
which initiate and are concerned in this dissolu¬ 
tion were not revealed by the scalpel. 

Again, the physician as naturalist, though 
stimulated by the pathologist to delineate disease 
in its fuller manifestations, yet was hampered in 
a measure by the didactic method of constructing 
“types” which should command the attention of 
the disciple and rivet themselves on his memory; 
thus too often those incipient and transitory 
phases which initiate the paths of dissolution were 
missed. Not only so, but the physician, thus 


310 The Millennium and Medical Science 

fascinated by the “types,” and impressed by the 
silent monuments of the pathological museum was 
led to localize disease too much, to isolate the acts 
of nature, and to forget not only the continuity of 
the phases which lead up to the exemplary forms, 
or link them together, but to forget also that even 
between the types themselves relations of affinity 
must exist—and these often times none the less 
intimate for apparent diversities of form, for types 
of widely different form may be, and indeed often 
are, more closely allied than types which have 
more superficial resemblance—and to forget, more¬ 
over, how largely negative is the process of ab¬ 
straction by which types are imagined. Upon this 
too static a view, both of clinical type and of post¬ 
mortem-room pathology, came a despairing spirit, 
almost of fatalism, which in the contemplation of 
organic ruins lost the hope of cure of organic dis¬ 
eases. So prognosis became pessimistic, and the 
therapeutics of the abler men negative, until fresh 
hopes arose of stemming the tides of evil at their 
earliest flow. 

Such was medicine, statically ordered in path¬ 
ology, statically ordered in its clinical concepts, 
when, on the 24th of November 1859, the Origin of 
Species was published. It is no exaggeration to 
say that this epoch-making work brought to birth 
a world of conceptions as new as the work of 
Copernicus. For the natural philosopher the 
whole point of view of things was changed; in 
biology not only had the anthropocentric point of 
view been banished, but the ancient concept of 
perpetual flux was brought home to ordinary men, 
and entered for good into the framework of 


Basis for Theory 


311 


thought. Before Darwin—if the name of Darwin 
might be used to signify the transformation of 
thought of which he was the chief artificer— 
natural objects were regarded, not in medicine and 
pathology only, as a set of hidebound events; and 
natural operations as moving in fixed grooves, 
after a fashion which it is now difficult for us to 
realize. With the melting of the ice the more 
daring spirits dashed into the new current with 
such ardor that for them all traditions, all institu¬ 
tions were thrown into hotchpot; even elderly and 
sober physicians took enough of the infection to 
liberate their minds, and, in the field of the several 
diseases and in that of post-mortem pathology, 
the hollowness of classification by superficial re¬ 
semblance, the transitoriness of forms, and the 
flow of processes, broke upon the view. Thus it 
came about not only that classifications of disease 
based on superficial likeness—such as jaundice, 
dropsy, inflammation—were broken up, and their 
parts redistributed, but also that even more set 
diseases began to lose settlements, and were 
recognized as terms of series, as transitory or cul¬ 
minating phases of perturbations which might be 
traced to their origins, and in their earlier stages 
perhaps withstood. The doctrine of heredity in 
disease thus took a larger aspect; the view of 
morbid series was no longer bounded even by the 
life of the individual; and the propagation of 
taints, and of morbid varieties of man, from gen¬ 
eration to generation proved to be no mere repeti¬ 
tion of fixed features but even more frequently, 
to be modes of development or of dissolution 
betraying themselves often in widely dissimilar 


312 The Millennium and Medical Science 

forms, in series often extending over many lives, 
the terms of which at first sight had seemed wholly 
disparate. Thus, for example, as generations suc¬ 
ceed one another, nervous disorders appear in 
various guise; epilepsy, megrim, insanity, asthma, 
hysteria, neurasthenia, a mottley array at first 
sight, seemed to reveal themselves as terms of a 
morbid series; not only so, but certain disorders 
of other systems also might be members of the 
series, such as certain diseases of the skin, and 
even peculiar susceptibilities or immunities in 
respect of infections from without. On the other 
hand, inheritance was dismissed, or survived only 
as a “susceptibility,” in the case of tuberculosis, 
leprosy and some other maladies now recognized 
as infectious; while in others, as in syphilis, it was 
seen to consist in a translation of the infectious ele¬ 
ment from parent to offspring. These new concep¬ 
tions of multiplicity in unity of disease, and of the 
fluidity and continuity of morbid processes, might 
have led to vagueness and over-boldness in specu¬ 
lation and reconstruction, had not the experi¬ 
mental method been at hand with clues and tests 
for the several series. Of this method the rise and 
wonderful extension of the science of bacteriology 
also furnished no inconsiderable part. 

Meanwhile Cohnheim and Metchnikoff were 
engaged in destroying the ontological conception 
not of fever only, but also of inflammation, of 
which, as a local event, an ontological conception 
was no less strongly implanted. By his researches 
on the migration of the white corpuscles of the 
blood Cohnheim, on the bases laid by Virchow, 
brought the process of inflammation within the 


Basis for Theory 


313 


scope of the normal, seeing in them but a modifica¬ 
tion of normal processes under perturbations of 
relatively external incidence; even the formation 
of abscess was thus brought by him within the 
limits of perversion of process not differing es¬ 
sentially from those of health; and “new forma¬ 
tions,” “plastic exudations,” and other discontinu¬ 
ous origins of an “essential” pathology, fell into 
oblivion. 

Discovery in these various directions then led 
physicians to regard fever and inflammation not 
as separable entities, but as fluctuating symptom- 
groups, due to swervings of function from the nor¬ 
mal balance under contingent forces. As to such 
reforms in our conceptions of disease the advances 
of bacteriology profoundly contributed, so under 
the stress of consequent discoveries, almost prodi¬ 
gious in their extent and revolutionary effect, the 
conceptions of the etiology of disease underwent 
no less a transformation than the conceptions of 
disease itself. It is proper to point out here how 
intimately a pathology thus regenerated modified 
current conceptions of disease, in the linking of 
disease to oscillations of health, and the regarding 
many diseases as modifications of the normal set 
up by the impingement of external causes; not a 
few of which indeed may be generated within the 
body itself—“autogenetic poisoning.” The appre¬ 
ciation of such modifications, and of the working of 
such causes, has been facilitated greatly by the 
light thrown upon normal processes by advances 
in physiology; so dependent is each branch of 
knowledge upon the advances of contiguous and 
incident studies. 


314 The Millennium and Medical Science 

To biological chemistry we have been deeply 
indebted during the latter half of the 19th century. 
In 1872, Hoppe-Seyler (1825-1895) gave a new be¬ 
ginning to our knowledge of the chemistry of 
secretion and of excretion; and later students have 
increased the range of physiological and patho¬ 
logical chemistry by investigations not only into 
the several stages of albuminoid material and the 
transitions which all food-stuffs undergo in diges¬ 
tion, but even into the structure of protoplasm 
itself. Digestion, regarded not long ago as little 
more than a trituration and “coction” of ingesta to 
fit them for absorption and transfer them to the 
tissues, now appears as an elaboration of peptones 
and kindred intermediate products which, so far 
from being always bland, and mere bricks and 
mortar for repair or fuel for combustion, pass 
through phases of change during which they be¬ 
come so unfit for assimilation as to be positively 
poisonous. The formation of prussic acid at a 
certain period of the vital processes of certain 
plants may be given as an example of such phases; 
and poisons akin to muscarin seem to arise fre¬ 
quently in development or regression, both in ani¬ 
mals and plants. Thus the digestive function, in 
its largest sense, is now seen to consist, not only in 
preparation and supply, but in no small measure 
also of protective and antidotal conversions of the 
matters submitted to it; coincidently with agents 
of digestion proper are found in the circuit of 
normal digestion “anti-substances” which neu¬ 
tralize or convert peptones in their poisonous 
phases; an autochthonous ferment, such as ren¬ 
net for instance, calling forth an anti-rennet, and 


Basis for Theory 


315 


so on. Now as our own bodies thus manipulate 
substances poisonous and antidotal, if in every 
hour of health we are averting self-intoxication, 
so likewise are we concerned with the various in¬ 
truding organisms, whose processes of digestion 
are as dangerous as our own; if these destructive 
agents, which no doubt are incessantly gaining 
admission to our bodies, do not meet within us 
each its appropriate compensatory defensive 
agent, dissolution will begin. Thus, much of infec¬ 
tion and immunity are proving to be but special 
cases of digestion, and teleological conceptions of 
protective processes are modified. 

Under the name of chemotaxis (W. Pfeffer) 
are designated certain of the regulative adapta¬ 
tions by which such ends are attained. By chemical 
warnings the defensive processes seem to be awak¬ 
ened, or summoned; and when we think of the 
infinite variety of such possible phases, and of 
the multitude of corresponding defensive agents, 
we may form some dim notion of the complexity 
of the animal blood and tissues, and within them 
of the organic molecules. Even in normal circum¬ 
stances their play and counterplay, attractive and 
repellent, must be manifold almost beyond con¬ 
ception; for the body may be regarded as a col¬ 
lective organization consisting of a huge colony of 
microorganisms become capable of a common life 
by common and mutual arrangement and differ¬ 
entiation of function, and by toleration and utiliza¬ 
tion of each other’s peculiar products; some 
organs, such as the liver, for example, being 
credited with a special power of neutralizing 
poisons, whether generated under normal condi- 


316 The Millennium and Medical Science 


tions or under abnormal, which gain entrance 
from the intestinal tract. As a part of these dis¬ 
coveries has arisen another but kindred doctrine, 
that of hormones (Starling), or those juices pre¬ 
pared (within the body of every individual), not 
for excretion, not even for partial excretion, but 
for the fulfillment of physiological equilibrium. 
Thus the reciprocity of the various organs, main¬ 
tained throughout the divisions of physiological 
labor, is not merely a mechanical stability; it is 
also a mutual equilibration in functions incessantly 
at work on chemical levels, and on those levels 
of still higher complexity which seem to rise as 
far beyond chemistry as chemistry beyond physics. 
Not only are the secreted juices of specialized cells 
thus set one against another in the body, whereby 
the various organs of the body maintain a mutual 
play, but the blood itself also in its cellular and 
fluid parts contains elements potent in the de¬ 
struction of bacteria and of their secretions. Thus 
endowed, the blood, unless overwhelmed by 
extraordinary invasions, does not fail in stability 
and self-purification. So various are the condi¬ 
tions of self-regulation in various animals, both in 
respect of their peculiar and several modes of 
assimilating different foods, and of protecting 
themselves against particular dangers from with¬ 
out, that, as we might have expected, the bloods 
taken from different species, or even perhaps from 
different individuals, are found to be so divergent 
that the healthy serum of one species may be, and 
often is, poisonous to another; not so much in 
respect of adventitious substances, as because the 
phases of physiological change in different species 


Basis for Theory 


317 


do not harmonize; each by its peculiar needs has 
been modified until, in their several conditions of 
life, they vary so much about the mean as to have 
become almost if not quite alien one to another. 

In the preservation of immunity then, in its 
various degrees and kinds, not only is the 
chemistry of the blood to be studied, but also its 
histology. By his eminent labors in cellular 
pathology, Virchow, and Metchnikoff later, gave 
the last blow to the mere humoral pathology 
which, after an almost unchallenged prevalence 
for some two thousand years, now finds a resting- 
place only in our nurseries. Now the cellular 
pathology of blood, investigated by the aid of 
modern staining methods, is as important as that 
of the solid organs; no clinical investigator—in¬ 
deed, apart from research, no practitioner at this 
day—can dispense with examination of the blood 
for purposes of diagnosis; its coagulability and the 
kinds and the variations of the cells it contains 
being evidence of many definitely morbid states 
of the body. Again, not only in certain diseases 
may strange cells be found in the blood (e. g. in 
myelogenic leucaemia), but parasites also, both in 
man, as those of malaria, of sleeping sickness, of 
kala-azar, and in animals, as redwater, and Texas 
fever, have been discovered, to the great advan¬ 
tage of preventive medicine. For some of these, 
as redwater (pyrosoma), antidotes are already 
found; for others, as for Texas fever—of which 
the parasite is unknown, but the mode of its 
transmission, by the mosquito, discovered (Finlay- 
Reed)—preventive measures are reducing the 
prevalence. 


318 The Millennium and Medical Science 

It is obvious that the results of such advances 
prescribe for the clinical physician methods which 
cannot be pursued without expert assistance; a 
physician engaged in busy practice cannot him¬ 
self undertake even the verifications required in 
the conduct of individual cases. Skill in modern 
laboratory work is as far out of the reach of the 
untaught as performance on a musical instrument. 
In spite, therefore, of the encyclopedic tradition 
which has persisted from Aristotle through the 
Arab and mediaeval school down to Herbert 
Spencer, it is forced upon us in our own day that 
in a pursuit so many-sided as medicine, whether 
in its scientific or in its practical aspect, we have 
to submit more and more to that division of labor 
which has been a condition of advance in all 
other walks of life. It is now fully recognized that 
diseases of infants and children, of the insane, of 
the generative organs of women, of the larynx, of 
the eye have been brought successively into the 
light of modern knowledge by “specialists,” and by 
them distributed to the profession; and that in no 
other way could this end have been attained. That 
the division of labor, which may seem to dis¬ 
integrate the calling of the physician, really unites 
it, is well seen in the clinical laboratories which 
were initiated in the later 19th century, and which 
are destined to a great future. By the approach 
of skilled pathologists to the clinical wards, a link 
is forged between practitioners and the men of 
science who pursue pathology disinterestedly. The 
first clinical laboratory seems to have been that 
of Von Ziemssen (1829-1902) at Munich, founded 
in 1885; and, although his example has not yet 


Basis for Theory 


319 


been followed as it ought to have been, enough 
has been done in this way, to prove the vital im¬ 
portance of the system to the progress of modern 
medicine. 

That the methods and the subject-matter of 
surgery and of medicine are substantially the 
same, and that the advance of one is the advance 
of the other, the division being purely artificial 
and founded merely on accidents of personal bent 
and skill, must be insisted upon at this time of our 
history. The distinction was never a scientific one, 
even in the sense in which the word science can 
be used of the middle ages; it originated in social 
conceits and in the contempt for mechanical arts 
which came of the cultivation of “ideas” as op¬ 
posed to converse with “matter,” and which, in 
the dawn of modern methods, led to the derision 
of Boyle by Oxford humanists as one given up to 
“base and mechanical pursuits.” Had physicians 
been brought into contact with facts as hard as 
those faced by the surgeons of the 16th century 
their art would not have lain so long in degrada¬ 
tion. It is under this closer occupation with 
mechanical conditions that surgery today is said— 
not without excuse, but with no more than super¬ 
ficial truth—to have made more progress than 
medicine. Medicine and surgery are but two as¬ 
pects of one art; Pasteur shed light on both surgery 
and medicine, and when Lister, his disciple, pene¬ 
trated into the secrets of wound fevers and septi¬ 
caemia, he illuminated surgery and medicine alike, 
and, in the one sphere as in the other, cooperated 
in the destruction of the idea of “essential fevers” 
and of inflammation as an “entity.” Together, then, 


320 The Millennium and Medical Science 


with the necessary multiplication of specialism, 
one of the chief lessons of the latter moiety of the 
19th century was the unity of medicine in all its 
branches—a unity strengthened rather than weak¬ 
ened by special researches, such as those into 
“medical” and “surgical” pathology, which are 
daily making more manifest the absurdity of the 
distinction. Surgeons, physicians, oculists, laryng¬ 
ologists, gynaecologists, neurologists and the rest, 
all are working allotments of the same field, and 
combining to a common harvest. 

While pathology then, which is especially the 
“science of medicine,” was winning territory on 
one side from physiology, of which in sense it is 
but an aspect, and on another by making ground 
of its own in the post mortem room and museum 
of morbid anatomy, and was fusing these gains in 
the laboratory so as to claim for itself, as a special 
branch of science by virtue of peculiar concepts, 
its due place and provision—provision in the 
establishment of chairs and of special laboratories 
for its chemical and biological subdivisions— 
clinical medicine, by the formal provision of dis¬ 
ciplinary classes, was illustrating the truth of the 
experience that teaching and research must go 
hand-in-hand, the one reinforcing the other; that 
no teacher can be efficient unless he be engaged 
in research also; nay, that for the most part even 
the investigator needs the encouragement of dis¬ 
ciples. Yet it was scarcely until the last quarter 
of the 19th century that the apprenticeship sys¬ 
tem, which was a mere initiation into the art and 
mystery of a craft, was recognized as antiquated 
and, in its virtual exclusion of academic study. 


Basis for Theory 


321 


even mischievous. In place of it, systematic 
clinical classes have become a part of the scheme 
of every efficient school of medicine. A condition 
of this reform was the need of a preliminary 
training of the mind of the pupil in pure science, 
even in physics and chemistry; that is to say, be¬ 
fore introduction into his professional studies. 
The founding of new teaching universities, in 
which England, and even France, had been at 
some disadvantage as compared with Scotland 
and Germany, strengthened the movements in 
favor of enlarging and liberalizing technical train¬ 
ing, and of anticipating technical instruction by 
some broader scientific discipline; though as in all 
times of transition, something was lost temporar¬ 
ily by a departure from the old discipline of the 
grammar school before a new scheme of training 
the mind in scientific habits and cenceptions was 
established or fully apprehended. Yet on the 
whole, even from the beginning, the revolt was 
useful in that it shook the position of the “learned 
physician,” who took a literary, fastidious and 
meditative rather than an experimental interest in 
his profession, and, as in great part a descendant 
of the humanists, was never in full sympathy with 
experimental science. 

At the risk to doubt of some defects of culture, 
the newer education cleared the way for a more 
positive temper, awoke a new sense of accuracy 
and of verification, and created a skeptical attitude 
towards all conventions, whether of argument or 
of practice, among the drawbacks of this temper, 
which on the whole made for progress, was the 
rise of a school of excessive skepticism, which, for- 


21 


322 The Millennium and Medical Science 

getting the value of the accumulated stores of 
empiricism, depised those degrees of moral cer¬ 
tainty that, in so complex a study and so tentative 
a practice as medicine, must be our portion for 
the present, and even for a long future, however 
great the triumphs of medicine become. This 
skepticism took form in the school, most active 
between 1860 and 1880, known as the school of 
“Expectant Medicine.” These teachers, genuinely 
touched with a sense of scantiness of our knowl¬ 
edge, of our confidence in abstract terms, of the 
insecurity of our alleged “facts,” case-histories and 
observations, alienated from traditional dogmat¬ 
isms and disgusted by meddlesome polypharmacy 
—enlightened, moreover, by the issue of cases 
treated by means such as the homoeopathic, which 
were practically “expectant”—urged that the only 
course open to the physician, duly conscious of his 
own ignorance and of the mystery of nature, is to 
put his patient under diet and nursing, and, 
relying on the tendency of all equilibriums to 
recover themselves under perturbation, to await 
events. 

But to sit down helpless before human suffer¬ 
ing is an unendurable attitude. Considering the 
earth as a material thing; also, that the human 
body is a material thing; that microorganisms are 
material things; also their toxins (poisons pro¬ 
duced by the energy of microorganisms) are mate¬ 
rial things; that diseases or pathological condi¬ 
tions known as tuberculosis, syphilis, gonorrhea, 
small pox, typhoid fever, diphtheria, pneumonia, 
and many more are material things; that indi¬ 
vidual immunity or individual susceptibility, to 


Basis for Theory 


323 


certain diseases, are material things, we will pro¬ 
ceed. Taking for granted, that all of the above 
are facts, necessary to the production and sustain¬ 
ing of life, also, that these same facts are necessary 
to the maintenance of a condition of wellbeing, 
in the human, as well as being involved in the 
producing of any disease process; it is obvious, 
that there must be an earth to produce a some¬ 
thing which will produce and sustain a human, 
and there must be both, a human and micro¬ 
organisms to produce a disease; the material 
things involved in the question of immunity and 
susceptibility, playing the greatest part, in the 
progress of a disease of (when viewed from 
another point) the many processes on the part 
of the individual—or on the part of nature— 
to combat a disease, thereby bringing about the 
abatement of, and sometimes, the prevention of 
a disease, in the average human being. 

Then it is reasonable to assume, that those 
things of which the earth is composed, are the 
things which support the human, and are also the 
primary factors in the production of all life, in¬ 
cluding the human and microorganisms; that the 
properties for the reproduction of the human,— 
in this known continuous cycle of human life— 
are found within the human; that the prop¬ 
erties for the reproduction of microorganisms,— 
in this known continuous cycle of bacterial 
life—are found within these microorganisms them¬ 
selves. 

The existence of all things in our material 
world,—with its apparently never-ending cause 
and effect upon all life and its constant prepara- 

22 


324 The Millennium and Medical Science 

tion in its cycle of procreation and creation, anti¬ 
function and function, production and reproduc¬ 
tion, action and reaction, and its ultimate termina¬ 
tion, our so-called death, but which we may 
ultimately l$arn, may or may not be, either, a 
reduction to ultramicroscopic bodies of a solid 
and animate nature, or a condensation to atoms 
of a gaseous and animate nature—is dependent 
upon some fundamental principle of an unknown 
power or source, which according to science, is 
many hundreds of thousands of years old in its 
process of evolution. 

Science has taught us that all things of any 
importance to man and great things created by 
achievement of man, all of which go to make up 
the wonders of our modern world, were—at one 
time or another in their original existence or form 
—essentially of a minute and individual composi¬ 
tion in size and character, known as the primary 
elements. Beginning at this point as a starting 
place, all things—through the persistence of man 
—in their many forms of construction created by 
man have come into existence each playing its 
part of subservience in the life of its maker. By 
the acquiring of knowledge and by instituting a 
system of training man has learned the means 
and methods whereby these elements in their 
original minute forms may be broken up and again 
brought together in a process of construction in 
many different combinations; at first—in the pre¬ 
historic period—confining his efforts to those 
things which were of a useful character, neces¬ 
sary to his existence and the preservation of life. 
Later came the essential combined with the practi- 


Basis for Theory 


325 


cal and a tendency toward convenience, and still 
later came the blending of art and beauty with the 
convenience, of those practical and essential things 
in the daily life of man. 

It is only of late years that man has reflected 
upon the former achievements of his ancestors 
and the many inventions of modern times. The 
question of, the how, the when and where,—of 
all these one time dreams now produced in prac¬ 
tical possibilities—has dawned upon him. Hence, 
our world of today is the beginning of the period, 
from whence shall come the answer, and will 
probably be known in the future as the age or 
period of “scientific research.” 

The time has come when man is no longer satis¬ 
fied to remain dormant in ignorance and stupidity 
of indifference, accepting all things as they come 
and taking all things for granted, asking no ques¬ 
tions as to their origin, as in former years our 
ancestors were wont to do; today man asks 
questions as to the why and wherefore of every¬ 
thing. In the undertaking of solving these prob¬ 
lems, man has discovered that it is no small task 
and requires a systematic investigation. This 
process is now in the making and demands as a 
first procedure that we go back as far as possible 
and learn something of the early life of man and 
if possible of primitive man and his life upon 
earth. In retracing the steps of our ancestors and 
delving into the secret of the origin of man, we 
have just about reached the end of our journey. 

Having arrived at “the beginning of the end” 
of our destination, we are hampered on all sides; 
being surrounded and confronted by many op- 


326 The Millennium and Medical Science 


posing forces which take on the guise of giant 
monsters—rising as specters in the near distance— 
whose huge forms and menacing attitude cast a 
depressing shadow over all humanity. These 
forms—compositions of ignorance, greed for gold, 
lust of the body, race hatred, religious fanaticism, 
misrepresentation, suppression of truth, promo¬ 
tion of war, acquisition of power and political 
intrigue—apparently bar the way to all investiga¬ 
tion of current erroneous propaganda and false 
statements of unfounded worth, now being pro¬ 
pounded and circulated (at all times, more or 
less) throughout the entire world. 

With the event of the microscope in the seven¬ 
teenth century,—when Antony Van Leewenhoeck, 
sometimes called the father of microscopy, suc¬ 
ceeded in producing a fairly good instrument— 
and with its later improvements of up-to-date per¬ 
fection, there was revealed unto man a new and 
strange world of minute bodies, composing the 
organic and inorganic life, existing in the air, on 
the earth and in the sea. Thus did man begin the 
study of all nature’s intimate construction and 
activity; a few of these studies are, Geology, with 
its many minerals; Chemistry, showing its compo¬ 
sitions and combinations, crystals and diatones 
with their numerous and strange formations; Bac¬ 
teriology, demonstrating animalcule life in its 
extensive forms and characteristics; Pathology, 
showing the many abnormal changes produced by 
diseases which take place in the different organs 
in the body of man and the lower animals; Histol¬ 
ogy, which discloses the normal minute construc¬ 
tive features; fish and shell life of the sea and 


Basis for Theory 


327 


birds of the air, as well as the many organs and 
other structures of man and the lower animals. 

In the past few years medical science has 
demonstrated several instances where we can test, 
by different methods (with comparitively accurate 
deductions) many individuals as to their relative 
immunity or susceptibility to certain diseases,— 
vaccination in small pox and the Schick test for 
diphtheria—however, there are some who will not 
react to these tests. The many reasons, as to the 
whys and wherefores, as to some individuals 
being almost entirely immune from certain dis¬ 
eases and others being, to a marked degree, very 
susceptible to certain diseases, and why it is that 
some individuals will react, while others will not 
react, to these tests when made, have never been 
explained to any marked degree of satisfaction. 

This brings us to the first point of the basis of 
our theory. It is quite possible that these mysteri¬ 
ous and ultramicroscopic “granules or minute 
bodies,” the so-called hormones, enzymes or fer¬ 
ments, are really responsible (in their composition 
or action or both) for either the susceptibility to 
a disease or the immunity from a disease; they 
apparently being composed of an all-important 
and quadruple manifold force or latent energy 
involving and controlling the general health, from 
a heredity standpoint, conferring upon the indi¬ 
vidual a positive or negative resistance to disease; 
this includes, infections from all kinds of bacteria, 
the destruction of these parasitic invaders and the 
neutralizing of their toxins; thereby avoiding any 
material damage to the solid and fluid tissues of 
the body; as a result of this resistance or immunity 


328 The Millennium and Medical Science 

—when present—the individual is protected from 
any secondary complication, leading to a serious 
disease or a truly pathological condition. 

The second point deals with the growth of the 
individual, not alone the actual growth but control 
of the development as well, in every case; the 
bones will take the proper course, correct shape 
and normal consistency, from infancy to manhood 
or womanhood; the muscles will assume their 
proper tonicity, proportion and contour, especially 
the general outline of the male or female in rela¬ 
tion to the hips and breast, each having its mark 
of masculine or feminine development at the 
proper time and age, corresponding with the nor¬ 
mal physiological changes peculiar to each sex. 
These two factors of growth and development 
when properly controlled will give to the male, 
what we call a wonderful physique and to the fe¬ 
male a beautiful figure. In either case there is 
generally the handsome or beautiful accompany¬ 
ing the symmetrical outline of masculinity or 
femininity, always so pleasing to the eye and 
coveted by every human being. 

Let us consider vegetation of plant-life in the 
aggregate, its many branches of study, its vari¬ 
ous forms of life, its development from a minute 
seed in many instances, its structure in color, 
contour, consistency and size, with its several 
modes of function, selecting for example two of 
the most common forms in the vegetable kingdom; 
the flower with its many tints and large variety 
of color display (in its wild or cultivated state), 
with its countless thousands of forms and shapes 
of growth; the tree in its wide diversity of indi- 


Basis for Theory 


329 


vidual characteristics, especially as to consistency, 
contour and size, giving to each of its species or 
the different groups a well recognized and truly 
marked distinctness, whereby it may be known at 
once, when found among a group of strangers who 
are indeed its brothers and sisters. 

All evidence points to the fact that this con¬ 
tinuous cycle of reproduction and growth has gone 
on and on, year after year for many hundreds of 
years, perhaps thousands of years, in its vegetative 
existence or its life of monotonous and passive 
development; surely there must be a something 
of much importance, somewhere, to control it; a 
fundamental principle or law to govern all this 
comparatively regulated system of wonderous de¬ 
velopment and reproduction and its continual 
repetition, on and on through the ages. The 
question which confronts us primarily is; what 
united force or what group of factors were re¬ 
sponsible in the instigation of the framing, passing 
and fixing of this law; secondarily, what are and 
when came these preliminary essential elements 
of yesterday and today which continue to guide, 
control or abide by, this apparently fixed law. 
This is a positive every day visible and vitalized 
existence and the material manifestations of repro¬ 
duction and development in our plant-life, with 
its regulation or standarization or its almost abso¬ 
lute conformity to a definite and precise character¬ 
istic, whereby it may be easily distinguished, as to 
size, shape and consistence. 

It has been said, “tall oaks from little acorns 
grow” but is the acorn the primary or secondary 
factor or just the intermediate agent; perhaps it 


330 The Millennium and Medical Science 

is the worldly evidence in the third or fourth stage 
of the cycle of reproduction, in this particular 
form of vegetative life. Should we grant the con¬ 
cession that the acorn contains all the essential 
elements to produce the oak-tree; here we are 
again confronted with the question; from where 
and whence came these elements, contained 
within the acorn? Is there any more plausible 
theory or answer, than to assume that these ele¬ 
ments—which make and control the growth, size, 
shape and consistency—are nothing more or less 
than hundreds of millions of ultramicroscopic 
“minute bodies” (produced by the parent oak- 
tree and incorporated within the acorn, by this hid¬ 
den process or this apparently fixed law) or es¬ 
sential “granules” on the same order as the so- 
called hormones or enzymes, as produced and 
found in the human. 

Therefore we may say, nowhere is there 
“nothing”—or,—“something” is everywhere, rela¬ 
tively speaking, in the form of solids, liquids and 
gases which may be considered as “matter and 
mass.” In a vacuum “nothing” could exist, in the 
form of life, from the fact that a vacuum is 
“nothing” as perceptible to one or more of the five 
senses, and a vacuum does not “exist” except in 
rare instances, and this actual or relative existence 
only conceivable to the mind. Again we find, more 
explicity written in the Latin, “de nihilo nihilum, 
in nihilum nil posse reverti.” (From nothing 
nothing, into nothing nothing can return.) 







‘ 


























► 


Where (Human) Life Begins in the Human. 
(As man understands it today) 



Fig. 7. Schematic drawing showing front view of the nongravid 
uterus (nonpregnant womb) before conception takes place. 




The Beginning of (Human) Life. 
(As man understands it today) 



Fig. 8. Schematic drawing showing front view of the gravid 
uterus (pregnant womb) about ten lunar months after concep¬ 
tion has taken place. (Child about to be born.) 











. 

V 

v 


















CHAPTER XIX 


THE THEORY 

“Ex pede Herculem” 

(From the foot we may recognize Hercules, or, 
from a part of a thing we may infer the whole.) 

T HE ultimate road in any instance which leads 
to success—when found—is usually found to 
be paved with a positive and the necessary ele¬ 
ment of purpose; that element being composed 
mostly of endurance and efficiency. It is in this 
efficiency that the success of the general practi¬ 
tioner or specialist, in the practice of medicine, 
is found today; therefore, the basis or one of the 
essential factors for success in medicine lies in re¬ 
search work. It may be said, with much truth; 
without research work no authoritative works 
have been written, no scientific discoveries made 
nor practical inventions brought about. Consid¬ 
ering these facts and with the promotion of medi¬ 
cal science in mind, we must add the primary fac¬ 
tor of the whole; “the theory conceived,” of any¬ 
thing, was ever the beginning. That is to say, in 
accordance with the known history, as found in 
the annals of man’s work, the physical endurance 
ever played its part. 

If it is true, that the primary and ultimate 
function of the human being while upon earth,— 
when all is said and done,—can be summed up 
in these few words: “we are here as a result of 
a process of reproduction and our function is to 
331 


332 The Millennium and Medical Science 

reproduce our kind and then pass on, thereby per¬ 
petuating the human race,” or “it is the keeping 
in motion the perpetual cycle of the human life,” 
then this is, apparently, true of all other living 
things which come into existence, to-wit : : to repro¬ 
duce its kind and die. If this is true,—in accordance 
with science,—we may then proceed to give an 
illustration of an instance or a phase, of this con¬ 
tinuous or never ending cycle, of the human life. 
It is a rather difficult matter to select a starting 
point or a specific place with which to begin, 
especially when this instance or phase or part 
played in this endless cycle, is that of a single 
individual or being,—but as all things must have 
had a beginning, sometime and somewhere, and 
as all things material do have a beginning (as we 
know them), in accordance with science—we must 
begin somewhere and at a given point; so it hap¬ 
pens that our choice (as to time and place) falls 
upon the female at the age of womanhood and 
after conception has taken place, it being no doubt, 
the most significant instance in the life cycle of the 
human race. 

If it is true, that the gonads or so-called inter¬ 
stitial glands—the reproductive glands of the male 
and female—are intimately related and connected 
by the blood stream with a group or chain of 
glands, known to us as the “endocrine” glands; 
and if, the life, function and product of these 
gonads are: first, molded into an original specific 
form and consistency—during the early embryonic 
stage, or, in the course of development (before the 
individual is born) in intra-uterin life—by an un¬ 
known action on the part of the other glands of 


The Theory 


333 


this group, thereby granting these gonads the pow¬ 
ers or the qualifications of producing a male or 
female element when this individual arrives at 
the age of puberty,—which later plays its part in 
the act of reproduction—and all through life these 
other glands and their products are essential to 
the function and production of the gonads; and 
second, the functions of the gonads guided and 
regulated by these other glands, signifying the 
changes or the different cycles which take place in 
the life of every individual; to-wit, the affinity, 
desire, inclination and consent—on the part of the 
female—leading to conception or pregnancy, re¬ 
sulting in the termination of the monthly period 
for a limited time; the unknown force which com¬ 
pels the uterus to empty itself or causes the expul¬ 
sion of the full term child into the outer world; 
the involution or contraction of that same uterus, 
causing it to again resume its original or natural 
size—or practically so—almost immediately after 
the child is born; the preparation of this same 
uterus for a repetition of its function; the hidden 
process of preparation of food for the new-born, 
in the mammary glands of the mother—a perfect 
“emulsion” which science has failed to duplicate 
—because the infant is positively a truly helpless 
creature; the change from infancy to childhood, 
from childhood to the age of puberty—when a 
cycle of change takes place within a cycle of 
change—from puberty to senility, then death and 
the change from flesh and blood to the apparently 
ultimate termination of all life—in time—the 
ultramicroscopic “granules;” third, the compara¬ 
tively unknown process which takes place at the 


334 The Millennium and Medical Science 

time of conception, when unaided and unseen the 
products of the gonads—one male and one female 
element combine to produce the human—perform 
their function of propagation, being at all times, 
apparently, aided or hindred, in a material way 
(as the case may be), in the primary stage of 
fertilization, the secondary stage or formation of 
placenta and embryo, terminating in the tertiary 
stage, the production and delivery of a compara¬ 
tively perfect and live child; then it is surely the 
result of the work done by these other glands of 
the same group, by way of the blood stream, this 
same blood stream being alone responsible—in a 
primary way—for the sole nutrition, formation of 
structures and all features during growth, and de¬ 
livery of the human infant at full term. Taking 
it for granted that the mother has the proper 
amount of good food and care. 

If it is true, that the products of the “En¬ 
docrine” glands—the hormones or enzymes or fer¬ 
ments—have by way of the blood stream, a mate¬ 
rial effect upon the gonads of both male and fe¬ 
male, it is quite possible that these products, of 
the other glands in this group, will surely have a 
tendency to regulate and influence the function 
of these gonads; then it is reasonable that all 
these other glands in this chain (or their products 
when thrown into the blood stream) will also tend 
to give to the products of the gonads (the sperma¬ 
tozoa of the male and the ovum of the female) 
its essential needs, in contour, construction and 
consistency, also its nature and characteristics in 
general; these things would involve; first, the pro¬ 
duction and development of the female element 


The Theory 


335 


(the ovum) and its ability to find its way from its 
source which is the ovary, to its final resting place, 
in the uterus, and its hidden process of prepara¬ 
tion to receive the male element (the spermatozoa) 
when it becomes fertilized and conception takes 
place; second, the production and development 
and the maintenance of the life and function of 
the male element (the spermatozoa) and its ability 
to find its way from its source (the testis) to its 
destination (the ovum) and its hidden power or 
desire to seek the ovum with its known force and 
admitted power of locomotion and its ability to 
find the point of entrance, and when found, pierce 
or force its way into the ovum, or in some way be¬ 
come amalgamated with the ovum, thereby com¬ 
pleting conception. All of this takes place unseen 
and unaided from the outside world, or without 
material assistance of human mind or hand; it is 
just nature’s automatic procedure. 

It is apropos, at this time and place to state; 
that any alternation in, or interference with, these 
several factors involving the construction and con¬ 
sistency of these reproductive elements—the ovum 
after finding its way to the uterus and becoming im¬ 
pregnated in the female, the development of the 
ovum while contained within the ovary, before 
being discharged to perform its several functions; 
and these same circumstances could prevail rela¬ 
tive to the spermatozoa in the male—would no 
doubt have a detrimental effect upon these repro¬ 
ductive elements to the extent of interfering with 
or changing the normal functions, of these repro¬ 
ductive elements of either the ovum or the sper¬ 
matozoa, in one or both instances, (of these repro- 


336 The Millennium and Medical Science 

ductive elements) making one or both elements 
incompetent of its requirements, perhaps causing 
it to be inert or lifeless; it is reasonable to assume 
that this interference would be in some instances, 
the cause of malformation (on the part of the un¬ 
born child, due to interference with is develop¬ 
ment) in the new-born, and possibly in other 
instances it may be a just cause for sterility, in 
the male or female or both. Akin to this particu¬ 
lar point or phase in our cycle of human life, it 
may be said; could it be possible to demonstrate, 
from any angle, that these “hormones” or “min¬ 
ute bodies” are the true factors, dominating the 
construction and composition of these reproduc¬ 
tive elements (the ovum and spermatozoa), it 
would surely open the way into new fields for 
scientific investigation. 

Any forthcoming proof that, these “hormones” 
or “minute bodies” are indeed the most important 
factors and are truly responsible for the primary 
construction and development of these reproduc¬ 
tive elements (if it is true of the male it may be 
assumed, it is also true of the female and vice 
versa; the spermatozoa while passing through its 
several stages of evolution, on its way to perfec¬ 
tion and before leaving the testis; the ovum during 
its course of growth and evolvement before leav¬ 
ing the ovary), may be had or such evidence made 
possible by investigation of the question from two 
entirely different views; first, to prove or disprove 
that every individual when born into the world, is 
endowed with these “hormones” or “minute 
bodies,” which are more or less coalescent, they 
being contained within the reproductive elements 


The Theory 


337 


which are in turn embodied within the ovary and 
the testis; second, to prove or disprove that these 
“hormones” or “minute bodies” are supplied by 
the other endocrine glands, being brought to a 
nucleus of the ovum and the spermatozoa (by way 
of the blood-stream) or a minute cell, contained 
within the ovary or testis and taken up by them, 
thereby devoting much to their gradual comple¬ 
tion. If either of these two views were proven to 
be true of the male element, it could then be 
assumed, that the same conditions hold true rela¬ 
tive to the female element and vice versa. The 
point of real significance being, to prove the power 
or influence of these “hormones” or “minute 
bodies” (produced in the other endocrine glands) 
and the nature of this power or influence, upon 
the male element (the spermatozoa) or upon the 
female element, the ovum. 

If it is true, that the life of the human being,— 
from the moment of conception, and all through 
intra-uterine life, until born into the world and 
then on throughout its human existence—is de¬ 
pendent upon this life through the generosity, or 
the proper functioning of the “endocrine glands” 
which produce the “internal secretions” in which 
are contained numerous “minute bodies” or 
“granules” or the so-called “hormones,” or, “en¬ 
zymes,” or, “ferments;” these being a product pro¬ 
duced through a system or method of stimulation 
and inhibition, and carried by way of the blood 
stream throughout the human body; and, if as a 
result of this proper function, system, or method, 
there is a continual evolution of some, and ipvolu- 
tion of others, of these same “endocrine glands” 


338 The Millennium and Medical Science 

(or the hormones produced by these glands) all 
intimately connected in the same group, and as 
a whole, all of these glands undergo a continual 
depreciation of these virtues and qualifications 
which maintain the vitality of youth, thereby tend¬ 
ing to bring about old age; and, if this same group 
of glands will bestow upon each individual those 
faculties and virtues responsible for “personality,” 
“health and strength,” “handsome face and 
physique” in the male, or “beautiful face and 
figure” in the female, and giving to others the 
extraordinary intellectual mentalities, or, the 
physical properties which will withstand great 
physical and mental strain; and if this same group 
or chain of glands is at fault or to blame, for the 
ugly face and figure of some unfortunates, also 
for the plight of those individuals who are simple 
in mind (for instance, the different types of mo¬ 
rons) ; and others who are deformed in body, or 
stunted in growth, some too tall and lean and some 
too short and fat; and if these same glands are 
responsible,—on account of too little in amount 
or too much in amount of production of the “in¬ 
ternal secretions,” or lack of function—for bring¬ 
ing about the many types of insanity, at the differ¬ 
ent periods of life; and, if these glands confer 
upon us our immunities and susceptibilities to dis¬ 
ease by the powers possed in their internal secre¬ 
tions which neutralize or destroy all foreign bodies 
that would enter the human system, including all 
detrimental bacteria and their products; then it 
is reasonable to assume that the “substance pro¬ 
duced” by the function of these glands—the in¬ 
ternal secretions—is a product which contains 


The Theory 


339 


these “minute bodies”—the so-called hormones, or 
enzymes, or, ferments,—which also have a func¬ 
tion, and if these “minute bodies” are sufficient in 
amount, normal in consistency and perform their 
function properly, all seems to go well with the 
human economy; but should any force, element 
or substance,—known or unknown at the present 
time—interfere with the source of production of 
these “minute bodies” or, interfere with the “min¬ 
ute bodies” themselves, decreasing or increasing 
them in amount or altering them in their func¬ 
tions; then as a result, apparently, there is much 
trouble in store for this unfortunate individual. 
This apparently holds true from either an ac¬ 
quired or heredity point of view. 

Taking for granted that there are vast amounts 
of these “granules” in the make-up of the female 
element (ovum) and also in the male element 
(spermatozoa) when fertilization of the ovum by 
the spermatozoa takes place (the condition in the 
female, commonly known as, conception or preg¬ 
nancy) it is quite evident that the two combining 
factors now make one cell, and according to the 
laws of reproduction, this one cell now divides 
and makes two (in accordance with the laws of 
cytology); the two again divide making four; the 
four again divide and making eight and so con¬ 
tinuing until the new being is entirely formed from 
this law of cell proliferation or cell production; 
the new-born being the result of millions of cells 
which make up the different organs; these organs 
necessarily constituting the human being. Here 
then we have a united composition of male and 
female elements (in the new-born), and it is quite 


340 The Millennium and Medical Science 

possible, that according to the predominance of 
the one or of the other (of the parent’s hormones 
or one of their endocrine glands), this will there¬ 
fore be the power which will determine the sex 
of the embryo, at the same time giving to it (the 
new being to be) those strong or weak characteris¬ 
tics of the parents. 

We have previously said, “the characteristics 
of the offspring may or may not resemble those 
of the parents.” It is generally accepted as a fore¬ 
gone conclusion that any dominating or so-called 
“ruling” factors, are at any and all times, the 
important factors. As this postulate holds true in 
most everything and everywhere, also does it hold 
true in the terms of Arts and Science, as well as 
Political policies and Religions; in all countries of 
the world, civilized or uncivilized, therefore, di¬ 
rectly and indirectly, these important factors con¬ 
trol life and death in any specific type or group 
of the different peoples of the world. When we 
consider the question, “The Propagation of Man,” 
there are primarily two dominating factors, an 
adult male and female. This is according to the 
law that the opposite or the positive and negative 
attract each other, and the same law holds true of 
the spermatozoa and ovum, these being the sec¬ 
ondary factors; this being a situation over which 
the individual has no control, or, in other words, 
no man can command or demand at any time that 
the spermatozoa and ovum perform their func¬ 
tion of reproduction at any given time, their own 
power of affinity and attraction are the dominating 
factors, which in turn produce, primarily amalga¬ 
mation and secondarily conception. One author- 


The Theory 


341 


ity has declared that science is gradually learning 
new secrets concerning the relation existing be¬ 
tween the hormones and human development and 
behavior. It is now well known that these secre¬ 
tions influence stature, build, proportions, details 
of the development of various organs and tissues, 
intelligence and emotional control. These hor¬ 
mones that determine individual personality, may 
constitute the bridge connecting this personality 
with the specific enzymes or hormones in the germ 
cells. Individuals differ it may be said, first by 
anatomical structure, second by the physiological 
function of that same anatomical structure, and 
third by virtue of differences of atomic structure 
and atomic activity of the enzymes or hormones 
making up that part of the stream of life-yeast 
which activates the protoplasm of each, and will 
in turn activate the protoplasm of their offspring. 
In other words, hereditary differences between 
people evidently are due to hereditary differences 
in the activity of the endocrine glands. Each per¬ 
son is what he is in physique, in his thoughts and 
his reactions largely by virtue of the peculiar 
properties of these activiting substances which are 
specific in him and other members of his family 
and race or biotype. The future of genetics, it is 
thought, lies largely in a study of these activities 
and the origin of differences in them. 

Of late years there has been advanced “a theory 
of sex determination” which states “that the male 
and female element (the ovum and the spermato¬ 
zoa) from which the child develops, strive with 
each other for mastery. Finally, the sex of the 
child displays which element gained the victory. 

23 


342 The Millennium and Medical Science 

When the victory of the male element is decided 
and complete, the result is a Caesar, a Napoleon or 
a Bismarck;—active, determined and ruthless. 
When this victory of the male is less complete, the 
result is the ordinary, respectable, hard-working 
man, but possessing engaging weakness. Up to the 
present time, we find upon investigation, that life 
in its infinite beginning and primary stages, to¬ 
gether with the fundamentals of reproduction— 
of the how, when and where it first came into 
being, so far as our world and life, as we know 
it to be, is concerned—is a mass of confusion and 
subject to much dispute, with much conjecture 
and speculation as to its initial origin. Now we 
come to the apparently most essential point, the 
proper formations of the internal viscera, espe¬ 
cially the size and function of the endocrine or 
ductless glands. As a rule, we find these endocrines 
will be in harmony with the above mentioned fac¬ 
tors (all internal viscera) from the fact that these 
were in early life responsible; but did thereby fa¬ 
vor the individual in some instances or did grossly 
neglect the individual on other occasions. Con¬ 
nected herewith we have the following contention. 
If it is true that, in many instances, tuberculosis at¬ 
tacks the individual at or about the age of puberty 
and the sexual desire is abnormally increased at 
this age, in these types of cases then it is fair to ask, 
what is the relation between the susceptibility to 
infection of tuberculosis and the abnormal in¬ 
crease in sexual appetite at the age of puberty, 
and does the diseased condition bring about the 
increased or abnormal desire or does the change 
in the cycle of life “the age of puberty” bring 


The Theory 


343 


about the desire, with a consequent inclination to 
dissipation, resulting in a lowering of the vitality, 
with a loss of resistance, terminating in suceptibil- 
ity to infection, galloping consumption, and early 
death. Going a little deeper into the question we 
may ask; what part is played in this regard by 
one or more of the endocrine glands? This is only 
one of the many diseases about which we may ask 
many questions relative to the respective relations 
between any and all disease processes and the 
endocrine glands. In other words, any effort in 
any way, which has not been attempted previously 
and which is proving to be the most acceptable 
innovation to those suffering from disease, surely 
will be received with a warm welcome and much 
appreciation; when these efforts are put forth by 
one skilled in his profession, accompanied by com¬ 
mon sense and good judgment. 

So it may be assumed that, when conception 
takes place, both elements, from the parents (the 
spermatozoa and ovum), do either possess primar¬ 
ily many millions of “minute bodies,” or possess 
the power of attraction of many millions of these 
“minute bodies;” and secondarily these “minute 
bodies” are the foundation for the formation of 
the cell life (to come), which cell life will in turn, 
when formed (these cells being known as the 
embryonic cells), produce function, development 
and growth of the actual cell life (to be), thereby 
producing the different organs which make up the 
human being (when that human being, in the 
embryonic life, is properly nourished and supplied 
with the hormones from the several “true” en¬ 
docrine glands of the mother, by way of the blood- 


344 The Millennium and Medical Science 

stream, from mother to child, the only possible 
means of supporting the new life), consequently 
the production of the human as a live being; life 
itself being a combination of function, develop¬ 
ment and growth. 

The writer wishes to be fair with the reader 
and believing him or her to have ordinary intel¬ 
ligence and to have now acquired sufficient knowl¬ 
edge on the subject—after reading this work 
through—to draw his or her own conclusions in 
the answering of the following questions: 

First, with a knowledge of the facts, to the 
effect and extent, that these “minute bodies” are 
present in certain glands (being produced by these 
glands) in the human being, and taking it for 
granted, that these glands and their power to pro¬ 
duce these “minute bodies” were given to us by 
our forefathers (we will not discuss, at this point, 
how our very early ancestors came by these glands 
or at what period in the evolution of man, these 
“minute bodies” first made themselves known) we 
may ask, however, are these “minute bodies” truly 
responsible for all cell life, or, the beginning and 
ending of life, from the “apparent fact” that they 
originate in the ductless glands of the parents, ap¬ 
parently asserting their full prerogative in the fol¬ 
lowing cycles of life? These “granules” are 
produced in the ductless glands,—excepting the 
gonads, in this instance, their function apparently 
not being to produce these “granules”—thrown 
into the blood stream and carried to the gonads 
whose function it is to produce the reproductive 
elements—the “spermatozoa” in the male and the 
“ovum” in the female—the gonads making use of 


The Theory 


345 


these “granules” for this purpose. Conception 
takes place as a result of amalgamation of these 
two “elements,” they having a natural affinity for 
each other owing to their mutual composition and 
comparative source of origin, the attraction of the 
positive for the negative being the blending factor. 
After conception has once taken place these “gran¬ 
ules” now play their important part in the blood 
stream of the pregnant mother, giving to the pros¬ 
pective infant the necessary quantitative and 
qualitative constituents,—the “granules” or “min¬ 
ute bodies” from the ductless glands of the mother 
(by way of the blood-stream) from mother to 
child—in this way, the primary cell life of the 
infant is formed, these cells later forming all or¬ 
gans and among them the organs or ductless glands 
which reproduce their kind the all-important 
“minute bodies” or “granules” and thereby con¬ 
tinue the cycle of life. 

Second, is it a mere coincidence that these 
“minute bodies” or “granules” manifest them¬ 
selves in every and all instances of cell life— 
therefore, all life, vegetable and animal—con¬ 
tributing only to the temporary support of cell life 
and disappearing at the death of this same cell 
life? 

Third, are these “granules” or “minute bodies” 
produced in the ductless glands—without reason 
—and thrown in the blood stream to be carried to 
the gonads and other organs—if they have no func¬ 
tion to perform—in this group, with their ever 
apparent stimulation of these glands at the differ¬ 
ent periods of the life of the individual which 
make up the undeniable changes taking place (in 


346 The Millennium and Medical Science 

the human) in the cycle of life, from infancy to 
old age? 

Fourth, is there no significance in the fact, that 
these “granules” or “minute bodies” are produced 
and given off into the body in such a way that 
they reach only the blood stream and the blood 
stream is the only source of support and nutrition, 
first, to the gonads of the male and female which 
produce the ovum and spermatozoa, and second, 
to the embryo, or, the child, in its primary con¬ 
ception and ultimate termination of, “the begin¬ 
ning of life,” in the pregnant mother? 

Fifth, consider the fact that many of our recog¬ 
nized authorities on the subject of “Endocrin¬ 
ology” contend that it is a deficiency of these 
“granules” or “minute bodies” or a gradual loss 
of function of all the glands, which produce these 
“granules” or “minute bodies” which bring on old 
age and untimately the “ending of life in the 
human.” 




Where (Human) Life Begins in the Human. 
(As man understands it today) 



Fig. 9. Schematic drawing showing side view (sagittal section) 
of the nongravid uterus (nonpregnant woml)) before conception 

takes place. 







The Beginning of (Human) Life. 
(As man understands it today) 



Fig. 10. Schematic drawing showing side view (sagittal section) 
of the gravid uterus (pregnant womb) about ten lunar months 
after conception has taken place. (Child about to be born.) 




























































































CHAPTER XX 


CONCLUSIONS TO THE THEORY 


“Labor omnia vincit” 
(labor conquers all things) 


Biology and the Endocrine Glands :— 

HEN making our final deductions it would 



V V be well at times to hestitate, as we proceed, 
and pay homage to man’s ingenuity; the mental 
and physical capacity which has, up to date, con¬ 
tributed to our material world and will no doubt 
continue to do so. It is the work of man (mental 
and physical), which makes all things possible. 
But what is the part played by the lower animal 
kingdom, when viewed from the standpoint of 
work,—the microorganisms and insects—and what 
is its significance in the life of man and its relation 
to his ingenuity? 

Let us now presuppose (hypothetically of 
course, but that we may have a tangible basis to 
work upon) that our mother subject is “Endocrin¬ 
ology,” or, should we say, it was—but we knew it 
not—the mother subject, many, many years ago. 
In this contention we have looked back into the 
depths of a dark past; there we see much evidence 
of innocent ignorance in the early days of the 
human being, a struggle for life’s existence as a 
first essential to our present world of population, 
and as we return and come closer to the end of our 
journey of vision—the present day—the continual 
physical combat and never-ending mental conflict 


347 


348 The Millennium and Medical Science 


from many angles, stand out as very prominent 
features of that long procession of the coming and 
going of humanity for ages, and termed, the ad¬ 
vancement of civilization, or, the progress of man 
upon earth. In this contention—of our mother 
subject—we must necessarily also look far into the 
future; there we see, or rather the future genera¬ 
tions will no doubt see, the many newborn subjects 
or off-spring of “our mother subject” which will 
and “must” eventually, come into existence as a 
result of those things which have gone before and 
those things—of a material and scientific interest 
to man, uncovered by him, yesterday and today in 
his quest of knowledge—in the plain evidence to¬ 
day; if we would continue our march of that same 
progress of civilization. 

All modern science, its development in the vari¬ 
ous fields by man’s earnest labor and that incul¬ 
cated ingenuity, no doubt owes to a great extent, 
its early endeavors and subsequent growth to two 
entirely different groups of predominant ideas. 
The first of these two groups being those motives 
furnished by the necessities of life, with its con¬ 
tinual struggle for existence; the second, that in¬ 
born inclination of an intensive desire of the 
human race to delve into the mysteries of all 
nature’s processes and especially to fathom the 
profundity of the triplex enigma, consisting of, 
first, the origin of “Life;” second, the constitution 
of human “Affinity;” third, the sequence of 
“Death.” 

If we take for granted (for the time being) 
that these “granules” or “minute bodies”—the so- 
called hormones or enzymes, or ferments—(call 


Conclusions to The Theory 349 

them what you will) are the products of a particu¬ 
lar set of glands (the “endocrines” in the human), 
which have developed through a long and con¬ 
tinual changing of certain specific organs; or 
through a series of changes in the process of evo¬ 
lution, in either case the cause or etiological factor 
being a combination of, first, the law of the sur¬ 
vival of the fittest; second, change of environment 
or the acquisition of acclimation; third, nourish¬ 
ment provided;—all of which played a part 
(especially from the standpoint of immunity and 
susceptibility), as a necessary requisite, to produce 
these phenomenal organs, as possessed by the 
human of today—fourth, the causing of a more or 
less interrelationship between these organs by way 
of the blood-stream; it would then be a natural 
consequence, that this relationship (by its closed 
circle, the blood-stream), would in time become 
intimate and these organs each dependent on the 
other. 

Bacteria and Disease Production:— 

When we say in our theory “there must be a 
human being and also microorganisms to produce 
any disease,” it stands to reason that, disease is 
the result of the coming together of two material 
things, human beings and microorganisms. If 
there were no human beings (which act as the 
host) for the microorganisms (which are strictly 
parasitic in nature) to live upon,—thereby con¬ 
tinually reproducing their kind, with the evident 
consequence of worldly dissemenation in its far- 
reaching means of invasion and infection, result¬ 
ing in destruction to the tissues of the human—it 


350 The Millennium and Medical Science 

again stands to reason these parasites without the 
aid of a host would, in time, automatically ex¬ 
terminate themselves. However, it is quite evi¬ 
dent that the human race will remain, at least for 
a while, upon our earth and continue to be (in 
a great many instances) an easy and willing prey, 
in the form of a submissive housing host, extend¬ 
ing in our ignorance a constant invitation of 
admission to this obnoxious brood and omnium- 
gatherum (miscellaneous collection) of pathoge¬ 
netic animalculse and microorganisms (giving ori¬ 
gin to disease or producing disease) which are in 
our present day life, seemingly, omnipotent in 
their ubiquity. (The unlimited power of its kind, 
to produce disease in human beings, all over the 
world, at one and the same time.) This must 
necessarily be true, because there are many people 
dying every minute, in all parts of the world, due 
to infectious diseases. 

If it is true that there are such conditions or 
diseases, known as, septicemia (blood-poisoning), 
tetanus (lock-jaw), peritonitis (infection of the 
peritoneal cavity or abdomen) and, if, it is true 
that certain types of bacteria—in accordance with 
science—are the actual cause of these and many 
other pathological conditions or diseases, the re¬ 
sult of which being (in many instances) the cause 
of death of the human; then it follows that there 
must be an “unknown link” of affinity between 
these microorganisms and the human body, de¬ 
pending upon the immunity (or the resistance or 
a negative affinity between the human body or cer¬ 
tain solid tissues or fluid tissues or juices con¬ 
tained within the human make-up, and these sev- 


Conclusions to The Theory 351 

eral microorganisms) or upon susceptibility of the 
human body (or the lack of resistance or a posi¬ 
tive affinity between any of the several constitu¬ 
ents, above mentioned, in the human make-up and 
these microorganisms) all of which, would natur¬ 
ally be contained within the jurisdiction of this 
“unknown link” of “a positive or a negative” 
affinity; all being controlled by nature’s “process 
of evolution,” in its continuous cycle of life. 

If it is true that all bacteria are made up of 
numerous “minute bodies” or “granules”—of dif¬ 
ferent types and forms—and that the existence of 
such animalcuke as Schizomycetes (the micro¬ 
organism group to which bacteria belong), Actin- 
omycetes (the microorganism group to which the 
molds and mildew belong), Blastomycetes (the 
microorganism group to which belong the Sac- 
charomycetes or yeast fungi, which constitute a 
“ferment” or various species), and several others 
depend upon these “minute bodies” or “granules,” 
it is then obvious that these “minute bodies” or 
“granules,” must possess a function; therefore, it 
is reasonable to assume that this function prima¬ 
rily is to reproduce its kind,—in a continuous cycle 
of “life giving properties” of the hereditary ten¬ 
dency and propensity but only from the physical 
and chemical standpoint (terminating in a system¬ 
atic function of transverse division or sporulation) 
involving the secret amalgamating process of an 
unknown (to man of today) law, whereby the or¬ 
ganic and inorganic properties of nature are utiliz- 
able—producing first a substance similar to a cell- 
membrane which acts as an outside wall for the 
bacteria, and, second, a substance similar to the 


352 The Millennium and Medical Science 

protoplasm or the body part of the cell, and third, 
when the bacteria have reached the limit of their 
growth, or are full grown and matured, these 
“minute bodies” or “granules”—or the bacteria as 
a whole—are responsible for the secondary func¬ 
tion; a process of secretion or excretion, producing 
the many kinds of known products peculiar to 
each form of bacteria, to-wit: the primary destruc¬ 
tion of human tissue as a necessary evil (to 
humanity) but very necessary to the life of bac¬ 
teria in their unknown system or method of metab¬ 
olism—the breaking down of human tissues and 
the building up, or reproduction of their kind— 
producing secondary in this process, pus, liquids, 
different coloring matter, and toxins (poisons) of 
various kinds and customary to their nature. In 
other words, these “minute bodies” or “granules” 
seem to be the generative factors in bacterial life 
and seem to be primarily responsible for bacterial 
existence. There are also reasons to believe that 
these “granules” give to the bacteria their energy 
to produce a substance peculiar to its kind and 
which we will term, for want of a better name, 
“granule extracts,” but which are known to the 
scientific man as, endo-toxins and exo-toxins or 
intra-cellular-toxins and extra-cellular-toxins. 

We may now venture to relate, upon a basis 
of surmising and speculation,—investing therein 
what general information we have on hand and 
that knowledge of facts we possess,—the whys and 
wherefores of the process of reproduction of bac¬ 
terial life. From all appearances, these “granules” 
or “minute bodies” when they attain a certain age, 
seem to have the faculty of either, splitting in two 


Conclusions to The Theory 353 

or throwing off a part of themselves,—of the 
original “granule” that was—in either case the 
original bacteria then becomes life size or full 
grown and the many “granules” contained therein 
become full grown, and reproduction of these 
“granules” takes place—by whatever method—the 
original bacteria, as a whole, now becomes too 
small a house to hold its increase in its immediate 
family (the procreation and creation, and the 
secondary development of the “minute bodies” or 
“granules” themselves), which apparently con¬ 
tains several generations,—a characteristic of bac¬ 
teria being to “multiply with exceeding rapidity,” 
in accordance with science—the many generations 
of “granules” must of necessity, now have a new 
home to accommodate its offspring, so the original 
house or bacteria now divides itself into two parts, 
—the so-called tranverse division or fission, in 
accordance with science—making two houses or 
homes or two individual bacteria, where a few 
moments before there was only one bacterium 
(singular for bacteria); it is now evident that when 
the young or newly created “granules” come into 
existence they go through the same process or pass 
through the same cycle as just stated above. As 
a consequence of this continual process there is a 
never ending cycle of reproduction which pro¬ 
duces in its energy; first, new “granules” and 
second, a protoplasmic substance; and third, a cell 
membrane or outside wall substance which holds 
the house or home or bacteria (itself) together 
and in order; and fourth, the ultimate function 
now exerts and asserts itself. This last or ultimate 
function (the interference with normal physiologi- 


354 The Millennium and Medical Science 

cal function, in the human, and subsequent pro¬ 
duction of disease) is the one which manifests 
itself relative to all humanity and human nature. 
If it is true that a certain type of bacteria are detri¬ 
mental to the human being—there being many 
forms which are not—by invading the body, then 
an infection takes place; and if the invaders are 
not destroyed at once, by the protective elements 
of that body, there is set up and into motion the 
continuous cycle of reproduction of “granules” 
and bacteria; to support this process of reproduc¬ 
tion of bacterial life, there is a destruction of sur¬ 
rounding tissues and a proliferation or throwing 
off of toxins by the bacteria which is known as 
the cause of an inflammatory process; the toxins 
produced and thrown off by the bacteria penetrate 
the surrounding cells and tissues making them 
easy prey to the present and coming generations 
of bacteria,—in accordance with science—and as 
a result there are bacteria thrown into the blood¬ 
stream and carried to all parts of the body, there¬ 
fore to all organs, many times causing much future 
trouble, if the individual survives the present in¬ 
fection. This continuous and necessarily progres¬ 
sive cycle of a parasitic nature, in its ultramicro- 
scopic or apparently auto-procreation, after the 
primary infection once gains entrance to the 
human body, will in every instance continue in¬ 
definitely, at least (in the susceptible individual) 
while the environment in which it lives sustains 
the necessary requirements and maintains condi¬ 
tions to warrant the continuous life cycle of the 
bacteria, causing the infection. To stem the tide 
of progressive destruction of cell life and tissues 


Conclusions to The Theory 355 

of the human body, and bring about the destruc¬ 
tion of the offending bacteria, it is positively neces¬ 
sary to interfere, either by the human body having 
the auto-power to combat the infection in its be¬ 
ginning or there must be material aid given the 
body from the outside world. 

Vegetation and the Vitamines:— 

If it is true, that the purity of consistency, 
therefore the actual true life of such things as po¬ 
tatoes, carrots, celery, corn and many other foods, 
—which are said to contain, in large amounts, the 
new recognized and important element or ingre¬ 
dient (the so-called “Vitamines” which are neces¬ 
sary, to a marked degree, to the health and life of 
the human) in a comparative measured quantity 
or at least in sufficient amounts to prevent many 
of the diseases, or conditions (known as faulty 
metabolism) brought about or produced by the 
lack of these foods—depends upon “protection 
from the Sun’s rays” so as to preserve these “vita- 
mines” and make these things a fit food for hu¬ 
manity; then it follows that when these foods are 
exposed to the rays of the Sun, during neglected 
cultivation or from other reasons, they take up a 
substance (chlorophyll) which turns them green in 
color and makes them bitter to the taste and not 
fit food for the human to eat. It is quite possible 
that these so-called vitamines, as found in the sev¬ 
eral vegetables, are (in a way) in the same class 
(in the kingdom of vegetation) as are the so-called 
hormones in the animal kingdom; these “vita¬ 
mines,” or ultramicroscopic “minute bodies” or 
“granules,” of the vegetable kingdom, being in 
complete harmony with the “hormones” of the hu- 


356 The Millennium and Medical Science 

man; when these vitamines under certain condi¬ 
tions and after passing through specific processes 
in their production, have acquired (we will say) 
their proper maturity; otherwise these vitamines, 
of the vegetable kingdom, are antagonistic to the 
hormones of the human. 

Then it is reasonable to assume that the evident 
constitutional changes produced in these foods, 
result from the taking up of certain “minute 
bodies” or “granules,” which are similar but in¬ 
compatible with the so-called “hormones” or “en¬ 
zymes” or “ferments” produced in the human. It 
may be, that the Sun’s rays destroy the necessary 
so-called “vitamines” or it may be that the sub¬ 
stance—call it what you will—taken up by these 
foods, when exposed to the Sun’s rays possesses 
properties which are antagonistic and cannot be 
neutralized or destroyed by the “detoxicating ele¬ 
ments” of the human; it being remembered that 
these “detoxicating elements” or “poison neutraliz¬ 
ing properties,” as found in the human are in all 
probability the “minute bodies” or hormones, pro¬ 
duced and found in the “internal secretions” of 
the “Endocrine” glands, or their associates, the 
“foundation position” glands, and thrown into the 
blood stream of the human. 

If it is true, that the chemical elements,— 
found in abundance in the foods of the human— 
such as the different forms of calciums, sodiums, 
potassiums, magnesiums, oxygen and hydrogen 
and many more, are essential requirements in the 
development and growth—tissue and bone build¬ 
ing in the human—and in the maintenance of 
metabolism, therefore good health in every indi- 


Conclusions to The Theory 357 

vidual (from infancy to old age), and if we are 
to believe that all of these elements play an im¬ 
portant part in the so-called quantitative and 
qualitative mineralization process, also in the de¬ 
mineralization process in this same metabolism— 
thereby producing good health or bringing about 
different toxemias and aiding in producing other 
pathological conditions; then it is quite evident or 
at least not beyond a just presumption, that these 
elements are contained in the food and drink of 
the human and that they are composed of “minute 
bodies” or “granules” and that these are in accord, 
—or do harmonize—with those so-called hormones 
or enzymes or ferments found in the blood stream 
in the human, when we remember and consider 
the fact that the blood stream or the constituents 
contained in the blood stream—is the all important 
factor in aiding digestion and supplying nutrition 
to all the organs and tissues of the body, with a 
consequent producing of function; and, if mineral 
metabolism is intimately connected with disturb¬ 
ances of function of the glands of the internal 
secretions—the Endocrine glands—in the human; 
it being understood that the blood stream, primar¬ 
ily furnishes the life and nutrition to the glands 
of internal secretions of every individual after 
being born into the world so that they may per¬ 
form their function and secondarily produce in 
the performance of this function the internal 
secretions wherein are contained the so-called 
“hormones” or “enzymes” or “ferments” or “min¬ 
ute bodies,” said to be the essential fundamentals 
to life in the form of “stimulators,” “detoxicators” 
and “regulators” which in its endless chain of 

24 


358 The Millennium and Medical Science 

reciprocity—by way of the blood stream—gives 
to the individual all the qualifications necessary 
to produce the primary elements of life—the 
spermatozoa in the male and the ovum in the 
female—which later become amalgamated, when 
conception or pregnancy takes place; the blood 
stream of the mother then gives to this conception 
or pregnancy its primary essential factor—nour¬ 
ishment—that it may develop or grow in the form 
of a cell division process,—karyokinesis—this 
process continuing until the embryo has attained 
sufficient growth, in the intra-uterine life or be¬ 
comes a full term child ready for delivery into the 
outer world; the products of the glands, the inter¬ 
nal secretions,—of the Endocrine glands—as 
found in the mother of the child, playing an im¬ 
portant part in the entire process of reproduction, 
by way of the blood stream; the child when born 
receives its necessary essentials of life, in the form 
of daily nourishment; this completes the many 
times mentioned, endless chain of “stimulation,” 
“detoxication,” “regulation” and “reproduction,” 
by way of the blood stream, containing at all times 
the “minute bodies” or “granules.” 

So it may be seen, if for any reason there is an 
insufficient amount or an increased amount, of 
these mineral salts—which the human body ap¬ 
parently requires in a well regulated quantity and 
of a suitable quality—it will cause an irritability 
or act as an antagonizing cause of those glands 
and their internal secretions which have to do with 
the proper balancing of the equilibrium necessary 
to good health; then there will be as a natural 
consequence, an interfering or detrimental sub- 


Conclusions to The Theory 359 

stance present in the blood stream resulting in a 
primary alteration or disturbance in the nutrition 
which supplies the organs and tissues and a sec¬ 
ondary disturbance of function of these organs 
and tissues, bringing about abnormal processes or 
pathological conditions and, if, life is based upon 
the potential energy taken into the body in the 
form of food, then it follows that “affinity and 
antagonism” between these “ion” salts, vegetable 
“vitamines” and animal “hormones,” must play 
an important part in the well-being of the human 
family. 

Toxic Substances in All Nature :— 

If it is true, that there are such material things 
as rattlesnakes, scorpions, tarantulas, centipedes 
and many more insects, reptiles, and animals— 
belonging to the different families—whose bite or 
sting is truly of a poisonous nature, tending to 
cause death of man when such noxious substances 
of a toxic mixture, in any manner, gain entrance 
into the blood stream of the human system; and, 
if it is true, that these living things do possess 
some where within their bodies these venomous 
materials, and if these same poisons are—in ac¬ 
cordance with science—produced and contained 
within the bodies of these same baneful creatures; 
then it is jutisfiable to infer that this “venom” in 
every instance, is produced as a result of a “process 
of secretion” by a special type of cell activity 
contained within a special type of gland—within 
the body of these living things—these glands re¬ 
ceiving their nutrition of life and support of func¬ 
tion, to all appearances, from one source only, the 


360 The Millennium and Medical Science 

“blood stream” of the living thing itself; the life 
of the thing itself being supported, primarily, by 
food and drink, and secondarily by its environ¬ 
ment, which in turn gives to the blood-stream the 
necessary properties to supply the nutrition for 
these special glands (as well as all other glands 
which produce other substances) that they may 
function and produce the different types of toxins 
(poisons) which are never again thrown back into 
the blood-stream, but are carried to a storehouse 
or reservoir contained somewhere within the body 
of the thing itself,—a common instance in all ani¬ 
mal life, is to find several receptacles, within the 
body to store up the different secretions or excre¬ 
tions as the case requires—where they remain until 
required for use. So do we see that the blood 
stream is truly responsible for the production of 
the toxins. 

It is necessary to give some consideration to 
the vast difference between man and these crea¬ 
tures of so malignant a nature; the difference is 
seen in the very nature of man’s existence, his 
method and manner of living and mode of repro¬ 
ducing his kind; this in its entirety making that 
remarkable distinction whereby humanity is 
known as a group of warm-blooded animals, while 
these others (reptiles) are known as the cold¬ 
blooded animals. Much more could be said and 
should be explained hut this small paragraph 
must suffice at this time, as it gives the several 
points needed and in which we are interested at 
this time; first, to make comparisons; second, to 
carry on ideas; and third, to make up our theory. 
It is necessary to select some “one” of these poison 


Conclusions to The Theory 361 

producing and carrying creatures, so as to be as 
specific as possible and avoid confusion, in mak¬ 
ing a comparison. We will therefore take for our 
purpose the “scorpion,” for the reason that its 
geographical distribution shows in many particu¬ 
lars a close interesting correspondence with that 
of the mammalia (a class of animals whose fe¬ 
males have milk-secreting mammae, glands or or¬ 
gans, to nourish their young, embracing man as 
well as other warm-blooded animals) and because 
of the scorpion’s great antiquity; it being in the 
mediocre class as to size, in the insect or reptile 
family, with six legs which answer for its loco¬ 
motive powers; the two extremes in this group 
are, the centipede which is sometimes termed the 
“hundred legged” insect, and the rattlesnake 
which has “no legs” at all, but both in the veno¬ 
mous group with the scorpion. 

In the scorpion we find the exhibition of ani¬ 
mated life; a systematic blood stream which sup¬ 
plies the essentials of life and also the glands 
which possess the hidden power to secrete or pro¬ 
duce this poison; the accommodating structures to 
store this venom and the powers to use it when 
and where needed; the extreme or mighty power 
of this fluid wherein are contained the ingredients 
which cause death, produced in so small a gland, 
in so small a thing, as an insignificant insect. In 
the human we find the extreme as to size, intel¬ 
ligence, mode of living and process of propaga¬ 
tion; the incompatability or loss of power to 
neutralize the toxins of these insects, and the 
antagonizing properties of this poison (even 
though it be only a few drops), in the blood stream 


362 The Millennium and Medical Science 

of the human; the severe clashing of these ele¬ 
ments; those of the blood-stream of the human 
(many times causing death) and those of an in¬ 
sect; this venom producing group, being a waiting 
and fraught-with-death enemy of man. 

The logical conclusions to be drawn here are, 
that man has glands within the body which 
secrete a protecting element or a detoxicating 
hormone, which is thrown into the blood-stream, 
that it may neutralize or destroy any foreign 
poisons with which it may come in contact,—by 
injury, or chemicals, bites, stings, bacteria, para¬ 
sites and other methods of introducing any kind 
of poison into the body, hence into the blood¬ 
stream of the human—but it does not always suc¬ 
ceed in its mission. The insect, on the other hand, 
also has glands which produce toxins, to be used 
for protective purposes, in the preservation of the 
life of the insect. In both instances the object is 
the same on the part of secreting glands; to give 
to the body, the protective elements that preserve 
life; even in microorganisms this function is 
present. 

Final Deductions :— 

Having come to the final chapter of our work 
all the author aspires to add, is a sane explanation 
of the underlying principle together with its subse¬ 
quent action of cause and effect, thereby bringing 
about the plausibility of this theory, being as it is, 
based upon the continual changes which have 
taken place upon our planet from time unknown; 
down through the thousands of so-called ages, our 
world has traveled in its somewhat seemingly 


Conclusions to The Theory 


363 


automatic adjustment and confluent conformation 
of materialization—which could not possibly have 
occurred except by way of what is actually a 
deceptive and illusive tranquility—with its appar¬ 
ently necessary (but truly false), quintessence and 
conciliatory confirmation of those things which 
happened in the progressive stages of evolution, 
causing to produce in its present termination, our 
“man’s world’’ of today, with its every evidence of 
semi-perfection. 

If it is true that all material things are in con¬ 
stant motion, there being a never-ending bombard¬ 
ment of molecules of one kind against another, 
these molecules being composed of atoms and the 
atoms made-up of ions,—in accordance with 
science—then it naturally follows that all things 
which the human perception would define as an 
existent tranquility and would consign to the field 
of peace and quiescency is in reality exactly the 
reverse of such human conception; our worldly 
sphere with its adjacent environment, being a 
state of perpetual action and a condition of more 
or less confluent chaotic readjustments (until such 
action and time arrive whereby an automatic for¬ 
mation of a systematic character would endure, 
brought about by affinities, and such conditions 
surely must have come about to produce all life, 
in accordance with science) expending at all times 
untold amounts of energy, together with an ap¬ 
parently hidden force of attack and motion,—con¬ 
ditions which would necessarily terminate in a 
subsequent change of all things (in time by action) 
thereby involving the consistent persistency of a 
state of evolution—from this source man has 


364 The Millennium and Medical Science 

learned his lesson of function. In other words, 
the natural tendency of all things in reality is 
“towards exertion,” function, or work; from the 
ion to the atom and then to the molecule; from 
the molecule to all cell life, beginning with the 
microorganisms in bacterial and vegetative life, 
and terminating (at least apparently, according to 
our knowledge of the present era) with the minute 
cell life in the lower animals and man, which 
make-up the different organs that did ultimately 
constitute the human. Therefore, from their very 
ancient ancestors (the ions) have the cells in our 
human bodies inherited the instinct to exert them¬ 
selves and function; finally this function culminat¬ 
ing (in the cell) in the human as a natural and 
necessary element of stimulation; to perform and 
function; to production and reproduction by ac¬ 
tion; to progress by work. The presence of this 
actual fact is self-evident in the existence of all 
animation. 

As a consequence of all that has been written 
in this work proper, an effort has been made to 
formulate a theory. As a sequence to this theory 
we have arrived at, and formed our conclusions. 
As a sequel to these conclusions there come the 
final deductions which may be stated in the fol¬ 
lowing terms. 

First, there has been much evidence (not men¬ 
tioned in this work) accumulated by man, which 
tends to demonstrate, that this earth has been in 
existence for hundreds of millions of years. In 
its primary stage, no doubt, it existed as a barren 
world, devoid of all cell-life independent or or¬ 
ganized. Inorganic matter was perhaps its sole 


Conclusions to The Theory 


365 


composition, but did not contain in its construc¬ 
tion, those salts of the earth which are known to 
man of today. There was no affinity between the 
atoms of the elements which composed the earth’s 
surface. The atmosphere was dry and hot, con¬ 
taining noxious gases of various kinds, now extinct 
and not known to man, carbon dioxide is a pos¬ 
sible remnant. There was no water anywhere, 
and great mountains of sand (the only and most 
likely material or something akin to it, existing 
upon its surface) would pile up, first in one place 
and then in another, possibly governed only by 
the winds, volcanoes, earthquakes and its own 
motion. From time to time, this sandy material 
would shift, roll, slide and blow, making a moun¬ 
tain, in the course of time, first in one place and 
then in another, being carried from place to place 
by the force of the prevailing elements. No doubt 
the world at that time revolved upon its imaginary 
axis, but perhaps either in a more loitering 
fashion or in a much faster way, than it does to¬ 
day; it moved in its orbit, as a consequence in 
either case, there would be no regular change of 
seasons, such as we of today now experience every 
year. If the world made a complete revolution 
every few hours (of our time) as it turned and 
tumbled, racing along in its orbit, covering the 
distance of its circle in a few months (of our time) 
there would be as a result, no water anywhere, 
but just a hot barren waste, from the constant rays 
of the sun. Heat when applied to sand will form 
(what we call glass) a substance which contains 
little or no inorganic matter, it resembles granite 
and will not support organic life (all the known 


366 The Millennium and Medical Science 

chemical elements in our world of today being 
more or less combustible, singly or in combi¬ 
nation). 

Second, man of today generates electricity and 
uses it, but he does not know where it comes from 
or what it is composed of; there is much electricity 
in the air, no one generates it there, nothing ob¬ 
structs its path, but the earth seems to absorb it, 
water is its greatest conductor and water is com¬ 
posed of hydrogen and oxygen, removes these two 
elements and man cannot live. The “ionic” theory 
or the “electrons,” briefly stated, tells us; an “ion” 
is defined as a compound, as of atoms or mole¬ 
cules, with one or more electrons, produced by 
electrical decomposition or radioactivity; while an 
electron is defined as the smallest known com¬ 
ponent of matter, always possessing a negative 
electric charge. The opposite parts of an electro¬ 
lyte (a chemical compound which can be decom¬ 
posed by an electric current), which work their 
way through any liquid under the action of the 
electric forces, were named by Faraday the “ions,” 
meaning, the travellers. At the end of the 19th 
century these ideas were extended, to elucidate 
also the conduction of electricity through gases. 
About the year 1897 it was discovered that, in 
certain cases, the moving particles which carried 
the electric current were of much smaller mass 
than the smallest chemical atom, that of hydrogen, 
and that these minute particles, to which were 
given the name of corpuscles, were identical with 
whatever substance from which they were ob¬ 
tained. They enter into the structure of all matter, 
and form a common constituent of all chemical 


Conclusions to The Theory 367 

atoms. The only known properties of these 
corpuscles are their mass and their electric charge. 
Of late years several authorities claim, the recent 
discoveries of important facts give science good 
reasons to believe there exists a constant close 
association between the ions or the electrons and 
all organic matter, and these modern thinkers lay 
great stress upon the significance of this intimate 
relationship and its due recognition of conse¬ 
quence, in connection with these minute factors, 
and all cell life. Therefore, it may be seen that 
the late revolutionary or evolutionary view of 
nature, established in the biological and sociologi¬ 
cal sciences, is thus extended to physical science, 
not only in the development of planets and suns, 
but even in the chemical atoms (and therefore in- 
cidently, it may be said, all cell life), hitherto be¬ 
lieved indestructible and eternal. 

Third, insofar as the human and its reproduc¬ 
tion is concerned. On the part of the (prospec¬ 
tive) father, we find, first, the affinity or hidden 
power of desire, to seek the female (his wife) in 
secret seclusion of love and happiness; second, 
the production (on his part) of the male element, 
the spermatozoa, and his duty of placing this 
element in a location and position of advantage, 
where it may impregnate the ovum. Here we may 
hestitate long enough to remark that, in our selec¬ 
tion of choice we have brought forth an important 
issue, and one having a strong tendency to lead 
into the paradoxical. Strange to say, we have 
here, an illustration of where one of our recog¬ 
nized postulates in figures, is proven to be false; 
for instance we say; one substracted from two and 


368 The Millennium and Medical Science 


the remainder is one; but in the case of nature’s 
laws this does not hold true, because it requires 
one female and one male to produce a third in¬ 
dividual, in this case, one taken from two leaves 
a remainder of three or viewed from another angle 
one (male element or cell of life) and one (female 
element or cell of life) will prodouce first, one cell, 
and second, one child; in conventional figures the 
sum of one and one, are two; it has been said 
when a man and woman become married, they 
then become one, but it is not very long before that 
one, which was, is replaced by three or becomes 
three, perhaps four or five. At the same time when 
we speak of an expectant mother we cannot alto¬ 
gether consider her as a purely single individual 
but as a kind of enigma of a trinity, not alone 
from the fact that there exists a great intimacy 
between the pregnant mother and her unborn 
child but the mother apparently, also possesses 
(incorporated within the unborn) much of the 
father’s tissues (hereditary characteristics) the 
foundation for the phenomena being laid by the 
spermatozoa, when it entered the ovum and con¬ 
ception took place. Conception once having taken 
place there follows for a period of ten lunar 
months, the many possible physiological changes 
which may occur (to the mother) as a result of the 
growth and development of the unborn, and there¬ 
fore much anxiety is felt relative to the mental and 
physical condition of the mother with child, who 
cannot always be considered as, an entirely nor¬ 
mal individual in a truly normal condition. This 
condition no doubt is brought about by the action 
of the endocrine glands. 


Conclusions to The Theory 369 

Fourth, if it is true these “enzymes,” or “hor¬ 
mones,” or “ferments,” (or call them what you 
will, the term or name by which they are now 
known is of little or no consequence;) 

“ Tis but thy name that is my enemy; 

Thou art thyself, though not a Montague. 
What’s Montague? it is nor hand, nor foot, 

Nor arm, nor face, nor any other part 
Belonging to a man. O, be some other name! 
What’s in a name? that which we call a rose 
By any other name would smell as sweet; 

So Romeo would, were he not Romeo call’d, 
Retain that dear perfection which he owes 
Without that title. Romeo, doff thy name, 

And for that name which is no part of thee 
Take all myself.” 

— Shakespeare. 

do exist as “live minute bodies” then we will have 
learned nature’s secret;—the long sought key, the 
“open sesame” to nature’s work—we will, appar¬ 
ently have been lead to the open door, so long 
closed to our intelligence, and for the first time in 
the history of the world, will we be permitted to 
“see the light” in the long night of darkness which 
existed in the past of life’s relative obscurity, and 
center our future thoughts upon the solving of the 
“realm of mystery” the “beginning and ending of 
life,” by looking in at the open door; further than 
this point we cannot possibly venture. The admis¬ 
sion of our meager knowledge, relative to the en¬ 
tire subject matter, is indeed a just obstruction to 
our entering this door, and for the present we must 
be content to stand upon the threshold and gaze 
in awe, with reverence and much admiration, 


370 The Millennium and Medical Science 


upon nature’s work; we may then look forward 
to a possible realization of a future knowledge, 
relative to these ingenious productive and repro¬ 
ductive powers, in its infinite creation of all 
animation. 

“Life is a narrow vale between the cold 
and barren peaks of two eternities. We 
strive in vain to look beyond the heights. 

We cry aloud, and the only answer is the 
echo of our wailing cry. From the voice¬ 
less lips of the unreplying dead there comes 
no word; but in the night of death hope 
sees a star and listening love can hear the 
rustle of a wing/’ 

Thus, did R. G. Ingersoll, in a few words, define 
the mysteries of love, life and death, in the oration 
at the grave of his brother. Or this may have 
been intended as a definition of the departure 
from the body, of the so-called spirit, when the 
end comes. (When “death or life,”—which ever 
it may be,—takes flight.) 

Ad finem 
(at the end) 


The world is beginning to see that 
people who can radiate sunshine 
and carry gladness and good cheer 
wherever they go, although they 
may be poor, are of infinitely 
greater value to society than the 
millionaire of money, who pauper¬ 
izes everything he touches, and 
everybody who comes in contact 
with him, by his close contemptible 
methods. 

Largeness of heart and generosity 
of soul make millionaires of char¬ 
acter who are worth more to the 
world than mere moneyed million¬ 
aires. 

The time will come in the progress 
of the world when we shall not have 
to depend on rich furnishings, 
costly tapestries, and gold plate. 
Character will become so enriched 
in the upward growth of the world 
that the surroundings, however 
costly, will be considered but a 
cheap setting of a precious life- 
stone. Cheerfulness is a potent 
factor of success. 


— Anon. 










Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: March 2016 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN COLLECTIONS PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 






